Mita KM 5035

3035
4035
5035
* The above illustration includes the optional original cover.
Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier

Keep it close to the copier for easy reference
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
<IMPORTANT>
The instructions contained herein are based on the 30 cpm (copies-per-minute) 3035 copier, the 40 cpm 4035 copier
and the 50 cpm 5035 copier.
NOTE:
This Operation Guide contains information that corresponds to using both the inch and metric versions of this copier.
Within the text we have generally indicated messages by listing that for the inch version followed, in brackets, by the
corresponding information for the metric version. However, when a message is essentially the same, or when the
difference is only one of upper- and lower-case spelling, we have listed the information specifically as it is displayed in
the inch version of this machine.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without
permission in writing from the Publisher.
Legal Restriction On Copying

• It may be prohibited to copy copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
• It is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies.
• Copying other items may be prohibited.

Introduction to this Operation Guide
The explanations contained in this Operation Guide have been

separated into different sections in order to allow even those using a
copier for the first time to use this machine efficiently, properly and
with relative ease.
A basic introduction to each section can be found below for reference.
Refer to the related section when using this copier.
Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.

This section contains explanations on information that is necessary
for you to know prior to using this copier for the first time after
purchase.
For example, it contains notes and cautions on installation and
operation that should be strictly obeyed in order to ensure its safe and
proper operation.
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS

This section contains explanations on the names and functions of the
parts of the copier and its operation panel.
Section 3 PREPARATIONS
This section contains explanations on procedures for loading copy
paper.
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION

This section contains explanations on the basic procedures required
to make simple copies.
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS

This section contains explanations on using the various convenient
functions of this copier.
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT

FUNCTIONS
This section contains explanations on the procedures for registering
frequently used business forms and documents on the optional Hard
Disk, printing them out when desired, and managing printing
conditions.
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT

This section contains explanations on the procedures for changing the
various default settings available for adjusting the copier to fit your
copy needs and on the procedures for managing copy us.
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

This section contains explanations on the optional equipment that are
available for use with this copier.
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains explanations on handling problems that may
occur during operation of this copier, such as when an error indication
appears or if a paper jam occurs.
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION

This section contains explanations on maintaining the copier in proper
condition and on replacing the toner container, as well as information
on the specifications for this copier.
i
CONTENTS
Section 1 5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes
[Memo mode] .......................................................................... 5-9
IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST. .. 1-1
6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes] ........ 5-11
CAUTION LABELS ................................................................... 1-1 (1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS ............................................. 1-2 (Sheet erase mode) ....................................................... 5-11
(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ...................................................... 1-3
made from books (Book erase mode) ........................... 5-11
(3) Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using individual
border settings (Individual border erase mode) ............. 5-12
Section 2 7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy
NAMES OF PARTS ............................... 2-1 page [Combine/Merge Copy modes] ..................................... 5-13
(1) 2 in 1 .............................................................................. 5-13
1. Main body ................................................................................ 2-1 (2) 4 in 1 .............................................................................. 5-13
2. Operation panel ....................................................................... 2-3 8. Printing page numbers on copies
3. Touch panel ............................................................................. 2-5 [Print page numbers mode] ................................................... 5-16
9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode] ..... 5-20
10. Making booklets from sheet originals
Section 3 [Booklet/Stitching mode] ........................................................ 5-22
PREPARATIONS ................................... 3-1 11. Making booklets from book originals

[Book to Booklet mode] ......................................................... 5-26
1. Loading paper ......................................................................... 3-1 12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher
(1) Note when adding paper .................................................. 3-1 [Sort/Finished mode] ............................................................. 5-29
(2) Loading paper into the drawer[cassette] .......................... 3-2
13. Auto rotation function ............................................................. 5-30
(3) Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray ......................... 3-3
14. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets
[Cover mode] ......................................................................... 5-31
15. Original size selection mode ................................................. 5-34
Section 4
16. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies
BASIC OPERATION .............................. 4-1 [Transparency + backing sheet mode] ................................... 5-36
1. Basic copying procedure ......................................................... 4-1 17. Inverting black and white [Invert mode] ................................. 5-38
2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image ......................................... 4-5 18. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode] ................. 5-39
(1) Auto magnification selection mode .................................. 4-5 19. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying
(2) Zoom mode ..................................................................... 4-6 [Proof mode] .......................................................................... 5-40
(3) Preset zoom mode ........................................................... 4-7 20. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished
(4) XY zoom mode ................................................................ 4-8 [Repeat copy mode] .............................................................. 5-42
3. Interrupt copying ...................................................................... 4-9 (1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying ...................... 5-42
4. Job reservation ...................................................................... 4-10 (2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode ......................... 5-43
5. Energy-saving modes ............................................................ 4-11 21. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation
[Batch scanning mode] .......................................................... 5-47
22. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode] ................................... 5-48
Section 5 23. Original set direction .............................................................. 5-49
OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS .... 5-1 24. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function] ...... 5-50
(1) Registering a program ................................................... 5-50
1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided (2) Using programmed settings to make copies .................. 5-51
copy modes] ............................................................................ 5-1 (3) Changing a registered program name ........................... 5-51
(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original ................ 5-1 (4) Deleting a registered program ....................................... 5-52
(2) Making 2-sided copies from an 25. Registration keys ................................................................... 5-53
open-faced (books, etc.) original ..................................... 5-1 (1) Registering a function or mode under a function key .... 5-53
(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals .............. 5-2 (2) Deleting a registration key ............................................. 5-55
2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets 26. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of
[Page separation/Split copy modes] ........................................ 5-4 originals in one operation [Job build mode] ........................... 5-57
(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals ............... 5-4 (1) Using the job build mode ............................................... 5-57
(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals ........... 5-4 (2) Selecting the settings and functions ................................ 5-62
3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode] ............. 5-6
(1) Standard margin .............................................................. 5-6
(2) Separate front and back margin settings ......................... 5-6
4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode] ........ 5-8
ii
CONTENTS
Section 6 Section 8
DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...................... 8-1
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ............... 6-1 (1) Document Processor ....................................................... 8-1
(2) Paper Feeder ................................................................... 8-5
1. Document management functions .......................................... 6-1
(3) Paper Feeder ................................................................... 8-5
(1) What are the “document management” functions? .......... 6-1
(4) Document Finisher ........................................................... 8-5
(2) Form registration .............................................................. 6-1
(3) Shared data box .............................................................. 6-4
(4) Synergy print boxes ......................................................... 6-9
(7) Built-in Finisher ................................................................ 8-9
2. Output management functions .............................................. 6-20 (8) Job Separator ................................................................ 8-11
(1) What are the “output management” functions? .............. 6-20 (9) Hard Disk ....................................................................... 8-11
(2) Display of the output management functions ................. 6-21 (10) Key Counter ................................................................... 8-12
(3) The “Print status” screen ................................................ 6-22 (11) Document Tray ............................................................... 8-12
(12) Printer Kit ....................................................................... 8-12
(13) Printer/Scanner Kit ........................................................ 8-12
Section 7 (14) Fax Kit ............................................................................ 8-12
COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7-1

1. Copy management mode ........................................................ 7-1 Section 9
(1) Copy management procedures ....................................... 7-2
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................... 9-1
(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen .............. 7-3
(3) Editing copy management information ............................ 7-4 1. If one of the following messages is displayed .......................... 9-1
(4) Checking the copy management counts ........................ 7-21
2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes ............................... 9-3
(5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF .......... 7-25
(6) Changing the copy management default settings .......... 7-25 3. When paper misfeeds .............................................................. 9-4
(7) Making copies when copy management is turned ON .. 7-37 (1) Cautions ........................................................................... 9-4
(2) Removal procedures ........................................................ 9-4
2. Default settings ...................................................................... 7-38
(1) Machine default settings ................................................ 7-38 4. If other trouble occurs ............................................................ 9-13
(2) Accessing the machine default settings ......................... 7-41
(3) Making machine default settings ................................... 7-42
(4) Copy default settings ..................................................... 7-59 Section 10
(5) Accessing the copy default settings ............................... 7-62
(6) Making copy default settings ......................................... 7-63
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
3. Multi-bypass tray paper settings ............................................ 7-87
INFORMATION .................................... 10-1
(1) Paper size and type ....................................................... 7-87
1. Cleaning the copier ............................................................... 10-1
(2) Selecting other standard sizes ....................................... 7-88
2. Replacing the toner container and waste toner box .............. 10-3
4. Original size registration ........................................................ 7-90
3. Specifications ........................................................................ 10-7
5. Drum refresh ......................................................................... 7-91
4. Environmental Specifications ................................................ 10-9
6. Checking the total counter and printing out the counter
5. Installing the optional equipment ......................................... 10-10
report ..................................................................................... 7-93
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart .................. 10-12
7. Box management default settings ......................................... 7-94
(1) Box settings ................................................................... 7-94
(2) Accessing the box management default settings .......... 7-94
(3) Making box management default settings ..................... 7-95
8. Hard disk management ......................................................... 7-99
9. Report print out .................................................................... 7-101
10. Changing the language used for messages ........................ 7-103
11. Entering characters ............................................................. 7-104
(1) Character input screens ............................................... 7-104
(2) Character input procedure ........................................... 7-106
iii
● MAKING FULL USE OF THE COPIER'S ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
1 Having the copier automatically select 2 Making clear reproductions of 3 Various functions for making enlarged
copy paper of the same size as the photographs and reduced copies
original <Image quality selection> ■ Enlarging/reducing the copy image to fit the
<Auto paper selection mode> (Page 4-3) size of paper in a specified drawer[cassette]
(Page 4-2) <Auto magnification selection mode>
abcdefghijk abc (Page 4-5) 11"✕17" (A3)
abcdefghijk defghi
abcdefghijk jkmn
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk 8 1/2"✕11" (A4)
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk 129% (141%)
5 1/2"✕8 1/2" (A5) 64% (70%)
■ Enlarging/reducing the copy image to a ■ One-touch selection of the copy ■ Enlarging/reducing the length and width of
desired size between 25% and 400% magnification ratio the image to separate magnification ratios
<Zoom mode> (Page 4-6) <Preset zoom mode> <XY zoom mode>
(Page 4-7) (Page 4-8)
70% 141%
50% 400%
25%
400%
M M Y%
X%
4 Making 2-sided copies from various types 5 Copying each image of open-faced 6 Creating a margin on the copies
of originals (books, etc.) or 2-sided originals onto <Margin mode>
<2-sided copy modes> separate sheets (Page 5-6)
(Page 5-1) <Page separation/Split copy modes>
(Page 5-4)
1
2
3
4
5
2
4
1
3
5
12 1 2
1 1 2
2
7 Centering the copy image 8 Adding a space next to the copy images 9 Making copies with clean edges
<Centering/Image shift mode> for making notes <Border erase modes>
(Page 5-8) <Memo mode> (Page 5-11)
(Page 5-9)
10 Fitting the image of either two or four 11 Printing page numbers on the copies 12 Overlaying one image over another
originals onto a single copy page <Print page numbers mode> <Form overlay mode>
<Combine/Merge Copy modes> (Page 5-16) (Page 5-20)
(Page 5-13)
A A
B B
C
D
-1-
C
D
A A
-2-
-3-
B B
-4-
C C
iv
13 Making booklets from sheet originals 14 Making booklets from books 15 Automatic sorting of copy sets without the
<Booklet/Stitching mode> <Book to Booklet mode> Document Finisher
(Page 5-22) (Page 5-26) <Sort/Finished mode>
3
(Page 5-29) 1
2
3
2
3
1
2
a
1
3
2
1
b
a
b
AB AB 2
3
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
16 Automatic rotation of the copy image 17 Adding a front and/or back cover to your 18 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for
<Auto rotation function> copy sets OHP transparencies
(Page 5-30) <Cover mode> <Transparency + backing sheet mode>
(Page 5-31) (Page 5-36)
B
6
5 6
4 5
3
2 4 3
1
A
2 1
19 Inverting black and white 20 Making mirror image copies 21 Making a test copy prior to large volume
<Invert mode> <Mirror image mode> copying
(Page 5-38) (Page 5-39) <Proof mode>
(Page 5-40)
22 Making more of the same copies after a 23 Copying a large volume of originals in 24 Saving on toner use
copy job is finished one operation <Eco print mode>
<Repeat copy mode> <Batch scanning mode> (Page 5-48)
(Page 5-42) (Page 5-47)
C
A B C B
A
25 Memorizing frequently used settings 26 Easily add covers and insert sheets 27 Registering images to be used for form
<Program function> between various sets of originals in one overlay
(Page 5-50) operation <Form registration>
<Job build mode> (Page 6-1)
3 4 5
(Page 5-57)
2 6
7
1 8
v
28 Managing shared forms 29 Printing out different stored originals in 30 Using department ID-codes to manage
<Shared data box> one operation the number of copies made by each
(Page 6-4) <Synergy print boxes> department
(Page 6-9) <Copy management mode>
(Page 7-1)
31 Changing the language used in the touch 32 A full range of optional equipment is ■ Paper Feeder (Page 8-5)
panel available
<Language selection function> ■ Document Processor (Page 8-1)
(Page 7-103)
English Español
■ Paper Feeder (Page 8-5) ■ Document Finisher (Page 8-5) ■ Document Finisher (Page 8-9)
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-9) ■ Built-in Finisher (Page 8-9) ■ Job Separator (Page 8-11)
■ Hard Disk (Page 8-11) ■ Key Counter (Page 8-12) ■ Document Tray (Page 8-12)
vi
■ Printer Kit (Page 8-12) ■ Printer/scanner Kit (Page 8-12) ■ Fax Kit (Page 8-12)
vii
● Low Power Mode
The device automatically enters “Low Power Mode” when 15 minutes
have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no
activity that must pass before “Low Power Mode” is activated may be
lengthened. See “5. Energy-saving modes” on page 4-11 and “Auto
We have determined as a participating company in the International
low power time” on page 7-48 for more information.
Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards
laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
● Off Mode (Only when using the copier functions of this machine)
The device automatically enters “Off Mode” when 60 minutes have
About the International Energy Star Program
passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no
International Energy Star Program has as its basic goals the activity that must pass before “Off Mode” is activated may be
promotion of efficient energy use and the reduction of the lengthened. For more information see “5. Energy-saving modes” on
environmental pollution that accompanies energy consumption by page 4-11 and “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47.
promoting the manufacture and sale of products that fulfill program
● Sleep Mode (If the copier has printer and/or facsimile function)
standards.
The device automatically enters “Sleep Mode” when 60 minutes have
International Energy Star Program standards require that copies passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no
come equipped with a “Low Power Mode” where energy consumption activity that must pass before “Sleep Mode” is activated may be
is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device lengthened. For more information see “5. Energy-saving modes” on
was last used, as well as an “Off Mode” where the device page 4-11 and “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47.
automatically turns itself off after there is no activity within a set
amount of time. When the copier includes printer and fax functions, ● Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
the printer and fax must enter a “Low Power Mode” where power The Energy Star Program encourages the use of 2-sided copying
consumption is automatically reduced after a certain amount of time which reduces the load on the environment and this device includes
elapses since they were last used, and they must also support a 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two
“Sleep Mode” where power consumption is reduced to a minimum 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is
when there is no activity within a set amount of time. possible to lower the amount of paper used.
This product is equipped with the following features as a result of its For more information see “1. Making 2-sided copies from various types
compliance with International Energy Star Program standards. of originals [2-sided copy modes]” on page 5-1.
● Paper Recycling
The Energy Star Program encourages the use of environmentally
friendly recycled paper. Your sales or service representative can
provide information about recommended paper types.
* When you are using the copier functions of this machine, replace all references to the “Sleep Mode” with the “Off Mode”.
viii
Please read this Operation Guide before using the copier. Keep it close to the copier
for easy reference.
The sections of this guide and parts of the copier marked with symbols are safety warnings meant
to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage
of the copier. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
DANGER: Indicates that serious injury or even death will very possibly result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention
to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The m symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention
are indicated inside the symbol.
................. [General warning]
................. [Warning of danger of electrical shock]
................. [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics
of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.
.................. [Warning of prohibited action]
................... [Disassembly prohibited]
The ● symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be
performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
.................. [Alert of required action]
.................. [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
.................. [Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this
Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing. (fee required)
ix
x
Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.
CAUTION LABELS
Caution labels have been attached to the copier at the following locations for safety purposes.
BE SUFFICIENTLY CAREFUL to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.
Label 1
High temperature inside. Do not
touch parts in this area, because
there is a danger of getting burned.
Label 4
High temperature inside.
Do not touch parts in this
area, because there is a
danger of getting burned.
Label 2
Do not incinerate toner and Label 3
toner container. Dangerous Moving parts inside. May cause
sparks may cause burn. ...... personal injury. Do not touch
moving parts. .................................
NOTE: DO NOT remove these labels.

1-1
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
■ Environment • During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount
does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however,
the copier is used over a long period of time in a poorly
CAUTION ventilated room or when making an extremely large
number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To
maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
• Avoid placing the copier on or in locations which
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
are unstable or not level. Such locations may
cause the copier to fall down or fall over. This
type of situation presents a danger of personal
injury or damage to the copier. ............................. ■ Power supply/Grounding the copier
• Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If
dust or dirt become attached to the power plug,
clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock. ....................................................
WARNING
• DO NOT use a power supply with a voltage other
• Avoid locations near radiators, heaters, or other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in
heat sources, or locations near flammable items, the same outlet. These types of situations
to avoid the danger of fire. ................................... present a danger of fire or electrical shock. .........
• To keep the copier cool and facilitate changing of • Plug the power cord securely into the outlet. If
parts and maintenance, allow access space as metallic objects come in contact with the prongs
shown below. Leave adequate space, especially on the plug, it may cause a fire or electric shock.
around the vents, to allow air to be properly
ventilated out of the copier. .................................. • Always connect the copier to an outlet with a
ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an
earth connection is not possible, contact your
service representative. .........................................
Other precautions
• Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to
Rea
r: =>11
the copier.
Le 13/
16"/3
=> ft: 0cm
30c 11 13
m /16
"/
Rig
ht: >
= 11
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect
Fr o 13/
=>
100 39 3/8
nt: 1 6"
/30
cm device. Ensure that the socket/outlet is located/installed
cm "/
near the equipment and is easily accessible.
Other precautions
• Adverse environmental conditions may affect the safe ■ Handling of plastic bags
operation and performance of the copier. Install in an air-
conditioned room (recommended room temperature:
around 73.4°F (23°C), humidity: around 50%) and avoid
the following locations when selecting a site for the
WARNING
copier. • Keep the plastic bags that are used with the
. Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to copier away from children. The plastic may cling
to their nose and mouth causing suffocation. .......
direct sunlight.
. Avoid locations with vibrations.
. Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
. Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
. Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
• Delicate floor material may be damaged if this product is

moved after installation.
1-2
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
■ Cautions when using the copier
CAUTION
WARNING • DO NOT pull the power cord when removing it
from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the
• DO NOT place metallic objects or containers with wires may become broken and there is a danger
water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or of fire or electrical shock. (ALWAYS grasp the
near the copier. This of situation presents a power plug when removing the power cord from
danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall the outlet.) ............................................................
inside. ...................................................................
• ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet
• DO NOT remove any of the covers from the when moving the copier. If the power cord is
copier as there is a danger of electrical shock damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical
from high voltage parts inside the copier. ............ shock. ...................................................................
• DO NOT damage, break or attempt to repair the • If the copier will not be used for a short period of
power cord. DO NOT place heavy objects on the time (overnight, etc.), turn the power switch OFF
cord, pull it, bend it unnecessarily or cause any (O).
other type of damage. If it will not be used for an extended period of
These types of situations present a danger of fire time (vacations, etc.), remove the power plug
or electrical shock. ............................................... from the outlet for safety purposes during the
time the copier is not in use. ................................
• NEVER attempt to repair or disassemble the
copier or its parts as there is a danger of fire, • ALWAYS hold the designated parts only when
electrical shock or damage to the laser. If the lifting or moving the copier. ..................................
laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it
causing blindness. ................................................ • For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power
plug from the outlet when performing cleaning
• If the copier becomes excessively hot, smoke operations. ...........................................................
appears from the copier, there is an odd smell, or
any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a • If dust accumulates within the copier, there is a
danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the power danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore
switch OFF (O) immediately, BE ABSOLUTELY recommended that you consult with your service
CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the representative in regard to cleaning of internal
outlet and then contact your service parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished
representative. ..................................................... prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with
your service representative in regard to the cost
• If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other of cleaning the internal parts of the copier. ..........
fluids, etc.) falls into the copier, turn the power
switch OFF (O) immediately. Next, BE
ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power
plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock. Then contact your service
representative. .....................................................
• DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with

wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical
shock. ...................................................................
• ALWAYS contact your service representative for

maintenance or repair of internal parts. ...............
1-3
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
Other precautions ■ Cautions when handling

• DO NOT place heavy objects on the copier or cause consumables
other damage to the copier.
• DO NOT open the front cover, turn off the power switch,
or pull out the power plug during copying. CAUTION
• When lifting or moving the copier, contact your service • DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container
representative. or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may
cause burns. .........................................................
• Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or
printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static • Keep the toner container and the waste toner box
electricity. out of the reach of children...................................
• DO NOT attempt to perform any operations not • If toner happens to spill from the toner container
explained in this handbook. or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and
ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and
• CAUTION : Use of controls or adjustments or
skin. ......................................................................
performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. . If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with
fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
• Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful. . If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth out
with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a
physician.
. If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them
thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
. If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with
soap and water.
• DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the

toner container or the waste toner box. ................
Other precautions
• After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container and
the waste toner box in accordance with Federal, State
and Local rules and regulations.
• Store all consumables in a cool, dark location.
• If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period

of time, remove all paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)]
and the multi-bypass tray and seal in its original
packaging.
1-4
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM
1. Safety of laser beam
This copier has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.
DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and
maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser
beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser
products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976.
The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United
States.
On this copier, the label is on the right side.
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the la-
ser beam, which is invisible.
Shown below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit.
DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOIDO DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION NVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
ACOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE SI OUVERT.
DANGEREUX DE REGARDER A L'INTERIEUR.
VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLEN WENN GEÖFFNET.
NICHT HINENSEHEN.
TYPE:2AV1301 MATSUSHITA
WAVE LENGHT:770-795nm
LASER SOURCE:5mW
INPUT:24VDC/MAX2.0A
5VDC/300mA
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-5
CAUTION!
The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only
functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
ATTENTION!
Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension.
Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement : ils ne
mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.
1-6
NEW 3035/4035/5035 COPIER LIMITED WARRANTY
1. Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera Mita”)
warrant the Customer’s new copier, and the new accessories installed with the initial installation
of the copier, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or
400,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for the
3035, or 500,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for
the 4035 and the 5035, whichever first occurs. In the event the copier or an accessory is found
to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera Mita’s only obligation and the Customer’s
exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. It is understood that Kyocera Mita
shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
2. This warranty is valid only as to the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a
new Kyocera Mita copier in the United States of America, or Canada based upon the country of
purchase.
3. In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the
Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Mita
Dealer is not able to provide service, write to Kyocera Mita at the address below for the name
and address of the Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer in your area.
4. This warranty does not cover copiers or accessories: (a) which have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical
stress, (b) which have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera Mita brand parts or
supplies, (c) which have been serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera Mita or an
Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer, or (d) which have had the serial number modified, altered, or
removed.
5. This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits, which
consist of the drum unit, the fixing unit, and the developing unit. Kyocera Mita shall give the
Customer a separate warranty for these items.
6. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person is
authorized to extend the time period, or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera Mita.
7. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND (CONDITIONS),

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA MITA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY (OR CONDITION) OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA MITA SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE
OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE COPIER.
1-7
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION – The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.
1-8
1. Main body
2
6
3 7
8
9
1 Original cover (Option)

(Open/close to set the original on the platen.)
2 Operation panel
(Contains the keys and indicators for operating the copier.)
3 Left cover 1 handle

(Pull up to open the left cover 1.)
4 Left cover 1
(Open when a paper misfeed occurs.)
5 Platen
(Set originals here for copying. Place originals face-down with the edges aligned with the size scales on the left and rear sides of the platen.)
6 Original size scales

(Be sure to align the original with these when setting the original on the platen.)
7 Drawer[Cassette] 1
(Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].)
8 Drawer[Cassette] 2
(Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].)
9 Left cover 2
(Open when a paper misfeed occurs inside the left cover 2.)
2-1
7
B 8
C
9
D 0
E A
F 0
J I K G
0 Multi-bypass tray
(Load paper here when copying onto small-size or special paper.)
! Insert guides
(Be sure to set the paper width when loading paper on the multi-bypass tray.)
@ Toner container
# Toner container release lever

(Operate to replace the toner container.)
$ Waste toner box
% Cleaning shaft
(Pull and push back in after toner container replacement or when copy images become soiled with toner.)
^ Front cover
(Open to replace the toner container or waste toner box.)
& Power switch

(Turn ON (I) before starting to make copies.)
* Copy store section

(Copied paper is stored here.)
( Length adjustment plate

(Adjust to the length of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].)
) Width adjustment lever

(Hold the lever and adjust the width guide to the width of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].)
⁄ Handles for transport

(Become handles when pulled out.)
2-2
2. Operation panel
@! 0 ( * & ^ % 7 6 5 4
# $ 9 8 1 2 3
1 [Start] key & indicator lamp @ [Printer] key, lamp & indicator
(Press this key when the lamp in that key is lit green and you want (Press this key when you want to use the optional printer functions
to start copying.) of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when
the machine is in the printer operation mode. The lamp to the left
2 [Stop/Clear] key
of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash one of those
(Press this key when you want to stop copying or change the colors, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-3.)
number of copies to be made.)
# [Scanner] key, lamp & indicator
3 [Reset] key (Press this key when you want to use the optional scanner
(Press this key to reset all functions to their initial mode settings.
functions of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will
See “Initial mode” on page 2-4.) light when the machine is in the scanner operation mode. The
4 [Energy Saver] key & indicator lamp lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will
(Press this key when you want to turn the energy-saving mode ON. flash one of those colors, depending upon the status of the
Press the same key again to turn the energy-saving mode OFF. machine. See page 9-3.)
See page 4-11.) $ [Fax] key, lamp & indicator
5 [Interrupt] key & indicator lamp (Press this key when you want to use the optional fax functions of
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when
perform interrupt copying. See page 4-9.) the machine is in the fax operation mode. The lamp to the left of
the key will either light or flash green, depending upon the status
6 [Management] key of the machine. )
(When copy management is turned ON, press this key after
copying in order to return to the department ID-code entry display. % [Auto Selection] key & indicator lamp
See page 7-1.) (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
the auto selection mode. The optional Document Processor must
7 [Default Setting/Counter] key be installed in your copier in order to use this mode.
(Press this key when you want to perform default settings as well See page 8-3.)
as those related to copy management, etc.)
^ [Job Build] key & indicator lamp
8 Keypad (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
(Use these keys when you want to set the number of copies to be the job build mode. See page 5-57.)
made or enter other values.)
& [Repeat Copy] key & indicator lamp
9 Touch panel (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
(This panel displays such information as operation procedures, the repeat copy mode. The optional Hard Disk must be installed on
machine status, and the various function keys.) this copier in order to use this mode. See page 5-42.)
0 Brightness adjustment control dial * [Job Queue] key & indicator lamp
(Turn this dial when you want to adjust the brightness of the touch (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
panel.) the output management functions of the copier. See page 6-20.)
! [Copier] key, lamp & indicator ( [Document Management] key & indicator lamp
(Press this key to light the indicator to the right of the key when you (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use
want to use the copier functions of this machine.) the document management functions of the copier. The optional
Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this
function.See page 6-1.)
2-3
● Initial mode (at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is
pressed)
In the default settings prepared at the factory, paper of the same size
as the original is selected automatically and the copy magnification
ratio is set to “100%” [1:1] (under the auto paper selection mode), the
number of copies to be made is set to “1” and the image quality is set
to the text+photo mode.
NOTES
• The default settings for the initial mode can be changed using the
corresponding “copy default settings” procedure.
• It is possible for you to change the default setting for the copy
exposure in the initial mode from the “manual exposure mode” to the
“auto exposure mode”. (See “Exposure mode” on page 7-63.)
● Auto clear function

Once a designated amount of time has passed after copying stops
(between 10 and 270 seconds), the auto clear function will
automatically engage and the copier will return to the same settings
as those after warm up (initial mode settings). (However, the copy
exposure mode and the image quality mode will not change.) Copies
can continually be made using the same settings (copy mode,
number of copies and exposure mode) if the next batch of copying is
started before the auto clear function engages.
● Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function

If two drawers[cassettes] contain the same size of paper and the
paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic
drawer[cassette] switching function will switch to paper feed from the
other drawer[cassette] that still contains paper.
NOTES
• The automatic drawer[cassette] switching function can be turned

OFF. (See “Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF” on page
7-42.)
• Paper must be loaded in the same orientation in both
drawers[cassettes].
• Only drawers[cassettes] that are loaded with the same type of paper
can be used with the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function.
2-4
3. Touch panel
Inch specifications
1 2 3
Paper Size Set

Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
quality ^
81/2x11" Sort:Off
Color APS AMS
4 Reduce
11x81/2" Bypass Auto /Enlarge
Plain Plain Exposure Sort:On
11x81/2"
Recycled Exposure Reduce Sort/
mode /Enlarge Finished
Basic User choice Function Program
& * 6 58( 97 ! ) @ 0# $ %
Metric specifications
1 2 3
Paper Size Set

Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality ^
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour
4 Auto
Reduce/
Bypass Sort:On Enlarge
Plain Plain Exposure
Exposure Reduce/ Sort/

Recycled
mode Enlarge Finished
& * 6 58( 97 ! ) @ 0# $ %
2-5
1 This area displays messages on the machine's status and on * “User choice” tab
operational procedures. (Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the “User
2 This area displays information on the size of paper in the choice” tab.)
drawer[cassette] and the current copy magnification ratio.
Inch specifications
3 This area displays the current number of copies to be made.
4 Paper size keys (Remaining paper volume icons)
(Touch these keys when you want to change the currently selected
drawer[cassette] in order to change the size of paper that will be
2 sided/ Select Orig.image Margin/ Border
used. The drawer[cassette] that holds the currently selected paper Separation orig.size quality Centering Erase
size and type of paper will be highlighted. Drawer[Cassette] No.3

and drawer[cassette] No.4 will be displayed when the optional
Combine
Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.)
5 “APS” key
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the Metric specifications
paper size selected automatically. See page 4-2.)
6 “Bypass” key
(Touch this key when you want to copy onto paper that is set on
the multi-bypass tray. The type of paper registered for use on the
2-sided/ Select Image Margin/ Erase
multi-bypass tray will be indicated in the key.) Split size orig. quality Imag. shift Mode
7 Copy exposure adjustment keys / Copy exposure scale

(Touch the appropriate key when you want to manually adjust the Merge copy
copy exposure. The copy exposure scale will indicate the currently Basic User choice Function Program
selected setting. See page 4-2.)

8 “Exposure mode” key
( “Function” tab
(Touch this key when you want to access the “Exposure Mode”
(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the
screen.)
“Function” tab.)
9 “Auto Exposure” key
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to select the Inch specifications
auto exposure mode. In the auto exposure mode, the contrast of Paper size Set
the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level
selected automatically. See page 4-2.) Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine
0 “AMS” key Exposure Reduce Auto Batch

Up
mode /Enlarge Selection scanning
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the Orig.image Margin/ Forms
Page # Down
copy magnification ratio selected automatically. See page 4-5.) quality Centering Overlay
Sort/ Border Cover

! “Reduce/Enlarge” key Finished Erase Mode
Booklet
(Touch this key when you want to manually change the copy Basic User choice Function Program
magnification ratio. See page 4-6.) Paper size Set

@ “100%” (same size) key Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
(Touch this key when you want to copy the original image at its Auto OHP
Proof Copy
Memo
Rotation backing pages
actual size “100%”.) Orig. set
Eco Print Invert Mirror Up
# “Sort:OFF” key direction
Modify Down
(Touch this key when you want to make copies without sorting Copy
them.)
$ “Sort:ON” key Basic User choice Function Program
(Touch this key when you want to make copies in the sort mode.)
% “Sort/Finish” key Metric specifications
(Touch this key when you want to access the “Sort/Finish” screen. Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
See page 5-29.)
^ Registration keys Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
(Touch the appropriate key when you want to access the Exposure Reduce/ Auto Large # of
Up
mode Enlarge selection originals
corresponding function or mode. Any function or mode in the Image Margin/ Page Form
quality Imag. shift numbering Down
overlay
“Function” tab can be registered to be displayed as one of the
Sort/ Erase Cover Booklet
registration key. See page 5-53.) Finished Mode Mode
& “Basic” tab Basic User choice Function Program
(Touch this tab when you want to return the display to the contents Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
of the “Basic” tab.)
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
2-6
) “Program” tab NOTE
(Touch this tab when you want to register the currently selected
settings as a program, or to delete a previously registered You can change or add new keys to those displayed in the “Basic” and
program. See page 5-50.) the “User choice” tabs by following the “Customize screen layout
(Main functions)” procedure on page 7-85 or the “Customize screen
layout (Add functions)” procedure on page 7-86, as appropriate.
NOTE
P) in its bottom right corner,

If you press any key that has an arrow (P
the corresponding setting screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Select 2 sided/ Select

paper Combine
Separation orig. size
Exposure Reduce Auto Batch

mode Up
/Enlarge Selection scanning
Orig.image Margin/ Forms

Page # Down
quality Centering Overlay
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Select 2-sided/ Select
Merge copy
paper Split size orig.
Exposure Reduce/ Auto Large # of

Up
Image Margin/ Page Form

overlay

Finished Mode Mode
“Register” key
(Touch this key when you want to register the currently selected
function or mode under a registration key. See page 5-53.)
“Back” key
(Touch this key when you want to return the settings for the currently
selected mode back to their previous values.)
“Close” key
(Touch this key when you want to return to the previous screen.)
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
100%
Reduce/Enlarge Register Back Close

(25~400)
100 % 154% 77%

AMS 51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14" 11x17"➔81/2x14"
Standard 100% 129% 64%
Zoom 81/2x11"➔11x17" 11x17"➔81/2x11"
400% 121% 50%
XY Zoom 81/2x14"➔11x17" 11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
200% 78% 25%
# keys 51/2x81/2"➔11x17" 81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
100%

(25~400)
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 75%

AMS 11x15"➔A 4
A 5➔A 4
Standard 100% 127% 70% A 3➔A 4
Zoom Folio➔A 3 A 4➔A 5
400% 106% 50%
XY Zoom 11x15"➔A 3
200% 90% 25%
#-Keys A 5➔A 3 Folio➔A 4
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)

Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
100%

(25~400)
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 81% B 4➔A 4

AMS B 5➔A 5
B 5➔B 4
Standard 100% 122% A 4➔B 4 70% A 3➔A 4
Zoom A 5➔B 5 B 4➔B 5
400% 115% B 4➔A 3 50%
XY Zoom
B 5➔A 4
200% 86% A 3➔B 4 25%
#-Keys A 5➔A 3 A 4➔B 5
2-7
2-8
1. Loading paper
Paper can be loaded into the two drawers[cassettes] and the multi- IMPORTANT!
bypass tray.
Using special paper
In this copier, the type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] and
(1) Note when adding paper on the multi-bypass tray can be specified under “Paper type
(drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-44 and “(1) Paper size and
After taking new paper out of its packaging, be sure to fan through type” on page 7-87, respectively.
them a few times to separate the sheets and use a flat surface to align Among the special paper that can be use with this copier, there is a
the leading edges of the paper before loading that paper into a wide range in paper quality and construction, especially in those types
drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass tray. of paper noted below. For that reason, there is a greater possibility of
problems occurring during copying with these type of paper.
Whenever you do use such special paper as noted here, it is
recommended that you first make a test copy and verify the results.
<Special paper for which extra caution is recommended>

• Preprinted
• Labels *1
• Prepunched
• Envelopes *2
*1 When using label sheets, be absolutely certain that there is no

possibility that the backing glue will come into contact with any part
of the copier, and that none of the labels will come off the sheet
Set the paper in the drawer[cassette] with the side that was facing during copying.
upward when you opened the package facing upward. If glue does happen to come into contact with the drum or rollers,
or one of the labels comes off inside the copier, it can be the cause
of major damage.
*2 The following types of envelopes should never be used:
• Those on which the glue is exposed.
• Those whereby glue will be exposed if the protective paper is
removed. (If the paper protecting the glue comes off inside the
copier it can be the cause of major damage.)
• Those of special construction.
• Those which have a round tab on the back and are closed with
string.
• Those which have an open window.
• Those which have a transparent film window.
IMPORTANT!
NOTE
• When copying onto used paper (paper which has already been
When using prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, refer to
copied onto at least one side), DO NOT use paper that is stapled or
“Special paper action setting” on page 7-46-1.
clipped together as this can be the cause of damage to the copier
and/or create problems in the copy image.
• If you use paper that is curled at all, straighten the paper out before
loading it into a drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass
tray, or it can cause a paper jam.
3-1
(2) Loading paper into the drawer[cassette] 4 Set the paper flush against the left-hand wall of the
drawer[cassette].
Up to 500 sheets of standard paper (75 or 80 g/m2/standard paper as
specified by our company) or colored paper can be loaded into the
each drawer[cassette].
The each drawer[cassette] can be set to hold paper of any desired

size from 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 13", 8 1/2" x
14", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3, Folio, 8K and 16K.
IMPORTANT!
Set the type of paper (standard paper, recycled paper, etc.) to be

loaded in the drawer[cassette] in “Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 -
No. 4)” on page 7-44.
IMPORTANT!
• Make sure that there are no folds, etc., in the paper when it is set in
1 Pull the drawer[cassette] out toward you as far as it will go.
* Do not pull more than one drawer[cassette] out at a time.
a drawer[cassette]. Such paper may be the cause of paper jams.
• There is a sticker (1 in the illustration) indicating paper capacity
attached to the inside of the drawer[cassette]. Do not load paper
above this limit.
• When you are loading paper into a drawer[cassette], make sure that
the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that
is facing upward in the drawer[cassette].
• Adjust the length adjustment plate and the width guide BEFORE
loading paper into a drawer[cassette]. Failure to do so may result in
skewed paper feed or a paper jam.
• Make sure that the paper is set securely against the length
adjustment plate and the width guide. If there is a gap between the
paper and the adjustment plate or the width guide, readjust the plate
and the guide to fit the paper snugly.
2 Hold the width adjustment lever and move it to align the width
guide with the required paper width.
1
Paper sizes are marked inside the drawer[cassette].
3 Hold the length adjustment plate and move it to align with the
required paper length.
3-2
5 Set the supplied paper size sheet so that the size of the
paper loaded can be checked by looking at the front of the 1 Open the multi-bypass tray.
drawer[cassette].
2 Adjust the insert guides to the size of the paper to be loaded.
6 Gently push the drawer[cassette] back in.
NOTE
Before leaving the copier in disuse for a prolonged period of time,

remove the paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)] and seal it in its
original packaging to protect from moisture. Also, when storing paper
in a high temperature and high humidity environment, seal it in a
moisture-proof bag.
(3) Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray
Up to 200 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m2 – 80 g/m2), of a

3 Insert the paper along the guides as far as it will go.
size between 11" x 17" [A3] and 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" [A6R] can be set on the
multi-bypass tray at one time. When copying onto special paper, be
sure to use the multi-bypass tray.
NOTE
The types of special paper and the number of sheets that can be
loaded in the multi-bypass tray are:
• Transparencies: 25 sheets
• Standard paper (120 g/m2): 130 sheets
• Standard paper (160 g/m2): 100 sheets
IMPORTANT!
IMPORTANT!
• When you are setting paper onto the multi-bypass tray, make sure
• When copying onto OHP transparencies, be sure to fan through that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side
them a few times to separate the sheets before setting them on the that is facing upward on the multi-bypass tray as well. In addition, if
multi-bypass tray. the leading edge of the paper is curled at all, straighten it out before
• When copying onto non-standard size paper, perform the procedure setting it on the multi-bypass tray.
in “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-87 and select the paper size. • ALWAYS straighten out curled paper before setting it on the multi-
• When setting special paper such as OHP transparencies and thick bypass tray.
paper on the multi-bypass tray, the type of paper must be specified
under “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-87.
• You can select to have the “Bypass setting” screen (see page 7-86)
displayed whenever the “Bypass” key is touched. (See “Multi-bypass
tray setting display ON/OFF” on page 7-45.)
3-3
● Setting envelopes
Up to 20 envelopes can be set on the multi-bypass tray at a time.
3 When using envelopes that are wider than they are tall, leave
the flap closed and set the envelopes with the copy side
Refer to the following table for the types and sizes of envelopes that facing upward and the flap facing towards the rear of the
can be used in this machine. copier. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert
guides as far as they will go.
When using envelopes that are taller than they are wide,
Acceptable envelope types Size open the flap and set the envelopes with the copy side facing
upward and the flap facing away from the direction of
Monarch 3 1/8" x 7 1/2" insertion. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the
insert guides as far as they will go.
Comm. #10 3 3/8" x 9 1/2"
Envelope DL 110 x 220 (mm)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 (mm) Copier
Executive 7 1/4" x 10 1/2"
Comm. #9 3 7/8" x 8 7/8"

Copier
Comm. #6-3/4 3 5/8" x 6 1/2"
ISO B5 176 x 250 (mm)
Envelope C4 229 x 324 (mm)

NOTES
Oufuku Hagaki 200 x 148 (mm)
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/scanner Kit is installed on your
YOUKEI 2 162 x 114 (mm) copier and you attempt to print from a computer onto envelopes that
are wider than they are tall, be sure to leave the flap closed and set
YOUKEI 4 234 x 105 (mm) the envelopes with the side to be printed onto facing upward. Orient
the edge with the flap towards the front of the copier and then slide
the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will
go.
1 Open the multi-bypass tray.
Copier
• The proper orientation will actually depend upon the type of

envelope being used.
2 Align the insert guides with the envelope size. • Incorrectly loading envelopes can result in printing in the wrong
orientation or on the wrong side.
• When setting envelopes on the multi-bypass tray, BE SURE to
specify the type of envelopes that will be used under “3. Multi-
bypass tray paper settings” on page 7-87.
3-4
1. Basic copying procedure

Paper Size Set
1 3 11x81/2"
Com
Plain Ori
81/2x11" qua
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Re
11x81/2" Bypass Auto /En
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
1. Warm-up
Turn the power switch ON ( | ). At the end of warm-up, “Ready to
3 Mer
Plain Ima
qua
copy.” will be displayed. Colour APS AMS Sort:Off
Re
Bypass Auto En
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

NOTE Recycled

If you set the originals that you want to copy and press the [Start] key
while the copier is still warming up, copying will begin as soon as Metric specifications
warm-up is finished.
3. Selecting the desired functions
Select from among the copier’s various modes and functions.
2 •
•
Enlarging/reducing the copy image (Page 4-5.)
Interrupt copying (Page 4-9.)
• Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals (Page 5-1.)
• Copying each image of open-faced (books, magazines, etc.) or
2-sided originals onto separate sheets (Page 5-4.)
• Creating a margin on the copies (Page 5-6.)
• Centering the copy image (Page 5-8.)
• Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes
(Page 5-9.)
• Making copies with clean edges (Page 5-11.)
2. Setting the originals • Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy
page (Page 5-13.)
Open the original cover and set the original that you want to copy
• Printing page numbers on the copies (Page 5-16.)
face-down on the platen. Be sure to align originals with the upper left
• Overlaying one image over another (Page 5-20.)
corner of the platen (towards the left-rear portion of the copier).
• Making booklets from sheet originals (Page 5-22.)
• Making booklets from book originals (Page 5-26.)
NOTE • Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher
(Page 5-29.)
See “4 How to set originals in the Document Processor” on page 8-2
• Automatic rotation of the copy image (Page 5-30.)
for instructions on how to set originals in your Document Processor
• Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets (Page 5-31.)
(option).
• Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies
(Page 5-36.)
• Inverting black and white (Page 5-38.)
• Making mirror image copies (Page 5-39.)
• Making a test copy prior to large volume copying (Page 5-40.)
• Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished
(Page 5-42.)
• Copying a large volume of originals in one operation (Page 5-47.)
• Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of
originals in one operation (Page 5-57.)
4-1
Paper Size Set
4 11x81/2"
Com
5
11x81/2"
Plain
Plain Ori 81/2x11"
qua APS AMS
81/2x11"
APS AMS Sort:Off Color
Color Re
11x81/2" Bypass Auto /En
1
11x8 /2" Bypass Auto
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Exposure Reduce Sort/
Recycled
mode /Enlarge Finished 11x81/2"
Recycled Exposure Reduce
Basic User choice Function Program mode /Enlarge
Inch specifications Inch specifications

Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
4 Me
5
Plain
Plain Ima
qua APS AMS
APS AMS Sort:Off Colour
Colour Re
Bypass Auto
Sort:On
En Bypass Auto
Exposure
Plain Plain
Recycled
Exposure Reduce/
Recycled
Basic User choice Function Program mode Enlarge
Metric specifications Metric specifications
4. Selecting the paper size 5. Adjusting the copy exposure

When the “APS” key is highlighted on the touch panel, copy paper of Adjustment of the copy exposure is generally accomplished manually.
the same size as the original will be automatically selected. In order to If you want to make the exposure darker, touch the right exposure
copy the original onto a different size of paper without changing the adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the
size of the image, touch the paper size key that corresponds to the right; If you want to make the exposure lighter, touch the left exposure
paper size that you want to use. adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the
left.
If you want the copy exposure to be adjusted automatically, touch the
“Auto Exposure” key until it is highlighted. The contrast of the original
NOTES will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected
automatically.
• You can stop the copier from automatically selecting the paper size.
* It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure by touching
(See “Paper selection” on page 7-68.)
the “Exposure Mode” key to access the “Exposure Mode” screen.
• It is also possible for you to specify one drawer[cassette] that will be
Copy exposure adjustment can then be performed in this screen
selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that
using the same methods as above.
drawer[cassette].
(See “Default drawer[cassette]” on page 7-70.) Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Exposure Mode Register Back Close
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Auto
Manual Lighter Darker
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Exposure mode Register Back Close
Auto
NOTES
• It is possible for you to make adjustments to the auto exposure

mode if the overall copies come out too dark or too light.
(See “Auto exposure adjustment” on page 7-73.)
• It is also possible for you to change the default setting for the copy
exposure to the auto exposure mode.
(See “Exposure mode” on page 7-63.)
4-2
Paper size S
Ready to copy. Paper Size Set
6 7
11x81/2"
11x81/2"
paper Combine

Up Combine
quality Centering
Page #
Overlay Down Orig.image
Sort/ Border Cover
quality
Finished Erase Mode
Booklet AMS Sort:Off
Reduce
uto /Enlarge
S tO
Paper size S
Ready to copy. Paper Size Set
6 Select
paper
2-sided/
Split
Select
size orig.
Merge copy
7
Up Merge copy
quality Imag. shift numbering overlay
Down Image
Sort/ Erase Cover
quality
Finished Mode Mode
Booklet AMS Sort:Off
Reduce/
Auto Enlarge
S tO
6. Selecting the image quality 7. Setting the number of copies to be made

The image quality is selected according to the type of original. Use the keypad to change the number of copies to be made that is
Touch the “Function” tab and then the resulting “Orig. image quality” displayed on the touch panel to the actual number that you want to
[“Image quality”] key that is displayed within that tab in order to access make. Up to 999 copies can be made at one time.
the “Orig.image quality” [“Image quality orig.”] screen.
Inch specifications NOTE

Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. 1
11x8 /2" It is possible for you to limit the number of copies (or copy sets) that
Orig.image quality Register Back Close
can be made at a time. (See “Copy limit” on page 7-82.)
Text Photo Tex t P h o t o : S e t t h i s m o d e t o c o py o r i g .

w i t h m i xe d t ex t a n d p h o t o
8
Photo P h o t o : A d d a d i m e n s i o n a l e f fe c t o f p h o t o
Tex t : C o py a p e n c i l o r f i n e l i n e.
Text
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Image quality orig. Register Back Close
Text+Photo Tex t + P h o t o : S e t t h i s m o d e t o c o py
o r i g i n a l m i xe d ( t ex t & p h o t o ) .
Photo P h o t o : A d d a d i m e n s i o n a l e f fe c t o f p h o t o.
Tex t : C o py p e n c i l & f i n e l i n e c l e a r l y.
Text
8. Start copying
Press the [Start] key. Once the lamp in the [Start] key is lit green and
Text+photo mode: Touch the “Text+Photo” key until it is highlighted. “Ready to copy.” is displayed, copying is possible.
Select this mode when the original contains a
mixture of both text and photographs. Inch specifications
Photo mode: Touch the “Photo” key until it is highlighted. Select Now copying.
this mode to bring out the depth in photographs.
Text mode: Touch the “Text” key until it is highlighted. Select Orig. page Count/Set Output
this mode especially to reproduce originals written

11x81/2" 11x81/2" Plain
in pencil of which contain thin lines. 1 sided APS 1 sided Pause
Rear Sort Inner tray
NOTES Job 1
• It is possible for you to change the image quality mode that will be Metric specifications
the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Original quality” onpage
7-65.) Now copying.
• It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure in each of Output
Or iginal Count/set
the image quality modes. (See “Manual exposure adjustment
(text+photo mode)” on page 7-75, “Manual exposure adjustment Plain
1-sided APS 1-sided Stop
(text mode)” on page 7-76 and “Manual exposure adjustment R top / rear Sort Inner tray / Change
(photo mode)” on page 7-77.)

Job 1
4-3
9. At the end of copying

Finished copies will be ejected onto the copy store section.
IMPORTANT!
• Up to 250 copies can be stored on the copy store section.

• If “The output tray exceeds capacity. Remove the paper.” [“Too much
paper in output tray. Remove paper.”] is displayed, there are too
many copies on the top tray. Remove the copies from the copy store
section and then press the [Start] key to resume copying.
• If ejected copies come out curled, or are otherwise not stored
cleanly, remove the paper from the drawer[cassette] or the multi-
bypass tray (whichever is currently being used), turn the paper over,
set it again in that location and try to copy again.
CAUTION
If the copier will not be used for a short period of time
(overnight, etc.), turn the power switch OFF (O).
If it will not be used for an extended period of time
(vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the
outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier
is not in use.
4-4
2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image

(1) Auto magnification selection mode 2 Select the size of paper that you want to copy onto by
touching the appropriate paper size key.
With this mode, the original image is enlarged/reduced automatically Touch the “AMS” key. The corresponding magnification ratio
according to the selected paper size. will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
81/2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality
IMPORTANT! Colour APS AMS Sort:Off
Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
If you use this mode most often, select “AMS” under “Default
Recycled
magnification ratio” on page 7-72. mode Enlarge Finished
1 Set the original to be copied.

The copier will automatically detect the size of the originals
3 Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.
and select copy paper of that same size.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
81/2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce
1
11x8 /2" Bypass Auto /Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

Recycled
4-5
(2) Zoom mode 3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed
magnification ratio to the desired setting.
With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to any 1% * The desired magnification ratio can also be entered directly
increment between 25% and 400%. by touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the
keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
25% 100%

(25~400)
100 % 154% 77%

AMS 51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14" 11x17"➔81/2x14"
Standard 100% 129% 64%
Zoom 81/2x11"➔11x17" 11x17"➔81/2x11"
400% 121% 50%
XY Zoom 81/2x14"➔11x17" 11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
200% 78% 25%
# keys 51/2x81/2"➔11x17" 81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
400%
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
100%
1 Set the original to be copied. Reduce/Enlarge

(25~400)
Register Back Close
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 75%

AMS 11x15"➔A 4
A 5➔A 4
2 Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge”

screen will be displayed.
Standard
Zoom
XY Zoom
100%
400%
127%
106%
Folio➔A 3
11x15"➔A 3
70%
50%
A 3➔A 4
A 4➔A 5
200% 90% 25%

#-Keys
Inch specifications A 5➔A 3 Folio➔A 4
Paper Size Set

Ready to copy. 11x81/2" Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
Combine Paper size Set
11x81/2" Ready to copy.
Plain Orig.image 100%
1
8 /2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off Reduce/Enlarge Register Back Close
Color Reduce
11x81/2" Bypass Auto /Enlarge (25~400)
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 81% B 4➔A 4
11x81/2" AMS
Exposure Reduce Sort/ B 5➔B 4 B 5➔A 5
Recycled
mode /Enlarge Finished Standard 100% 122% A 4➔B 4 70% A 3➔A 4
Zoom A 5➔B 5 B 4➔B 5
400% 115% B 4➔A 3 50%
XY Zoom
B 5➔A 4
200% 86% A 3➔B 4 25%
#-Keys
Metric specifications A 5➔A 3 A 4➔B 5
Paper Size Set

Ready to copy.
Plain
Merge copy
Image
quality
APS AMS Sort:Off

Colour Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

Recycled
4-6
(3) Preset zoom mode 3 Touch the preset zoom key that corresponds to the
magnification ratio that you want to use.
With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to one of the pre-
Inch specifications
set ratios:
Paper size Set
100%
[Available magnification ratios]
(25~400)
Inch specification 100 % AMS

154%
51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14"
77%
11x17"➔81/2x14"
Reduction 25% Standard 100% 129% 64%
Zoom 81/2x11"➔11x17" 11x17"➔81/2x11"
50% (11" x 17" R 5 1/2" x 8 1/2") XY Zoom
400% 121%
81/2x14"➔11x17"
50%
11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
64% (11" x 17" R 8 1/2" x 11") # keys
200%
51/2x81/2"➔11x17"
78%
81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
25%
77% (11" x 17" R 8 1/2" x 14")

78% (8 1/2" x 14" R 8 1/2" x 11")
Enlargement 121% (8 1/2" x 14" R 11" x 17")
Paper size Set
129% (8 1/2" x 11" R 11" x 17") Ready to copy.
100%
154% (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" R 8 1/2" x 14")
200% (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" R 11" x 17") (25~400)
400% 100 % AMS

141% A 4➔A 3
A 5➔A 4
75%
11x15"➔A 4
Standard 100% 127% 70% A 3➔A 4
Metric specification XY Zoom

400% 106%
11x15"➔A 3
50%
Reduction 25% #-Keys

200%
A 5➔A 3
90%
Folio➔A 4
25%
50%
70% (A3 R A4, A4 R A5) Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)
75% (11" x 15" R A4)
Paper size Set
90% (Folio R A4) Ready to copy.
100%
Enlargement 106% (11" x 15" R A3) Reduce/Enlarge Register Back Close
127% (Folio R A3) (25~400)
141% A 4➔A 3 81%

141% (A4 R A3, A5 R A4) 100 % AMS
B 5➔B 4
B 4➔A 4
B 5➔A 5
122% A 4➔B 4 70% A 3➔A 4
200% (A5 R A3) Standard
Zoom
100%
A 5➔B 5 B 4➔B 5
400% 115% B 4➔A 3 50%
400% XY Zoom
B 5➔A 4
200% 86% A 3➔B 4 25%
#-Keys A 5➔A 3 A 4➔B 5
Metric specification (Asia Pacific)

Reduction 25%
50% NOTE
70% (A3 R A4, B4 R B5)
81% (B4 R A4, B5 R A5) You can also change the magnification ratio in 1% increments by
86% (A3 R B4, A4 R B5) touching the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate.
Enlargement 115% (B4 R A3, B5 R A4)
122% (A4 R B4, A5 R B5)
141% (A4 R A3, B5 R B4)
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.
200% (A5 R A3)
400%
4
1 Set the original to be copied.
2 Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.

The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
81/2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

Recycled
4-7
(4) XY zoom mode 3 Touch the “XY Zoom” key.

The screen to select the magnification ratio will be displayed.
With this mode, it is possible for you to select the length and width of
Inch specifications
the copy image separately. The magnification ratio can be set to any
Paper size
1% increment between 25% and 400%. Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Set
100%

(25~400)
100 % 154% 77%

AMS 51/2x81/2"➔81/2x14" 11x17"➔81/2x14"
Standard 100% 129% 64%
Zoom 81/2x11"➔11x17" 11x17"➔81/2x11"
400% 121% 50%
XY Zoom 81/2x14"➔11x17" 11x17"➔51/2x81/2"
M M
200% 78% 25%
# keys 51/2x81/2"➔11x17" 81/2x14"➔81/2x11"
Y%
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
X% 100%

(25~400)
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 75%

AMS 11x15"➔A 4
A 5➔A 4
Standard 100% 127% 70% A 3➔A 4
400% 106% 50%
1 Set the originals to be copied. XY Zoom
#-Keys
200%
A 5➔A 3
90%
11x15"➔A 3
Folio➔A 4
25%
2 Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.

The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Inch specifications 100%

Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. 11x81/2" (25~400)
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 81% B 4➔A 4

AMS B 5➔A 5
B 5➔B 4
Combine 122% A 4➔B 4 70% A 3➔A 4
1 Standard 100%
11x8 /2" A 5➔B 5 B 4➔B 5
Zoom
Plain Orig.image
quality 400% 115% B 4➔A 3 50%
81/2x11" XY Zoom
APS AMS Sort:Off B 5➔A 4
Color Reduce
200% 86% A 3➔B 4 25%
11x81/2" Bypass Auto /Enlarge #-Keys
Sort:On A 5➔A 3 A 4➔B 5
11x81/2"
Metric specifications 4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate, specify the
desired magnification ratio for the width and then the length
Paper Size Set of the image. It is also possible for you to enter the desired
Ready to copy.
ratio directly by touching the corresponding “# keys”
Merge copy [“#-Keys”] key and then using the keypad.
Plain Image
quality
Colour APS AMS Sort:Off Inch specifications
Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On Paper Size Set
Plain Plain
Exposure Reduce/ Sort/ Y X
Recycled
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
Y X o r i g i n a l t o p s i d e.
Standard
Zoom + +
XY Zoom
Left top
# keys # keys Rear corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Y: X:

Y X original.
Standard
Zoom
XY Zoom
Left top
#-Keys #-Keys Back Edge corner
5 Touch the appropriate key on the right side of the touch panel
to specify the direction in which the original was set.
4-8
3. Interrupt copying
Interrupt copying is useful if, during one copy job, you want to copy
other originals at different settings. Once the rush job is completed, 4 When copying is completed, press the [Interrupt] key once
again. The lamp in the [Interrupt] key will go out. Replace the
the interrupted copy job can be resumed at the same settings as newly copied originals with the ones removed before. Then,
before. press the [Start] key. The interrupted copy job will be
resumed.
1 2 3 A
1 2A3
1 Press the [Interrupt] key to light the lamp in the [Interrupt]
key. “Interrupt mode OK” will be displayed.
Remove the originals that were currently being copied and

2 put them aside.
3 Set the new originals and perform the desired copy

procedure.
4-9
4. Job reservation
Copy jobs can be scheduled even while another copy job is in
progress any time the “Reserve next copy” key is displayed. 1 Touch the “Reserve next copy” key.
The “Ready to copy. (Job reservation)” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Memory usage 30%
Inch specifications
Now copying.
Memory usage 30%
Output
Now copying.
Or ig. page Count/Set
Reserve
12 1/999 next copy Orig. page Count/Set Output
Reserve
11x81/2"
1 sided
100%
APS
11x81/2"
1 sided
Pause 12 1/999 next copy
1 1
Rear Sort Inner tray 11x8 /2" 100% 11x8 /2"
Pause
1 sided APS 1 sided
Now copying.
Output
Now copying.
Or iginal Count/set
Reserve
12 1/999 next copy Original Count/set Output
Reserve
1-sided
100%
APS 1-sided
Stop
/Change 12 1/999 next copy
R top / rear Sort Inner tray 100% Stop

1-sided APS 1-sided /Change
R top / rear Sort Inner tray
You can enter the corresponding copy settings and scan in the
originals in preparation for your copy job even before the other job is
completed. NOTE
Once that job is finished and print out is possible, the operation for the Job reservation is not available if the “Reserve next copy” key isn’t
reserved job will begin automatically. displayed.
NOTES
• The optional Hard Disk must be installed on your copier in order to

use this function. 2 Set the originals to be copied.
• If the optional Fax Kit, Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit are installed
in your copier, job reservation will be possible during print out of
both received fax jobs and print jobs.
3 Select the settings and functions that you want to use for that
copy job.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. (Job reservation) 11x81/2"
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
1
8 /2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Finish Job
Basic User choice Function Program res.
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. (Jobreservation)
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

Recycled
Job resrv.
Basic User choice Function Program finished
4 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.

Once all of the originals have been completely scanned,
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
4-10
5. Energy-saving modes
If you press the [Energy Saver] key, even while the power switch is The following two functions will also automatically cause the copier to
still turned ON, the copier will enter one of the following two energy- enter the corresponding energy-saving mode if no operation is
saving modes (a state of rest). performed for a designated period of time.
● Low power mode ● Auto low power function

The lamp in the [Energy Saver] key will be the only lit indication on the If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of
operation panel. To resume copying, press the [Energy Saver] key time (adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes), the auto low power
once again. It will take the copier less than 12 seconds to return to a function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the
copy-ready state. Low power mode.
The factory default setting is for 15 minutes.
● Sleep mode
Just like with the Low power mode, the lamp in the [Energy Saver] key ● Auto sleep function
will be the only lit indication on the operation panel, but even less If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of
power will be consumed in this mode. To resume copying, press the time (adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes), the auto sleep function
[Energy Saver] key once again. It will take the copier less than 25 will engage and automatically turn the power switch OFF (O). When
seconds to return to a copy-ready state. you want to make copies again, simply turn the power switch back ON
( | ).
The factory default setting is for 60 minutes.
Energy Saver
er
Sav
rgy
Ene
t
rrup
Inte
ent
em
nag
/ Ma
ting
Set
ault
Def ounter
C et
Res p/
Sto lear
3 C
2
1 6
5
rt
ta
9
S
4
8
7 #
0
*
NOTES
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual
copier, you can switch between the energy-saving modes (Low operation, so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a
power mode and Sleep mode) that will be entered into when the large part of overall consumption. Having the copier enter a rest state
[Energy Saver] key is pressed. To change the energy-saving mode, after a certain amount of time, or turning the power completely OFF
see “Changing the energy-saving mode” on page 7-58. (O), reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode
• If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax Kit is and as a result can save on electricity bills.
installed in your copier, you can press the [Energy Saver] key to
engage the Low power mode.
• If the optional Fax Kit, Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit are installed
NOTES
in your copier and a received fax job or a print job is detected while
the copier is in one of the energy-saving modes, it will automatically • The auto low power function will not engage when the copier is in
return to a copy-ready state and print out the corresponding job. the sleep mode.
• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the
auto low power function engages, see “Auto low power time” on
page 7-48.
• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the
auto sleep function engages, see “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47. In
order to disable the auto sleep function, see “Auto sleep ON/OFF”
on page 7-57.
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your
copier, the copier will enter the Sleep mode whenever the auto sleep
function engages. In this state, when the copier detects data for a
print job, it will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print
out of the corresponding information will begin.
• If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, the copier will be
automatically turned OFF (O) whenever the auto sleep function
engages. In this state, when the copier receives an incoming fax, it
will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print out of the
corresponding information will begin.
4-11
4-12
1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided copy modes]
With these modes, 2-sided copies can be made from a variety of (2) Making 2-sided copies from an
originals including open-faced (books, etc.) or 2-sided originals.
open-faced (books, etc.) original
(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original With this mode, the two facing pages of a book or magazine are
copied separately onto the front and back sides of the copy paper by
With this mode, a 2-sided original is copied and the front and back
simply pressing the [Start] key.
sides of the copy paper are used so that the copy looks just like the
original.
<Original> <Finished copy>

“Left” “Book / Duplex”
<Original> <Finished copy> 1 2 1 2
“Left/Right” “Left/Right”
1 2 1 2
“Left” “Book / Book”
1 2 0
3
“Left/Right” “Top” 1 2
1 2 1
2
“Right” “Book / Duplex”
“Top” “Left/Right” 2 1 1 2
1 1 2
2
“Right” “Book / Book”
“Top” “Top” 2 1 3
0
1 1 2 1
2 2
NOTE
NOTES Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size originals
can be used in this mode.
• Only paper sizes between 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2",
8 1/2" x 13", 8 1/2" x 14", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3
and Folio can be used in this mode.
• The Document Processor (option) must be installed on your copier
in order to use this mode.
5-1
(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals 1 Set the originals to be copied.
With this mode, multiple one-sided originals are copied onto the front
and back sides of the copy paper. If you are copying an odd number
of originals, the back side of the last copy page will be blank.
2 Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
will be displayed.
Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.
The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
5 5 Ready to copy.
4 11x81/2"
3 4 3
2
1 2 1 Select
paper
2 sided/
Separation
Select
orig. size
Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
NOTE Select 2-sided/ Select
Merge copy
The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies can also be Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Auto
selection
Large # of
originals
Up
rotated 180 degrees. Image Margin/ Page Form Down

1 If you chose the “Left/Right” [“Left/Right binding”] setting for Sort/ Erase Cover Booklet
Finished Mode Mode
finished copies:
The back side of the copies will be created with the same
orientation as the originals.
2 If you chose the “Top” [“Top binding”] setting for finished copies:
The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies will be
3 If you are copying from 2-sided originals, touch the
“2 sided / 2 sided” [“2-sided / 2-sided”] key. If you are
rotated 180 degrees. If you then bind the copy set at the top, the copying from open-faced originals, touch the “Book / 2
images will be oriented in the same direction when flipped up like sided” [“Book / 2-sided”] key. If you are copying from 1-
a calendar, etc. sided originals, touch the “1 sided / 2 sided” [“1-sided / 2-
sided”] key.
If you selected “2 sided / 2 sided” [“2-sided / 2-sided”] or
“Book / 2 sided” [“Book / 2-sided”], go to the next step.
ghi If you selected “1 sided / 2 sided” [“1-sided / 2-sided”], go
abc directly to step 5.
def
ghi
def Inch specifications
abc
Paper size Set
ghi
2 sided/Separation Register Back Close
abc
def
1 sided 1 sided Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or
➔1 sided ➔2 sided 2 sided copy using 1 sided original,
2 sided 2 sided Book original or 2 sided original.
➔1 sided ➔2 sided
Book Book
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
2-sided / Split Register Back Close
1-sided 1-sided
A bl e t o c o py 1 - s i d e d ( s e p a ra t e ) o r
R1-sided R2-sided
2 - s i d e d c o py u s i n g 1 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l ,
2-sided 2-sided book original or 2-sided original.
R1-sided R2-sided
Book Book
R1-sided R2-sided
5-2
4 Specify the binding direction of the originals.

6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Inch specifications
<for 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals>

IMPORTANT!
to copy. to copy.
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not
ion Register ion Register
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
Original Finished Original Finished
Inch specifications
1 sided Open from Open from 1 sided Open from Book➔
➔2 sided left/right left/right ➔2 sided left Duplex
2 sided Open from Open from 2 sided Open from Book➔ <for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals>
➔2 sided top top ➔2 sided right Book
Paper size Set Paper size Set
Book Book
➔2 sided ➔2 sided 11x81/2"
Register Back Close Register Back Close
Metric specifications Finished Check direction Finished Check direction

Set book or iginal top
Check direction of
original top side. side direction to back.
<for 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals> Open from BookR

left/right Duplex
to copy. to copy. Open from

top
BookR
Book
Left top
Rear
Register Register corner
Original Finished Original Finished
1-sided Left/Right Left/Right 1-sided Left BookR
R2-sided binding binding R2-sided binding Duplex
2-sided
R2-sided
Top
binding
Top
binding
2-sided Right BookR <for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals>
R2-sided binding Book
Book Book Paper size Set Paper size Set
R2-sided R2-sided

Finished C h e ck d i r e c t i o n Finished Check direction
5 Select the binding direction you want for the finished copies.
Left/Right
original.
side direction to back.
Inch specifications binding

BookR
Duplex
Top BookR
binding Book
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals> Back Edge
Left top
Corner
Paper siz
11x opy.
Register Back Register Bac
Original Finished Check direction Original Finished Check
Check direction Set t
original top side top s
Open from
left/right
Open from
Open from
left/right
Open from
d
Open from
left
Open from
right
Book➔
Duplex
Book➔
7 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the originals will start.
top top d Book
Rear d
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,
copying will start automatically.
Metric specifications If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals> telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
Paper s
copy.
Register Back Register Ba
Original Finished C h e ck d i r e c Original Finished Che

C h e ck d i r e Se
original. sid
Left/Right Left/Right Left BookR

binding binding d binding Duplex
Top Top Right BookR
binding binding d binding Book
Back Edge ed
8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch

9 the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-3
2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets

[Page separation/Split copy modes]
(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals 1 Set the originals to be copied.
With this mode, the two facing pages of an open-faced original such
as a book, a magazine, and the like are each copied onto a separate
sheet of paper.
12 1 2
21 1 2
will be displayed.
NOTES
Inch specifications 3 Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.

The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size displayed.
originals and 11" x 8 1/2" size copy paper can be used in this mode.
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged Inch specifications
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper. Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
11x81/2"

Metric specifications paper Separation orig. size
Combine
• Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4, A3, 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size Exposure
mode
Reduce
/Enlarge
Auto
Selection
Batch
scanning
Up
originals and A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode. Orig.image Margin/
Page #
Forms
quality Centering Overlay Down
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged Cover
Sort/ Border
Booklet
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper. Finished Erase Mode

• Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4, A3, 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size
originals and B5 or A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode. Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper. paper Split size orig.
Merge copy

Up

overlay

Finished Mode Mode
(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals Basic User choice Function Program
With this mode, the two sides of a 2-sided original are each copied
onto a separate sheet of paper.
1 1 2
2
1 1 2
2
NOTE
The Document Processor (option) must be installed on your copier in

order to use this mode.
5-4
Touch the “2 sided / 1 sided” [“2-sided / 1-sided”] key or
4 the “Book / 1 sided” [“Book / 1-sided”] key, as appropriate 6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
to the type of originals being copied and the type of finished
copies to be made.
IMPORTANT!
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. 11x81/2" correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
2 sided/Separation Register Back Close
Inch specifications
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals>

1 sided 1 sided Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or
➔1 sided ➔2 sided 2 sided copy using 1 sided original, Paper size Set Paper size Set
2 sided 2 sided Book original or 2 sided original. 11x81/2" 11x81/2"
Book Book
➔1 sided ➔2 sided Register Back Close Register Back Close
Check direction Check direction
Check direction of Set the book original
original top side. top side direct to back.
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Left top
Rear
corner
2-sided / Split Register Back Close
1-sided 1-sided
A bl e t o c o py 1 - s i d e d ( s e p a ra t e ) o r Metric specifications
R1-sided R2-sided
2 - s i d e d c o py u s i n g 1 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l ,
2-sided 2-sided book original or 2-sided original.
R1-sided R2-sided
<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals>
Book Book
R1-sided R2-sided

C h e ck d i r e c t i o n Check direction
5 Specify the binding direction of the originals. C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f

original.
side direction to back.
Inch specifications
<for 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals> Left top

Back Edge corner
ady to copy. to copy.
Separation Registe on Register
Original Original
1 sided Open from 1 sided Open from

d ➔2 sided left/right ➔2 sided left
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.
d
d
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Open from
top
2 sided
➔2 sided
Book
➔2 sided
Open from
right
7
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear
<for 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals> telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.
Ready to copy. to copy.
ided / Split R Register
Original Original
ed 1-sided Left/Right -sided Left

sided R2-sided binding R2-sided binding
ed 2-sided Top -sided Right
sided R2-sided binding R2-sided binding
k Book Book
sided R2-sided R2-sided
9 Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch

the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
5-5
3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode]

(1) Standard margin (2) Separate front and back margin settings

The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths
down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of
margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4". each margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space. A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.
The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths
down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of
margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space. mm. A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.
B
B A
1 Set the originals to be copied.
IMPORTANT!
Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of
the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the margin
to be created in the incorrect position.

will be displayed.
NOTES 3 Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key.

The “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be
• It is also possible for you to select the default setting for the location displayed.
and width of the margins. (See “Margin width” on page 7-80.)
• If you select to have a left margin created during 2-sided copying Inch specifications
and the location for the back side margin is set to “Auto”, a right Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
11x81/2"
margin that is the same width as the margin on the front side will be
automatically created on the back side of the copies. paper Separation orig. size
Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy

Up

overlay

Finished Mode Mode
5-6
4 Touch the “Margin” key. The screen to set the front side
margin will be displayed. 7 If you want to create a margin on the back side of the copies
that lines up with that on the front side, touch the “Auto” key.
If you want to set the margins for the front and back sides
Inch specifications
separately, touch the “Front/Back margin” key. The screen to
Paper size
Set
set the back side margin will be displayed.
Margin/Centering Register Back Close Inch specifications

Paper size Set
None Reposition image to left/right or

top/bottom, and also center image Back page margin Back Close
on paper.
Margin Check direction
Check direction of
Centering original top side.
Auto If "AUTO" is selected for duplex

copying, rear will have same margin
Front/Back setting as that for the front page.
Metric specifications margin
Left top
Rear
corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Margin/Image shift Register Back Close
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
t o p / b o t t o m a n d c e n t e r i m a g e o n p a p e r.
Back page margin Back Close
Margin
Image C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
shift original.
Auto I f " AU TO " i s s e l e c t e d a t t h e d u p l ex

c o py i n g , b a ck s i d e w i l l h ave s a m e m a r g i n
Front/Back
5 Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the

desired location and width of each margin.
margin
s e t t i n g a s t h a t fo r t h e f r o n t p a g e.
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Margin/Centering
Front page
Register Back
Check direction
Close 8 Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the
desired location and width of each margin.
(0~3/4) Check direction of
original top side.
0 " Inch specifications
None
Paper size Set
Margin (0~3/4)
Au to
Centering
Left 1
/4 " Back page Rear
Left top
margin corner Back page margin Back Close
Back page Check direction

(0~ /4)
3
Check direction of
original top side.
0 "
Metric specifications Auto
Front/Back (0~3/4)
Paper size Set margin
Ready to copy. 0 " Left top
Rear
corner
Fr o n t p a g e C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
original.
None Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Margin Au t o
Image Left Back page Left top Back page margin Back Close
Back Edge
shift margin corner
B a ck p a g e C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
original.
Auto
6 If you are making 2-sided copies, touch the “Back page

margin” key. The “Back page margin” screen will be
Front/Back
margin
Left top
Back Edge
displayed. corner
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
9 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
Margin/Centering Register Back Close
Front page Check direction

(0~3/4) Check direction of
original top side. IMPORTANT!
Top 1
/4 "
None
Margin (0~3/4)
Au t o
Centering
Left 1
/2 " Back page Rear
Left top
margin corner
Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
Copying will start.
Fro n t p a g e C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
original.
Top
None
Margin Au to
Image Left Back page Left top
Back Edge
shift margin corner
5-7
4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode]

With this mode you can center the image on the copy paper when you
copy onto a paper size that is larger than that of the original. 4 Touch the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Margin/Centering Register Back Close

top/bottom, and also center image
on paper.
Margin
Centering
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.

t o p / b o t t o m a n d c e n t e r i m a g e o n p a p e r.
Margin
Image
shift
IMPORTANT!
Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of
the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the image
to be copied in the incorrect position. 5 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab
2 will be displayed. Margin/Centering Register Back Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
None
3 Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key. The

“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be Margin Able to center scanned image on paper.
Left top
Centering Rear
displayed. corner
Inch specifications Metric specifications

Ready to copy. 11x81/2" Ready to copy.
Select 2 sided/ Select Margin/Image shift Register Back Close
paper Combine
Exposure Reduce Auto Batch C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
mode Up
/Enlarge Selection scanning original.

Page # Down None
Sort/ Border Cover Margin A bl e t o c e n t e r s c a n n e d i m a g e o n p a p e r.

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Image Left top
Back Edge
Basic User choice Function Program shift corner
Paper size Set
IMPORTANT!
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
paper Split size orig. correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.
Up

overlay

Finished Mode Mode

Copying will start.
5-8
5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes [Memo mode]
With this mode you can leave a space for adding notes next to the
copied image. It is also possible to fit the images of 2 originals onto 1 Set the originals to be copied.
the same copy page along with a blank space for each.
● Copying one original onto one copy page (layout A)

2 Touch the “Function” tab and then the “N Down” key.
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be
displayed.
3 Touch the “Memo pages” key. The “Memo pages” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Auto OHP Memo

Proof Copy
Orig. set
Eco Print direction Invert Mirror Up
Modify Down
Copy

● Copying two originals onto one copy page (layout B)
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
Touch the “Layout A” key or the “Layout B” key, as

4 appropriate. The screen to make the layout settings will be
displayed.
NOTE Inch specifications
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and A3 Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
size copy paper can be used in this mode. 50%
Memo pages Register Back Close
Layout Border line Check direction

Check direction of
None original top side.
None Solid
Layout A Dotted
Left top
Layout B Borders Rear
corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Memo pages Register Back Close
Layout Border line C h e ck d i r e c t i o n

None original.
None Solid
Layout A Dotted
Left top
Layout B Cropmark Back Edge corner
5-9
5 Select the desired direction of the layout.
Inch specifications
<Layout A> <Layout B>

to copy. to copy.
Register Register
Layout Border line Layout Border line
None None
Solid Solid
Dotted Dotted
Borders Borders
<Layout A> <Layout B>

to copy. to copy.
Register Register
None None
Solid Solid
Dotted Dotted
Cropmark Cropmark
6 Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to

separate the different areas.


telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next
step.

5-10
6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes]

(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies (2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of
(Sheet erase mode) copies made from books (Book erase mode)

With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.
copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1/8"
width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of increment between 1/8" and 3/4". The width of the center area to be
the border to be erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 1 1/2".
1/8" and 3/4". A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.
(The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.) (The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in
Metric specifications the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.)
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of Metric specifications
copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.
width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm
the border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. The width of the center area to
1 mm and 18 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased. be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and
(The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.) 36 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.
(The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in
the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.)
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
a abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
a abcdefghijk
a b abcdefghijk
a abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
abcdefghijk
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the
NOTE
erased border. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-81.)
It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the
erased borders. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-81.)
5-11
(3) Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using 1 Set the original to be copied.
individual border settings (Individual border erase

mode)
Inch specifications
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of
copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you
can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and
right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any
1/8" increment between 0 and 2".
(The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the
bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right
border as d, in the illustration.)
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of
copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you
can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and
will be displayed.
right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any
1 mm increment between 0 and 50 mm.
(The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the 3 Touch the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border
Erase” [“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.
bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right
border as d, in the illustration.) Inch specifications
Paper size Set

paper Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy

Up

overlay
NOTE
Finished Mode Mode
The default settings for the border widths are the same values as that Basic User choice Function Program
set for the sheet erase mode.
If you want to select the sheet erase mode or the book erase
mode, go to the next step.
If you want to select the individual border erase mode, go
directly to step 6.
5-12
4 Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or the “Book

Erase” key, as appropriate. The screen to set the outside 6 Touch the “Individual BordrErase” [“Individual Erase Mode”]
key. The screen to set the top, bottom, left or right border will
border and the center area will be displayed. be displayed.

Border Erase Register Back Close Border Erase Register Back Close
None Erase the border shadow of original None Erase the border shadow of original
or shadow from centor of book. or shadow from centor of book.
Sheet Individual Sheet Individual
Erase BordrErase Erase BordrErase
Book Book
Erase Erase

Ready to copy. Ready to copy.
Erase Mode Register Back Close Erase Mode Register Back Close
None Erase edge of original or center of book None Erase edge of original or center of book
and copy. and copy.
Border Individual Border Individual
erase Erase Mode erase Erase Mode
Book Book
erase erase
5 Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed
border width to that desired. 7 Touch the key that corresponds to the border whose width
you want to change. The screen to set that border width will
* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can be displayed.
also be entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and
Inch specifications
then using the keypad.
Paper size Set
Inch specifications
Border Erase Register Back Close
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. 11x81/2" Check direction
2" 2" Check direction of
original top side.
Border Erase Register Back Close Top Bottom
(0~3/4) (0~11/2) None
Border 1
/4 " Center 1
/2 " Sheet
Erase
Individual
BordrErase 2" 2"
None Book Left top
Left Right Rear
Erase corner
Sheet Individual
Erase BordrErase
Book
Erase Metric specifications
Paper size Set
Metric specifications Ready to copy.
Erase Mode Register Back Close
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
6 mm 6 mm C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Erase Mode Register Back Close Top Bottom
(0~18) (0~36) None
Border Individual
Border 6 Center 12 erase Erase Mode 6 mm 6 mm
Book Left top
None Left Right Back Edge
erase Corner
Border Individual
erase Erase Mode
Book
erase #-Keys #-Keys
Go directly to step 10.
5-12-1
border width to that desired.
* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can
also be entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and
then using the keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Individual Border Erase Back Close

(0~2) Check direction
Check direction of
Top 1
/4 "
original top side.
Left top
Rear
corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Individual Erase Mode Back Close
(0~50) C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Top 6 original.
Left top
#-Keys Back Edge Corner
9 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 7.
If you want to change the width of any of the other borders,
repeat steps 7 through 9.

Copying will start.
5-12-2
7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page
[Combine/Merge Copy modes]
With this mode, the images from either 2 or 4 originals can be (2) 4 in 1
reduced and then combined onto a single copy. The borderline of
each original can also be marked with either a solid line or a dotted Use this mode when you want to copy four originals onto one sheet.
line. This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy
modes in order to copy eight originals onto one sheet.
(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals
in the correct order: 1, 2, 3 and then 4.)
1 2
3 4
2 1
4 4 3
3
2
1
1 3
NOTE
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and A3
2 4
size copy paper can be used in this mode.
3 1
(1) 2 in 1 4 2
Use this mode when you want to copy two originals onto one sheet.
This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy
modes in order to copy four originals onto one sheet.
(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals
in the correct order: 1 and then 2.)
1 2
2 1
2
1
5-13

4 Touch the “2 in 1” [“2-in-1”] key or the “4 in 1” [“4-in-1”] key, as
appropriate.
The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed.
will be displayed. Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Inch specifications Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Paper Size Set Combine Register Back Close

Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image None 2 or 4 original pages can combine on
1 quality one page.
8 /2x11" Sort:Off
APS AMS
Color Reduce
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Basic User choice Function Program Metric specifications

Paper size Set
Metric specifications Ready to copy.
Paper Size Set Merge copy Register Back Close
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image None 2 or 4 originals can be printed

quality o n o n e p a g e.
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/ 2-in-1
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain 4-in-1

Recycled
Select the desired direction of the layout.

5
Inch specifications
3 Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”
[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.
to copy. to copy.
Inch specifications Register Register
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. 11x8 /2"
1
None None
Select 2 sided/ Select Solid Solid

paper Combine
Dotted Dotted
mode Up
Borders Borders
Page # Down
Cover
Sort/
Finished
Border
Erase Mode
Booklet Metric specifications
to copy. to copy.
Metric specifications Register Register
L ayo u t Border line L ayo u t Border line
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. None None
Select Solid Solid

2-sided/ Select
Merge copy
Dotted Dotted
Up
mode Enlarge selection originals Cropmark Cropmark
overlay

Finished Mode Mode

6 Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to
separate the images.
5-14


step.

5-15
8. Printing page numbers on copies [Print page numbers mode]

When you make copies from multiple originals, you can have page
numbers printed on the corresponding copies in numerical order from 3 Touch the “Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #”
[“Page numbering”] screen will be displayed.
the first original. There are three styles of page numbers to choose
Inch specifications
from: “-1-”, “P.1” and “1/n”.
Paper size
* If you select “1/n” as the style of page numbers, the denominator will Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Set
indicate the total number of pages.

paper Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
A
B Sort/ Border Cover
C Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
D
E
-1- Basic User choice Function Program
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
A Metric specifications
B
C
D Paper size Set
E Ready to copy.
-1- Select 2-sided/ Select
Merge copy
-2- paper Split size orig.
A
B A Exposure Reduce/ Auto Large # of
C B Up
D C
E D Image Margin/ Page
E Form Down
-1-
-2-
-3- Sort/ Erase Cover Booklet
Finished Mode Mode
A Basic User choice Function Program

B
C
D
E
P.1
P.2
P.3
4 Touch the key that corresponds to the style of page numbers

P.4
P.5
A
B that you want to use. The screen to make settings for that
C
D
E
style will be displayed.
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
Inch specifications
5/5
Paper size Set

Page # Register Back Close
None Page # can be added on bottom of copy.
NOTE
Page numbers will be printed relative to the middle of the bottom of Metric specifications
the page. (The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction in which Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
the originals are set.)
Page numbering Register Back Close
Abcde
Abcde None P.1 Pa g e # c a n b e a d d e d o n b o t t o m o f c o py.

-1-
-1- 1/n
-1-
Abcde
Abcde
-1-
-1-

will be displayed.
5-16
5 If you want printing of the page numbers to be started from a

page other than the first page, touch the “Setting 1st page” 8 If you want the first page number that is printed to be
something other than “1”, touch the “Setting start #” [“Setting
key. Start page”] key. The “Setting start #” screen will be
The “Setting 1st page” screen will be displayed. displayed.

Ready to copy. 11x81/2" Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Page # Register Back Close Page # Register Back Close
Start page # Start # Check direction Start page # Start # Check direction
Check direction of Check direction of
original top side. original top side.
Setting Setting Setting Setting
1st page start # 1st page start #
None None
Finish Page # Denominator # Finish Page # Denominator #
Last page Auto Last page Auto
Setting Set denom- Left top Setting Set denom- Left top
last page inator # Rear last page inator # Rear
corner corner

Ready to copy. Ready to copy.
Page numbering Register Back Close Page numbering Register Back Close
Star t page # Star t # C h e ck d i r e c t i o n Star t page # Star t # C h e ck d i r e c t i o n

1 1 C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f 1 1 C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original. original.
Setting Setting Setting Setting
1st page Start page 1st page Start page
None P.1 None P.1
Last page # Denominator # Last page # Denominator #
-1- 1/n -1- 1/n
Last page Au t o Last page Au t o
Setting Set Left top Setting Set Left top
Back Edge Back Edge
last page Denomin. # corner last page Denomin. # corner
6 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select from which page
printing of the page numbers will start. 9 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the first page
number that will be printed.
* The desired page number can also be entered directly by
Inch specifications
touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the
Paper size Set
keypad.
Setting 1st page Back Close Inch specifications

Check direction
Check direction of Paper size Set
Page original top side. Ready to copy. 81/2x11"
+ Setting start # Back Close

Check direction
Check direction of
Left top original top side.
Rear
corner
+
Left top
# keys Rear
corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Setting 1st page Back Close Metric specifications
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f Paper size Set
Pa g e original. Ready to copy.
Setting start # Back Close
Left top
Back Edge original.
corner
Left top
#-Keys Back Edge
corner
screen in step 5.
screen in step 8.
5-17
11 If you want the last page number that is printed to be on a

copy other than that for the last original, touch the “Setting 13 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select, counting from the
final copy, how many pages you do NOT want to have page
last page” key. The “Setting last page” screen will be numbers printed on.
displayed.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications Paper size Set
Paper size Set
Back Close
Setting last page
Check direction
Check direction of
Start page # Start # Check direction Page original top side.
Check direction of
Setting Setting
original top side. Last page +
1st page start #
None Manual
Finish Page # Denominator #
Left top
Last page Auto Rear
corner
Setting Set denom- Left top
last page inator # Rear
corner
Metric specifications Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. Setting last page Back Close
Page numbering Register Back Close C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
Check direction Pa g e original.
Star t page # Star t #
1 1 Check direction of
or iginal. Last page
Setting Setting
1st page Start page
None P.1 Manual
Last page # Denominator #
Left top
-1- 1/n Back Edge
Last page Auto corner
Setting Set Left top
Back Edge
last page Denomin. # corner
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
14
12 Touch the “Manual” key.
The screen to designate the last page will be displayed.
screen in step 11.
If you selected the “1/n” style, the “Set denominator #”
[“Set Denomin. #”] key will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Setting last page Back

Check direction
Close 15 If you want to manually select the denominator for the page
numbers, touch the “Set denominator #” [“Set Denomin. #”]
Check direction of
original top side.
key. The “Setting denominator #” screen will be displayed.
Last page Inch specifications
Manual
Paper size Set
Rear
Left top Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
corner
Start page # Start # Check direction

Metric specifications Check direction of
original top side.
Setting Setting
Paper size Set 1st page start #
Ready to copy. None
Finish Page # Denominator #
Last page Auto
Setting last page Back Close
Setting Set denom- Left top
Check direction last page inator # Rear
corner
Check direction of
or iginal.
Last page Metric specifications

Manual
Paper size Set
Back Edge
Left top Ready to copy.
corner
Page numbering Register Back Close
Star t page # Star t # C h e ck d i r e c t i o n

1 1 C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
Setting Setting
1st page Start page
None P.1
Last page # Denominator #
-1- 1/n
Last page Au t o
Setting Set Left top
Back Edge
last page Denomin. # corner
5-18
16 Touch the “Manual” key.

The screen to designate the denominator will be displayed. 18 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel

Paper size Set Paper size Set Paper size Set
11x81/2" 11x81/2"

Setting denominator # Back Close
Finished Check direction Finished Check direction
Check direction
Check direction of Check direction of Set the book original
original top side. original top side. top side direct to back.
Open from Book➔

Auto left/right Duplex
Open from Book➔
Manual top Book
Left top
Left top Rear
Rear corner
corner

Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Finished C h e ck d i r e c t i o n Finished Check direction
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f Set book or iginal top
C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f side direction to back.
original.
original.
Left/Right BookR
Auto binding Duplex
Top BookR
Manual binding Book
Left top
Left top Back Edge Corner
Back Edge
corner
Press the [Start] key.

17 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the desired
denominator for the page numbers.
19 Copying will start.
* The desired denominator can also be entered directly by
touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the
keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. 81/2x11"

Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
Auto +
Manual
Left top
# keys Rear
corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
original.
Auto
Manual
Left top
#-Keys Back Edge
corner
5-19
9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode]

This mode can be used to scan the first original (the “form”) into
memory and have its image overlaid onto copies made from 3 Touch the “On” key.
The screen to set the shading level of the form image will be
subsequent originals. If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your displayed.
copier, it is also possible to register and store in memory, in advance,
Inch specifications
the images that you want to use as original forms.
Paper size Set
Forms Overlay Register Back Close
Off Overlay first scanned image onto
A A
the scanned image or on registered from.
On
B B Metric specifications
C C Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
Form overlay Register Back Close
Of Overlay 1st image on the scanned

image or on registered form.
NOTE On
Refer to “(2) Form registration” on page 6-1 for the procedure to

register images as forms.
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the level of shading
4 that you want to use for the original form.
The desired shading level can be set to any 10% increment
will be displayed. between 10% and 100%.
* A sample of the effect that the selected shading level will
produce will be displayed to the right of the entry field.
2 Touch the “Forms Overlay” [“Form overlay”] key. The “Forms

Overlay” [“Form overlay”] screen will be displayed. Inch specifications
Place from first then press start.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set Forms Overlay Register Back Close
Ready to copy. 11x81/2" (10~100)

Exposure 50 %
paper Combine
Off
mode Up
/Enlarge Selection scanning Scan form once
On
Orig.image Margin/ Forms Form
Page # Down
quality Centering Overlay Selected
Sort/ Border Cover
Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Basic User choice Function Program Metric specifications
Set form.
Metric specifications Press Start Key.
Paper size Set Form overlay Register Back Close

Ready to copy. (10 100)
Exposure 50 %
Merge copy
Off
Up
mode Enlarge selection originals Scan form once
On
Image Margin/ Page Form Form
overlay selection
Finished Mode Mode
5 If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your copier, it is also

possible to register and store in memory, in advance, the
images that you want to use as original forms. If you want to
use a previously registered image as the form, touch the
“Form Selected” [“Form selection”] key and go to the next
step.
If you want to scan in a new image, go directly to step 9.
5-20
6 Touch the “Loading Form” key.

A list of registered forms will be displayed. 9 If you are using the optional Document Processor, make sure
that the original that you want to use as the form is on top of
the originals that you want to copy.
Inch specifications
Select Form Back Close If you are using the platen, set the original that you want to
use as the form.
Scan form
once
Loading
Form
Overlay first scanned image onto
the scanned image or on registered from. 10 Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go

to the next step.
y
Paper size Set
Setselection
Form form. Back Close
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
Press Start key.
Form selection Back Close

11 [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.
Scan form Overlay 1st image on the scanned

once
Loading
Form
image or on registered form.
7 Select from that list the image that you want to use and then
touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 4.
Inch specifications
Select Form Back Close
Form 600dpi Up
Form 005 11x81/2"
Scan form Form 004 11x8 /2"

1
once
Form 003 81/2x11"
Loading
Form Form 002 11x81/2"
Form 001 11x81/2" Down
The arrow means direction of registered form.

Set original and form directions.
Form selection Back Close
Form 600dpi
Up
Form006
Scan form Form005

once
Form004
Loading
Form Form003
Down
Form002
The arrow means direction of registered form.

Set original and form directions.
8 Set the originals that you want to copy and go directly to step
10.
5-21
10. Making booklets from sheet originals [Booklet/Stitching mode]

With this mode, you can use 1-sided or 2-sided originals to make 3 If “Top” is selected as the binding direction...
open-faced, two-sided copies in such a way that the finished copies Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the
can be stacked and folded into a booklet format. You can also select finished copies read from top to bottom.
to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back
covers to the copy sets.
NOTES 1
2 2
3 4 1
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and 4 3
5
A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode. 6
7
8
• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used
6
to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on 5 7
8
page 7-71.)
Inch specifications
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding
(stapling) and folding. Only 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper
can be center folded and stapled.
4 It is possible for you to select whether or not to copy onto the
front and/or back cover sheets.
(stapling) and folding. Only A4R, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be Front cover Back cover
center folded and stapled.
Do NOT copy
b Copy on outside
a
b
Copy on inside
1 If “Left” is selected as the binding direction...

Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the Copy on both sides
finished copies read from left to right.
2 If “Right” is selected as the binding direction...

Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the
finished copies read from right to left. NOTES
• The asterisk “ ” indicates the side of the cover on which copying

will be accomplished.
1 1
• The illustrations above are an example of when “Left” is selected as
8
1 2
3
7
6
2 the binding direction.

3
4 4 5
5
6
7
8
2 8
1
6
7 2
3
5 4
5-22
1 Set the first original to be copied.

5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the
finished copies.
Inch specifications
will be displayed. 2 sided mode.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
Booklet Register Back Close

Original Finishing Stitching Check direction
3 Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be

displayed.
Open from
Off
Stitching
Check direction of
original top side.
None 1 sided
left Front cvr
Inch specifications Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Open from
right None
Book 2-sided Open from Saddle Left top
Paper size Rear
Set ➔Booklet Top/Bottom top corner
Stitch

paper Separation orig. size
Combine Metric specifications
mode Up Paper size Set
Duplex Mode.
Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover
Booklet Original Finished Stitching C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Finished Erase Mode
Basic User choice Function Program Off original.
Left Stitching
None 1-sided Front cov.
binding
Metric specifications Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Right
binding None
Book 2-sided Top Center Left top
Paper size Set Back Edge
RBooklet Top/Bottom binding Staple corner
Ready to copy.
Merge copy

mode
Image
quality
Enlarge
Margin/
Imag. shift
selection
Page
numbering
originals
Form
overlay
Up
Down
6 If “It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change
setting of original and finishing mode.” appears, check (on
the right side of the touch panel) whether both the orientation
Finished Mode Mode

of the originals and the finish mode setting are correct or not.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. 11x81/2"
4 Touch the “Booklet” key. The screen to specify the binding

direction of the originals and the finished copies will be
Change setting of original and finishing mode.

displayed. Check direction of
Off original top side.
Inch specifications None 1 sided

Open from
left
Stitching
Front cvr
2-sided Open from
Paper size Set Booklet Left/Right right None
Rear
➔Booklet Top/Bottom top Stitch corner
E d i t o n e o r t wo s i d e d o r i g i n a l p a g e s Paper size Set
None It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.
and out put a book.
Change setting of original and finishing mode.
Booklet U s e B o o k - b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Book Booklet Register Back Close

➔Booklet C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Original Finished Stitching
Off original.
Metric specifications None 1-sided Left Stitching

Front cov.
binding
2-sided Right
Paper size Set Booklet Left/Right None
binding
Ready to copy. Book 2-sided Top Center Left top
Back Edge
None Edit 1- and 2-sided originals

and output as book.
Booklet U s e B o o k R b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Book
RBooklet
5-23
7 If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold

Unit is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center 9 If you want to add covers, touch the “Stitching Front cvr”
[“Stitching Front cov.”] key and go to the next step.
Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select If you do NOT want to add covers, go directly to step 11.
center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this
Inch specifications
case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding
Paper size
operation to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center 2 sided mode. 11x81/2"
Set
Staple”] key and go to the next step.

Check direction of
If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be Off original top side.
performed, go directly to step 9. None 1 sided

Open from Stitching
left Front cvr
2-sided Open from
Booklet
Inch specifications Left/Right right None
Rear
Paper size Set
2 sided mode. 11x81/2"
Booklet Register Back Close Metric specifications

Paper size Set
Off
Check direction of
original top side. Duplex Mode.
Open from Stitching
None 1 sided Register Back Close
left Front cvr Booklet
2-sided Open from Original Finished Stitching C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Booklet Left/Right right None
Book 2-sided Open from Saddle Left top Off original.
Rear
Left Stitching
binding
2-sided Right
Booklet
Metric specifications Left/Right binding None
Back Edge
Paper size Set
Duplex Mode.
Or iginal Finished Stitching Check direction
Touch the “Cover” key and select whether or not (and where)
Left
Off
Stitching
Check direction of
or iginal. 10 to copy on each of the front and back covers.
binding
Booklet
2-sided
Left/Right
Right
binding None
Inch specifications
Back Edge
RBooklet Top/Bottom binding Staple corner Paper size Set
2 sided mode. 11x81/2"
Front cover Back Close

Touch the “Bind & Fold” key.
8 * It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 10 copy
Front cover Rear cover
sheets (40 layout pages) at one time. No cover Blank Back copy Blank Back copy
2 sided 2 sided
Front copy Front copy
Inch specifications Cover copy copy
Pape Set
2 sided mode. 81/2x11"
100%
Saddle Stitch Back Close Metric specifications

Paper size Set
Duplex Mode.
Off
Stitch. front cover. Back Close
Bind &
Fold Front cover Back cover
No cover Blank Back copy Blank Back copy
2-sided 2-sided
Cover Front copy Front copy
Metric specifications copy copy
Paper size Set

Duplex Mode.
Saddle Stitch Back Close
Off
Bind
& Fold
5-24


step.

5-25
11. Making booklets from book originals [Book to Booklet mode]

With this mode, you can add covers, and either copy onto them or not, ● With a cover
so that the finished copy sets will appear like a magazine, etc. The original that will be used as the cover will be scanned first so that,
when the finished copies are folded, that page will act as the front and
back cover to the copy set.
NOTES
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3
size originals and 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R,
A4, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode.
• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used 3 3
4
AB AB
2 5 2 5
to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page
1
6
6
7-71.)
Inch specifications
(stapling) and folding. Only 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper
can be center folded and stapled.
Metric specifications ● Without a cover
When the finished copies are folded, the front and back of the copy
set will be blank.
(stapling) and folding. Only A4R, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be
center folded and stapled.
3 3
4
2 2
AB
5 5
AB AB
1
1
6
6
1 Set the open-faced (book, etc.) original to be copied.

will be displayed.
5-26
3 Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be

displayed. 5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the
finished copies.

Set first page.
Press "Start" key.
11x81/2"
Select 2 sided/ Select Booklet Register Back Close

paper Combine
Original Finishing Copy front Check direction
Exposure Reduce Auto Batch Set the book original
mode Up Off top side direct to back.
Orig.image Margin/ Forms Book Open from Copy on

Page # Down None
quality Centering Overlay Left left front cvr
Book Open from
Sort/ Border Cover Booklet None
Booklet Right right
Finished Erase Mode
Book Saddle
Basic User choice Function Program ➔Booklet Stitch

Ready to copy. Set first page.
Press "START" button.
Select 2-sided/ Select Booklet Register Back Close

Merge copy
Original Finished C o py f r o n t C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Exposure Reduce/ Auto Large # of Set book original top
Up Off
mode Enlarge selection originals s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .
Image Margin/ Page Form Book Left Copy on

quality Imag. shift numbering Down None
overlay Left binding front cov.
Book Right
Sort/ Erase Cover Booklet Right None
Booklet binding
Finished Mode Mode
Book Center
Basic User choice Function Program RBooklet Staple
Touch the “Book / Booklet” key. The screen to specify the

4 binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will 6 If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold
Unit is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center
be displayed. Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select
center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this
Inch specifications
case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. 11x81/2" operation to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center
Staple”] key and go to the next step.
If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be

None E d i t o n e o r t wo s i d e d o r i g i n a l p a g e s performed, go directly to step 8.
and out put a book.
Booklet U s e B o o k - b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Inch specifications
Book
➔Booklet
Paper size Set
Set first page. 11x81/2"
Press "Start" key.
Metric specifications Booklet Register Back Close

Paper size Set Set the book original
Ready to copy. Off top side direct to back.
Book Open from Copy on

None
Booklet Register Back Close Left left front cvr
Book Open from
Booklet Right right None
Book Saddle
➔Booklet Stitch
None Edit 1- and 2-sided originals
and output as book.
Booklet U s e B o o k R b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
Book
RBooklet
Paper size Set
Set first page.

Original Finished C o py f r o n t C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Set book original top
Off s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .
Book Left Copy on

None front cov.
Left binding
Book Right
Booklet Right None
binding
Book Center
RBooklet Staple
5-27
7 Touch the “Bind & Fold” key.

* It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 10 copy 9 Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
sheets (40 layout pages) at one time.
Paper size Set
Set first page. 11x81/2"
Inch specifications Press "Start" key.
Copy on front cover Back Close

Pape Set
Set first page.
Press "Start" key. 81/2x11" Check direction
100% Set the book original
top side direct to back.
When selecting "ON" for copying on the
Off
front cover, follow the instruction.
1. Scan front cover book original
On 2. Start scan book originals
Off
Bind &
Fold
Paper size Set
Set first page.
Copy on front cover Back Close
Paper size Set
Set first page. C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
Press "START" button. Set book original top
s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .
W h e n s e l e c t i n g " O N " fo r c o py i n g o n t h e
Off
f r o n t c ove r, fo l l ow t h e i n s t r u c t i o n .
1 . S c a n f r o n t c ove r b o o k o r i g i n a l .
On 2 . S t a r t s c a n b o o k o r i g i n a l s.
Off
Bind
& Fold
IMPORTANT!
8 If you want to add covers, touch the “Copy on front cvr”
[“Copy on front cov.”] key. The “Copy on front cover” screen If you DO want to copy onto the covers, be absolutely certain to set
will be displayed. the original that you want to have copied onto the cover first.
At this point, if you do NOT want to copy onto the covers, go
directly to step 10.
Inch specifications
Set first page.

Press "Start" key.
Paper size
11x8 /2"
1
Set 10 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the original will start.

When a message appears telling you to set the next original,
Set the book original
Off top side direct to back. go to the next step.
Book Open from Copy on
None
Left left front cvr
Book Open from
Booklet Right right None
Book Saddle
➔Booklet Stitch
Paper size Set
Set first page.

Or iginal Finished Copy front Check direction
Off side direction to back.
Book Left Copy on

None front cov.
Left binding
Book Right
Booklet Right None
binding
Book Center
RBooklet Staple
Replace the first original with the next one and press the
11 [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.

5-28
12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher

[Sort/Finished mode]
Since copying in this mode is performed after multiple originals are
scanned and memorized, copies can be sorted into the required 3 Touch the “Sort/Finished” key. The “Sort/Finished” screen will
be displayed.
number of sets even without the optional Document Finisher.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
When “Sort:ON” and “On” [“1 set”] are Select 2 sided/ Select
paper Combine
selected 3
2 Exposure Reduce Auto Batch
Up
1 mode /Enlarge Selection scanning

Page # Down
3
2 Sort/ Border Cover
Booklet
3
1 Finished Erase Mode

2
1
3
2
1 Metric specifications
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
When “Sort:OFF” and “On” [“Output each paper Split size orig.

page”] are selected mode Enlarge selection originals
Up
1
1 Image Margin/ Page Form Down
1 quality Imag. shift numbering overlay

Finished Mode Mode
3
2 Basic User choice Function Program
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
4 Touch the “Sort:ON” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
(when there is paper loaded of the same Sort/Finished Register Back Close
Sort Offset
size but different orientation)
Sort:Off Off
Sort:On On
Rear
NOTES
• If you do not have paper of the same size but different orientations Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
available for paper feed, copies will be ejected without being
“sorted” in this way. Sort/Finished Register Back Close
Sor t Group
• You can also select whether or not the Sort and/or the Finished
modes will be the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Sort/
Sort:Off Off
Finished mode ON/OFF” on page 7-78.)
Sort:On 1 set

5 Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab

2 will be displayed. 6 Use the keypad to set the number of copies to be made.

Copying will start.
5-29
13. Auto rotation function

If the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper
loaded in the drawers[cassettes], the image will be automatically 2 Touch the “Auto Rotation” key. The “Auto Rotation” screen
will be displayed.
turned 90 degrees counter-clockwise for copying. No special setting is
Inch specifications
required in order to use this function.
Paper size Set
Auto OHP Memo

Proof Copy
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
NOTES
• This function will only work with 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11",
11" x 8 1/2", A6R, B6R, A5R, B5R, B5, A4R and A4 size copy paper.
• You can also select whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be
the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Auto Rotation mode ON/
OFF” on page 7-79.)
3 Touch the “No Rotate” key.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
If you want to disengage the auto rotation function, perform the Auto Rotation Register Back Close
following procedure.
No Rotate When original and paper have different

direction, image will be rotated.
1 Touch the “Function” tab and then the “▼ Down” key.

Rotate
displayed.
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Rotation Register Back Close
No rotate W h e n o r i g i n a l a n d p a p e r h ave d i f fe r e n t
direction, original will be rotated
Rotate a u t o m a t i c a l l y.
5-30
14. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets [Cover mode]
With this mode, you can select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to your copy sets.
NOTE
It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page 7-71.)
You can select separately whether you want both sides or only one side of both the front and back covers to be copied onto, or to have either or
both of them left completely blank. Select also whether or not you even want to include a back cover at all.
Front cover Back cover
2 sided copy[Duplex Copy]*
Front copy
Back copy*
Blank
No back cover
* The illustrations above show the result when sets of 2-sided copies are being made.
If you are making sets of 1-sided copies, copying will not be performed on the rear side of the covers even if the 2-sided copy [Duplex Copy] or
Back copy settings are selected.
5-31

5 Select the desired settings for the front cover.
Inch specifications

will be displayed.
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
Cover Mode Register Back Close
3 Touch the “Cover Mode” key. The “Cover Mode” screen will be
displayed. No cover Blank Back copy
2 sided
No cover
Cover Front copy copy Cover
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
paper Combine
Separation orig. size Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
mode Up
Orig.image Margin/ Forms Cover Mode Register Back Close

Page # Down
Fr o n t c ove r B a ck c ove r
Sort/ Border Cover
Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Basic User choice Function Program No cover Blank Back copy No cover
Duplex
Cover Front copy Copy Cover
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
6 Touch the “Cover” key or the “No cover” key, as appropriate,


Up to select whether or not you want to include a back cover.
Image
quality
Margin/
Imag. shift
Page
numbering
Form
overlay
Down If you selected “Cover”, the screen to make the back cover
settings will be displayed.
Finished Mode Mode
Basic User choice Function Program Inch specifications

Paper size Set
4 Touch the “Cover” key. The screen to make the front cover
settings will be displayed. Cover Mode Register Back Close
Inch specifications
No cover Blank Back copy No cover
Paper size Set
Cover Front copy
2 sided
Cover
copy
Front cover
No cover Insert Color or Thick, etc paper
as a front/back cover. Paper size Set
Cover Able to copy on same paper. Ready to copy.
Set the cover paper for specify
drawer.
No cover Blank Back copy No cover
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. Cover Front copy
Duplex
Cover
Copy

Front cover
No cover Inser t front & back cover paper (Colour/
7 Select the desired settings for the back cover.

Thick etc...) to head & end of copy.
Cover
Set cover paper in dedignated
paper cassette.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
No cover Blank Back copy No cover Blank Back copy

2 sided 2 sided
Cover Front copy copy Cover Front copy copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
No cover Blank Back copy No cover Blank Back copy

Duplex Duplex
Cover Front copy Copy Cover Front copy Copy
5-32


step.

5-33
15. Original size selection mode

With this mode, if you manually select a size for the original, only that
size image will be scanned for copying. Use this mode as well when 3 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The
“Select original size” [“Select size original”] screen will be
copying from originals of non-standard sizes. displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set

paper Combine

8 1/2" x 11" mode /Enlarge Selection scanning
Up

Page # Down
A4 quality Centering Overlay
Sort/ Border Cover

A Booklet
B C Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy

NOTES mode Enlarge selection originals
Up

overlay
• You can register the size of non-standard originals that you often
use as a custom original size. (See “4. Original size registration” on Finished Mode Mode
Function
page 7-90.) Basic User choice Program
• ALWAYS set non-standard sized originals on the platen.

• Once you select the original size under this mode, you can copy with
Select the size of the originals.
originals set on the platen even with the optional Document
Processor open.
4 If you want to select a standard scanning size, touch the key
• If this mode is used in combination with the Centering/Image shift that corresponds to the desired size and then go directly to
mode, you can, for example, have the image of non-standard sized step 9.
originals centered on standard sized copy paper. (See “4. Centering/ If you want to select a standard size other than those
Image shift mode” on page 5-8.) displayed, go to the next step.
If you want to select the dimensions of the scan area
manually, go directly to step 7.
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
Select original size Register Back Close

will be displayed. Auto 81/2 x 14" 11 x 15"
User regist.
51/2 x 51/2"
Select 11 x 17" 51/2 x 81/2" A4 81/2 x 81/2"

size
Input size 81/2 x 11" 81/2 x 51/2"

Cardstock A4 11 x 11"
Other
stand. Size 11 x 81/2" 9 x 9"
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Select size original Register Back Close
Use regist
Auto 100X100mm
Select
size 150X150mm
Input size 200X200mm

Others
stand. Size Folio 120X120mm
NOTE
If you have registered a custom original size, you will be able to select
that size for use in this mode. (See “4. Original size registration” on
page 7-90.)
5-34
5 Touch the “Other stand. Size” [“Others stand.Size”] key.
6 Select the size of the originals and then proceed to step 9.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
A3 B4 B5 8K
Select
size A5 B5 Folio 16K
Input size A5 B5 81/2 x 13"
Other
stand. Size A6 B6 P. Card
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
11 x 17" 81/2 x 13"

Select
size 81/2 x 14" Pstcard
Input size 51/2 x 81/2" 8K
Others
stand. Size 81/2 x 51/2" 16K
7 Touch the “Input size” key. The screen to set the dimensions
of the scan area will be displayed.
8 Based on the left rear corner of the platen being a setting of

“0”, touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the dimensions
of the scan area to the desired setting.
* In metric specification copiers, the dimensions can also be
entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and then
using the keypad.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set

2 115/8 2 17
2 " 2 "
Select
Set original on platen and input
size
s c a n n i n g ra n g e. ( Y s i d e, X s i d e )
Input size
Other
stand. Size
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
S c a n n i n g ra n g e c a n b e s e t w i t h
Select size X-Y direction when original is
p l a c e d a t l e f t r e a r c o r n e r.
Input size
Others
stand. Size #-Keys #-Keys

5-35
16. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies

[Transparency + backing sheet mode]
When 2 or 3 transparencies are piled on top of one another, static
electricity can cause problems. This mode automatically places a
backing sheet between the transparencies during copying for easy

handling. You can also select whether or not to have the image of the
original copied onto the backing sheet, or even make multiple copies
2 Set the transparency film on the multi-bypass tray.
from the same original.
IMPORTANT!
When copying onto transparencies, ALWAYS use the multi-bypass

tray.
AB IMPORTANT!
• Fan through the transparencies before setting them.

• Up to 25 transparencies can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one
time.
• Make sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the
transparencies has been loaded into a drawer[cassette].
● Copying onto the backing sheet 3 Touch the “Function” tab and then the “▼ Down” key.
With this setting, after the original is copied onto the transparency, the
displayed.
same image will be copied onto the backing sheet as well. (The
asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the transparencies.)
4 Touch the “OHP backing” [“OHP back”] key. The “OHP

backing” [“OHP back”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Auto OHP Memo

Proof Copy
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
● Leaving the backing sheet blank Ready to copy.
With this setting, the original will be copied onto the transparency but Auto Memo
OHP back Test copy
Rotation pages
the backing sheet will be left blank. (The asterisk “*” in the illustration
Orig. set
indicates the transparencies.) direction
Modify Down
copy
5-36
5 Touch the “Copy” key or the “Blank” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
OHP backing
backing Register Back Close
None I n s e r t a bl a n k p a p e r b e t we e n p i e c e o f
O H P f i l m , o r c o py t o a O H P b a ck p a p e r.
Copy
P l a c e t h e O H P f i l m i n t h e by p a s s.
Blank
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
OHP back
bac Register Back Close
None I n s e r t bl a n k p a p e r b e t we e n O H P f i l m s o r
c o py t o O H P b a ck p a p e r.
Copy
P l a c e O H P f i l m o n by p a s s.
Blank

Copying will start.
5-37
17. Inverting black and white [Invert mode]

With this mode, you can make copies where the black and white
areas of the image are inverted (or reversed). 5 Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
* If multiple inverted copies are being made, “Please wait Now
Paper Size
cleaning” may be displayed. Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Set
Invert Register Back Close
Off
C o py t h e s c a n n e d i m a g e w i t h r eve r s i n g
bl a ck a n d w h i t e p a r t s.
On
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Invert Register Back Close
Off
C o py s c a n n e d i m a g e w i t h
bl a ck a n d w h i t e p a r t s r eve r s e d .
On

will be displayed. 6 Press the [Start] key.
Copying will start.
3 Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of

the “Function” tab will be displayed.
Touch the “Invert” key. The “Invert” screen will be displayed.

4
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Auto OHP Memo

Proof Copy
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
5-38
18. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode]

With this mode, you can make mirror image copies.
5 Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Mirror Register Back Close
Off
R eve r s e s c a n n e d i m a g e l e f t t o r i g h t ,
m i r r o r i m a g e.
On
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Mirror Register Back Close
Off
R eve r s e d s c a n n e d i m a g e l e f t t o r i g h t

will be displayed.
On
a s a r e f l e c t i o n i n t h e m i r r o r.

Copying will start.
4 Touch the “Mirror” key. The “Mirror” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Auto OHP Memo

Proof Copy
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
5-39
19. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying [Proof mode]
With this mode, you can use the same settings to create a single set
of test copies in order to verify the results prior to actually starting to 5 Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
make a large number of copies or copy sets. This way, if there is a
Paper
problem with the copies, you can cancel print out in order to change Ready to copy. 81/2x11
Set
the settings and eliminate a great majority of miss-copying.

Proof Copy Register Back Close
Off W h e n " O n " i s s e l e c t e d , c o py i n g s t o p s

after one set is ejected.
On T h i s i s u s e f u l fo r c h e ck i n g f i n i s h i n g .
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Test copy Register Back Close
Off I f " O n " i s s e l e c t e d , c o py i n g s t o p s a f t e r

one set is ejected.
On F i n i s h i n g r e s u l t c a n t h e n b e c h e cke d .

Copying will start.
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go

the “Function” tab will be displayed. to the next step.
4 Touch the “Proof Copy” [“Test copy”] key. The “Proof Copy”
[“Test copy”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying of the test copy set will
Auto
Rotation
OHP
backing
Proof Copy
Memo
pages
start.
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
5-40
9 Once the test copy set is complete, a screen will be

displayed in order to verify whether or not you want to make
the initially designated number of copy sets at the present
settings, and the copier will enter a waiting-to-copy state.
Check the test copies.
Inch specifications
C h e ck p r o o f c o py.
To s t o p a n d r e t r y, p r e s s " C a n c e l " key.
To c o n t i nu e t o p r i n t , p r e s s " S t a r t " key.
Or ig. page Count/Set Output
11x81/2" 100% 11x81/2"

1 sided APS 2 sided Cancel
Change
Preset
Job130
C h e ck t e s t c o py.
To s t o p a n d r e t r y , p r e s s " C a n c e l " key.
To c o n t i nu e t o p r i n t , p r e s s " S t a r t " key.
Original Count / set Output
A4 100% A4
1-sided APS 2-sided Cancel
Rtop/Rear Sort Inner tray
Change
Preset
JOB130
● If there is no problem with the copies…

Press the [Start] key and copying of the initially designated
number of copy sets will start.
If you want to change the number of copies to be made,
touch the “Change Preset” key and enter the actual number
of copies you do want to make.
● If there is some problem with the copies…

Touch the “Cancel” key to cancel the copy job and start the
procedure from the beginning.
5-41
20. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished
[Repeat copy mode]
With this mode, if you think you might want to make another set of the
same copies even after the initial copy job is finished, simply turn the 4 Touch the “Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will
be displayed.
repeat copy mode ON and you can make the necessary number of
Inch specifications
additional copies later. In order to maintain privacy, you can make it
Paper size
necessary to enter a security code in order to use the repeat copy Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Set
mode so that, if the entered code doesn’t match the registered

Auto OHP Memo
Proof Copy
security code, it will not be possible to use the repeat copy mode. Rotation backing pages
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
NOTES
• The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to

Inch specifications
use this mode.
Paper Size
• All data for repeat copying will be deleted when the power switch is Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Set
turned OFF.
Modify Copy Register Back Close
• Repeat copying registration is not available for print out under Security
document management or with the form overlay mode.

• You can prohibit repeat copying as well as make repeat copying the Off # keys W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
default setting in the initial mode. (See “Repeat copying ON/OFF” on On Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
s ave d d o c u m e n t .
page 7-83.)
Paper size Set
(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying Ready to copy.
Modify copy Register Back Close
Security

Off #-Keys
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , j o b c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n s e t a p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d
On document.

will be displayed.
If you want to register a security code, go to the next step.

If you do NOT want to register a security code, go directly to
step 7.
5-42
6 Touch the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key to highlight that key and

then enter the security code that will enable repeat copying
(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode
for these originals. Once you press the [Repeat Copy] key, the “Modify copy” list will be
displayed so that you can verify the copy jobs that are registered for
Inch specifications
repeat copying. It is possible to reprint, check the contents of, and
Paper Size
Set
delete the copy jobs that are registered in this list.
Modify Copy Register Back Close
Security
1 Reprinting a registered copy job
Off
On
# keys W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
1 Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be
displayed.
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Modify copy Register Back Close
Security
W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , j o b c a n b e s ave d .
Off #-Keys Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.
Yo u c a n s e t a p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d
On document.
NOTES
Select the copy job that you want to reprint and touch the
• The security code can be between 1 and 8 digits long. 2 “Reprint” key.
• If you forget the security code that you enter here, repeat copying
will not be possible for these originals. Be sure to keep some sort of Inch specifications
record of the security code. Modify copy End
Job Input source Original Set Registration Type

119 Copy 7 1 10/10 22:37 Norm. copy
120 Copy 3 5 10/10 22:40 Norm. copy
121 Copy 10 2 10/10 22:45 Norm. copy
122 Copy 1 6 10/10 22:50 Norm. copy

Copying will start.
Modify Copy
Reprint Delete
Check
details
10/10 22:50
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go Metric specifications
to the next step.
Modify copy End
8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the 119 Copy 7 1 10/10 22:37 Norm. copy
120 Copy 3 5 10/10 22:40 Norm. copy

[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. 121 Copy 10 2 10/10 22:45 Norm. copy
122 Copy 1 6 10/10 22:50 Norm. copy
Check
Reprint Delete details
Modify copy 10/10 22:50
If you designated a security code when you registered the

copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be
displayed. In this case, go to the next step.
If you did NOT designate a security code when you

registered the copy job for repeat copying, the screen to
select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be
displayed. In this case, go directly to step 4.
5-43
2 Checking the contents of registered copy jobs
3 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and
the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the
registered one, the screen to select the number of copies or Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be
copy sets to be made will be displayed. 1 displayed.
Inch specifications
Stop
Enter the re-print code.
(Enter by #key)
Clear
Enter
Stop
(Enter #-key) 2 Select the copy job that you want to check the content of and
touch the “Check detail” key.
Clear
Inch specifications
Enter
Modify copy End

119 Copy 7 1 10/10 22:37 Norm. copy
120 Copy 3 5 10/10 22:40 Norm. copy
121 Copy 10 2 10/10 22:45 Norm. copy
NOTES 122 Copy 1 6 10/10 22:50 Norm. copy

Check
• To reenter a mistaken security code, touch the “Clear” key.
Modify Copy 10/10 22:50
• If you touch the “Stop” key, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 2.
Modify copy End
4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to set the number of copies or
copy sets to be made.
119
120
Copy
Copy
7
3
1
5
10/10 22:37
10/10 22:40
Norm. copy
Norm. copy
121 Copy 10 2 10/10 22:45 Norm. copy
Inch specifications 122 Copy 1 6 10/10 22:50 Norm. copy
Check
Reprint Stop
Set
If you designated a security code when you registered the
copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be
displayed. In this case, go to the next step.
Printing If you did NOT designate a security code when you
registered the copy job for repeat copying, the “Check
details / Reprint” screen will be displayed. In this case,
go directly to step 4.
Reprint Stop
Set
Printing
5 Touch the “Printing” key.

Print out will start.
5-44
3 Deleting a registered copy jobs
3 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and
the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the
registered one, the “Check details / Reprint” screen will be Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be
displayed. 1 displayed.
Inch specifications
Stop
(Enter by #key)
Clear
Enter
Stop
(Enter #-key) 2 Select the copy job that you want to delete and touch the
“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.
Clear
Inch specifications
Enter
Modify copy End

119 Copy 7 1 10/10 22:37 Norm. copy
Check the contents of the selected job. You can also check
4 the content of the first page of the copy job by touching the
120
121
Copy
Copy
3
10
5
2
10/10 22:40
10/10 22:45
Norm. copy
Norm. copy
“Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key. 122 Copy 1 6 10/10 22:50 Norm. copy
Check
Inch specifications Modify Copy 10/10 22:50
Check details / Reprint Close
Item Details Metric specifications

Orig. page 3
Set Print Modify copy End
5
from 1st
Print size 11 x 8 1/2"
Input source copy
Registration date 10/10 22:40
119 Copy 7 1 10/10 22:37 Norm. copy
120 Copy 3 5 10/10 22:40 Norm. copy

121 Copy 10 2 10/10 22:45 Norm. copy
Job120
122 Copy 1 6 10/10 22:50 Norm. copy
Check
Check details / Reprint Close
Item Details
Original 3
Set Head
5
print
Print size A4
Input source Copy
Registration date 10/10 22:40
Job120
5 Once you have finished checking the content of the copy job,
touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
6 If you want to check the contents of another registered copy

job, repeat steps 2 through 5.
7 contents of the “Basic” tab.
5-45
3 Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Stop
Job # : 117
Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?
Yes No
Stop
Job # : 117
Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?
Yes No
If you selected “Yes”, the selected copy job will be canceled

and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen
in step 2 without canceling the selected job.
4 If you want to cancel another registered copy job, repeat

steps 2 through 3.
5-46
21. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation

[Batch scanning mode]
With this mode, you can scan multiple sets of originals and then have
them all copied at the same time. Scan one set of originals of the 4 Touch the “On” key.
Inch specifications
same type and then register that as a single step in the copy job, and
Paper Size
you can copy an extremely large volume of originals in one batch. Place originals then press Start key.
11x81/2"
Set
Continuous scanning Register Back Close
Off C o py s c a n n e d i m a g e s o f f.
Platen as one job or scanned originals
u s i n g d o c u m e n t p r o c e s s o r.
On
A B C C
B
A Metric specifications
Paper size Set
Set original.
Press Start key.
Multiple scanning Register Back Close
Off Originals scanned through the platen

and Document Processor can be
p r o c e s s e d a s o n e c o py j o b.
1 Set the originals to be copied. On

3 Touch the “Batch scanning” [“Large # of originals”] key.

The “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”] screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set

paper Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Metric specifications 6 Replace the first originals with the next set and press the
[Start] key. Scanning of those next originals (the next step in
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. the copy job) will start.
Merge copy

Exposure
mode
Image
Reduce/
Enlarge
Margin/
Auto
selection
Page
Large # of
originals
Form
Up
Down

Finished Mode Mode
5-47
22. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode]

With this mode, you can reduce the amount of toner that is used to
make the copies. 4 Touch the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be
displayed.
Use this mode with, for example making test copies, when you do not
Inch specifications
especially need to print out high quality copies. You can also make
Paper size
the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Eco Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Set
print mode ON/OFF” on page 7-66.)

Auto OHP Memo
Proof Copy
* Images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal. Rotation backing pages
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
With the eco print With the eco print
mode turned OFF mode turned ON
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
5 Touch the “Off” key or the “On” key, as appropriate.

will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. 11 x 81/2"
Eco Print
Print Register Back Close

Eco Print
It is possible to reduce
toner consumption.
Image is light.
Eco print is saving toner consumption,
and it is economically.
Off On
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Eco Print Register Back Close
Eco Print
To n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
can be reduced.
Image resolution reduced.
E c o P r i n t e n a bl e s t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
reduction.
Off On

5-48
23. Original set direction

It is necessary to specify the direction in which the originals were set
whenever you use the 2-sided copy modes, the page separation/split 4 Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner”
key, as appropriate.
copy modes, the margin mode, the centering/image shift mode, the
Inch specifications
memo mode, the border erase modes, the combine/merge copy
Paper Size
modes, the print page numbers mode, the booklet/stitching mode, the Ready to copy. 11 x 81/2"
Set
auto selection/filing mode (optional), the staple mode (optional) and

Orig. set direction Register Back Close
the punch mode (optional). You can also use the following procedure Check direction
Check direction of
to perform the setting as well. original top side.
"Check direction original" can be shown

at right side of display.
Follow the steps. If setting mode is
1 Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab wrong, incorrect copy will result.
Left top
Rear corner
will be displayed.

Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
Orig. set direction Register Back Close

original.
3 Touch the “Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction”

screen will be displayed. " C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n
a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay.
Fo l l ow t h e s t e p s. I f s e t t i n g m o d e i s
w r o n g , i n c o r r e c t c o py w i l l r e s u l t .
Inch specifications Back Edge
Left top
corner
Paper size Set

Auto OHP Memo

Proof Copy
Orig. set
Modify Down
Copy
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto Test copy Memo
Rotation OHP back
pages
Orig. set
direction
Modify Down
copy
5-49
24. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function]

Up to eight combinations of copy modes and other functions displayed
on the operation panel can be registered as a single program using 5 Use the displayed keyboard to enter the desired name and
then touch the “End” key.
this function. You can also register a name for each registered
Inch specifications
program.
Name to display Stop End
Catalog A Limit:16 letters including #

AllDel. Del. prev
(1) Registering a program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \
1 Set the desired copy modes, etc., to be registered. a s d f g h j k l ; '
z x c v b n m , . /
Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space
2 Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab

will be displayed. Metric specifications
Touch the “Register” key.

3
Catalog A Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Inch specifications AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. 11 x 81/2" q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
a s d f g h j k l ; '
Recall Reg./delete
z x c v b n m , . /
Register
Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space
Delete
Change
name
NOTE
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
Paper size
Ready to copy. Set
entering characters.
Recall Reg./delete
Register
Delete

Change
name 6 Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be registered
Copying is now possible using the settings that were
registered under that program.
Inch specifications
4 Touch any key that is marked “No registration” and that
corresponds to the program key (1 – 8) under which you
Register program. Stop
want to register the settings. The screen to register a name
for that program will be displayed.
Program # : 1
Inch specifications Program name :Catalog A
The set program is registered. Is it correct?

Register present setting End
Select program number.

Yes No
No registration No registration
No registration No registration Metric specifications

Register program. Stop
Program # : 1
Metric specifications Program name : Catalog A
The set program is registered. Is it correct?

Select program number.

Yes No
5-50
(2) Using programmed settings to make copies 3 Touch the program key (1 – 8) for which you want to change
the registered name.
The screen to register a name for that program will be
will be displayed.
displayed.
Inch specifications
Touch the program key under which the settings that you
2 want to use are registered.
Registration name change
Select the number for changing name.
End
Inch specifications
Catalog A File A
Paper Size Set

Ready to copy. 11 x 8 /2"
1
Catalog B File B
Catalog C No registration
Recall Reg./delete
Catalog D List A
Catalog A File A Register
Catalog B File B
Delete
Catalog C
List A Change
Catalog D
name
Registration name change End
Select the number for changing name.
Metric specifications File A

Catalog A
Paper size Set

Ready to copy. Catalog B File B
Recall Reg./delete
Catalog D List A
Catalog B File B
Delete
Catalog C
Change
Catalog D List A
name
Basic User choice Function Program 4 Once you have deleted the old name and entered the new
one, press the “End” key.
Inch specifications
3 Set the originals to be copied and press the [Start] key.

Copying will start using the settings that were registered
Name to display
Limit:16 letters including #

Stop End
Catalog A
under that program. AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
z x c v b n m , . /
(3) Changing a registered program name

will be displayed.
2 Touch the “Change name” key. Catalog A Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
AllDel. Del. prev
Inch specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy. 11 x 81/2" a s d f g h j k l ; '
z x c v b n m , . /
Recall Reg./delete
Catalog B File B
Delete
Catalog C
List A Change
Catalog D
name
Basic User choice Function Program NOTE
Metric specifications Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Recall Reg./delete
Catalog B File B
Delete
Catalog C
Catalog D List A
Change
name
5 Once “The set program is registered. Is it correct?” is
displayed, check the entered name and, if it is correct, touch
the “Yes” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
5-51
(4) Deleting a registered program 4 Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications

will be displayed.
Delete program. Stop
P r o gra m #
P r o gra m n a m e Catalog A
2 Touch the “Delete” key.

T h i s p r o gra m w i l l b e d e l e t e d . A r e yo u s u r e ?
Inch specifications
Yes No
Paper Size Set

Ready to copy. 11 x 8 /2"
1
Recall Reg./delete Metric specifications

Delete program. Stop

Catalog B File B
Delete
Catalog C
List A Change
Catalog D
name P r o gra m #
Basic User choice Function Program P r o gra m n a m e Catalog A
T h i s p r o gra m w i l l b e d e l e t e d . A r e yo u s u r e ?
YES NO
Paper size Set

Ready to copy.
Recall Reg./delete
If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be deleted and the
touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Catalog B File B
Delete If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3
Catalog C
Change
without deleting the selected program.
Catalog D List A
name
3 Touch the program key (1 – 8) that corresponds to the

program that you want to delete.
lnch specifications
Delete registration End
Select the number of program to delete.
Catalog A File A
Catalog B File B
Catalog D List A
Select the number of program to delete.
Catalog A File A
Catalog B File B
Catalog D List A
5-52
25. Registration keys

You can register up to 3 functions and/or modes, from among those
displayed in the “Function” tab, under the registration keys. The 3 Touch the “4 in 1” key and then the “Register” key.
Inch specifications
functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab can
Paper size Set
be registered under registration keys as well. Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
50%
Combine Register Back Close

(1) Registering a function or mode under a function Layout Border line Check direction
Check direction of
key None original top side.
None Solid
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a function Dotted
or mode under a registration key. Borders Rear

Left top
corner
To register a function or mode under a registration key, refer to the
following sample procedure (which shows how to register the “4 in 1”
combine/merge copy mode under a registration key).
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy Register Back Close
L ayo u t Border line C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
IMPORTANT! C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f
original.
None
In order to register functions and/or modes under registration keys, None Solid
you must first turn the setting ON under “Registration keys ON/OFF” 2-in-1 Dotted
Left top
on page 7-84. 4-in-1 Cropmark Back Edge
corner
1 Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab 4 In the “Register” screen, touch the “Register” key once again.
The screen to register functions and/or modes under
will be displayed. registration keys will be displayed.
Inch specifications
2 Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”

[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed. Select item.
Register End
lnch specifications
Register
Paper size Set
Delete
paper Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Basic User choice Function Program Select item.

Register End
Register
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Delete
Merge copy

Up

overlay

Finished Mode Mode
5-53
5 Touch the registration key under which you want to register

the function. “Register this selecting mode. OK?” will be
NOTE
displayed. If, in the screen to register functions and/or modes under registration
keys, you select a previously registered key, the following screen will
Inch specifications
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Select the number of program to registered.
Register this function. Stop

No
registrat.
No T h i s nu m b e r i s a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d .
registrat.
No
registrat.
R e g i s t e r N o. 1
R e g i s t e r t h i s s e l e c t i n g m o d e. O K ?
Yes No

Select the number of program to registered.
Register this function. Stop

No
registrat.
No T h i s nu m b e r i s a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d
registrat.
No
registrat.
R e g i s t e r N o. 1
R e g i s t e r t h i s s e l e c t i n g m o d e. O K ?
YES NO
6 Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen

will be displayed again. If you selected “Yes”, the selected function will be registered under the
registration key.
Inch specifications
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 5
Register this function. Stop without registering the selected function.
Register No. 1
Register this selecting mode. OK?
Yes No 7 Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will
now appear on the right side of the touch panel as a
registration key.
Inch specifications
Register this function. Stop Paper size Set
Ready to copy. 81/2x11"

paper Combine
Combine
Register No. 1 Exposure Reduce Auto Batch

Up
Register this selecting mode. OK?
Page # Down
YES NO Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
paper Split size original Merge copy
Up

quality orig. Imag. shift numbering overlay Down
Sort/ Erase Cover

Booklet
Finished Mode Mode
NOTE
The functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab
can be registered under registration keys as well. A “Register” key will
be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be
registered under the registration keys.
5-54
(2) Deleting a registration key 3 In the “Register” screen, touch the “Delete” key once again.
The screen to delete registration keys will be displayed.
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a
Inch specifications
registration key.
Select item.
1 Touch the registration (to the right of the “Basic” tab) that you
want to delete. (Example: “Combine” [“Merge copy”]) Register End
Register
lnch specifications
Paper Size Set Delete
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
81/2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color
1
Bypass Auto
Reduce
/Enlarge
11x8 /2"
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Recycled Exposure Reduce Sort/ Select item.
Basic User choice Function Program Register End
Register
Delete
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
Recycled
Exposure
mode
Reduce/
Enlarge
Sort/
Finished
4 Touch the registration key (1 – 3) that corresponds to the
program that you want to delete. “Are you sure you want to
delete?” will be displayed.
Inch specifications
2 In the resulting screen for that function or mode (example:

the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen), touch the “Register”
Delete registration
S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o d e l e t e.
End
key. The “Register” screen will be displayed.

Combine
Orig. Image
lnch specifications quality
Reduce
Paper size Set /Enlarge
50%
Combine Register Back Close

Layout Border line Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
None
None Solid

Dotted
S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o d e l e t e.
Left top
Borders Rear
corner
Merge copy
Image
Metric specifications quality
Reduce/
Paper size Set Enlarge
Ready to copy.
Merge copy Register Back Close
L ayo u t Border line C h e ck d i r e c t i o n
None original.
None Solid
2-in-1 Dotted
Left top
4-in-1 Cropmark Back Edge
corner
5-55
5 Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen

will be displayed again.
Inch specifications
Delete registration. Stop
Register No. 1
Are you sure you want to delete?
Yes No
Delete registration. Stop
Register No. 1
Are you sure you want to delete?
YES NO
Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will
6 be deleted from on the right side of the touch panel.
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image
81/2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain
11x81/2"
Paper Size Set
Ready to copy.
Plain Image
quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

Recycled
5-56
26. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in
one operation [Job build mode]
The job build function enables you to scan different sets of originals NOTE
into memory in separate steps and then copy them all at one time.
Each set of scanned originals is then seen as one step in the copy This procedure will assume that the color paper to be used as the
process and you can select different copy modes for each step front cover and the middle insert (originals “A” and “C”), as well as for
(enlarge/reduce, border erase, original type [2-sided originals, 1-sided the back cover, will be set on the multi-bypass, and that there is plain
originals or open-faced book originals]). You can choose to have a copy paper loaded in drawer[cassette] No.1.
blank sheet of paper fed in between each set of originals, as well as
have front and rear covers included for the full set, AND do this all
during 2-sided copying! ● Step 1: Accessing the “Job build” screen
1 Press the [Job build] key.

The “Job build” screen will be displayed.
3 C-2
A-1 1 B-3
2 B-1
A-3
B-1 C-1 2 A-1
(1) Using the job build mode ● Making the settings that apply to all steps
First, the settings for the 2-sided copy modes and the repeat copy
The following procedure shows one way of using the job build mode mode must be made.
and explains how to perform that operation under the situation
indicated in the examples below.
NOTES
[Example] • The repeat copy mode is used to enable you to make an additional
<Finished copies> number of copy sets later.
(The asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the blank sheets.) • It is also possible to select other settings and functions, as desired,
besides those given in the example procedure. (See “(2) Selecting
the settings and functions” on page 5-62.)
2-1
2-
2
1-1
2 Touch the “1 sided/2 sided” key.
1-
2
2
A-1 The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be displayed.
1 Inch specifications
Ready to Job build. Set
Place originals then press Start key.
Job Build - Step1 End
11x81/2” 1 sided 1 sided copy Insert

Select Original 1 sided/ page
paper type 2 sided
<Originals> Offset AMS Back Edge
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Basic Quality Edit
A B C D Metric specifications
Set
1-2 2-2 Ready to Job build.
1 1-1
2 2-1
Set original. Press Start key.
Job Build-Step 1
1-sided 1-sided Copy

End
Insert
Select Original 1-sided/ blank page
paper type 2-sided
1-sided Copy-Left
Group AMS Back Edge Finished page #: 0
Reduce/ Orig. set
Finished Enlarge direction
Basic Quality Edit
5-57
3 Touch the “2 sided copy” key and then touch the “Open from
left” [“Left binding”] key. Finally, touch the “Close” key. The 5 Touch the “On” key.
touch panel will return to the screen in step 2. screen in step 4.

Set Set
Ready to Job build. Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. Place originals then press Start key.
1 sided/ 2 sided copy Back Close Modify Copy Back Close

Finished Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
1 sided Open from W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .

copy left Off
2 sided Open from Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
copy right On
Open from Left top
top Rear corner

Set Set
Set original. Press Start key. Set original. Press Start key.
1-sided / 2-sided Copy Back Close Modify copy Back Close

Check direction of
original.
1-sided Left
Copy binding Off When select [On], job can be saved.
WhenYouthecan
mode is set
recall and[On], it can
re-print at anytime.
2-sided Right
On save a jobcan
You data and
set reprint it anytime.
a password to secure saved
Copy binding
And you can set that other user are not
document.
Top Left top able to reprint.
binding Back Edge corner
4 Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be
● Making the settings for the first original (“A” in the illustration on
page 5-57.)
displayed. The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the
Inch specifications “Select paper” screen.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. 6 Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Off Auto Off

Insert page
Inch specifications
Border Select Modify
Erase orig.size Copy Set
None None
2 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
Print from
Rear page
Ready to Job build.
Margin/
Page #
Centering Job Build - Step1 End
Basic Quality Edit
11x81/2” 1-sided 2 sided copy Insert
paper type 2 sided
2 sided copy-Left Print from
Metric specifications Offset AMS Back Edge Finished page #:0 Rear page
Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Set
Ready to Job build. Basic Quality Edit
Off Auto None Insert Metric specifications

Erase Select Modify blank page
Mode size orig. copy Set
None None
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Print from
rear page
Ready to Job build.
Margin/ Page
Imag.shift numbering Job Build-Step 1 End
Basic Quality Edit
1-sided 2-sided Copy Insert
paper type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left
Group AMS Back Edge Print from
Finished page #: 0 rear page
Reduce/ Orig. set
Basic Quality Edit
5-58
● Step 3: Making the settings for the second originals (“B” in the
7 Touch the “Bypass” key.
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the illustration on page 5-57.)
screen in step 6. Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the
“Select paper” screen.
Inch specifications
Ready to Job build.

Set
10 Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Select paper Back Close
Inch specifications
11x8 /2”
1
Plain Scan next original(s). Set

11x81/2” Place the originals and press start key.
Plain Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
11x81/2” Bypass
Color Plain Job Build - Step3 Cancel
81/2x14”
Plain 11x81/2” 1 sided 2 sided copy Insert
paper type 2 sided
2 sided copy-Left
Offset AMS Back Edge Print from
Metric specifications Reduce Orig. set
Finished page #:2
Next copy page: Front
Rear page
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning
Set
Ready to Job build. Basic Quality Edit finished
Plain Scan next original(s). Set
Place the originals and press start key.
Plain Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Bypass
Colour Plain Job Build - Step3 Cancel
Plain 1-sided 2-sided Copy Insert

paper type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 2
rear page
Reduce/ Orig. set Next copy page: Front
Set the first original (“A”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.
8
Scanning
Basic Quality Edit finished
● Step 2: Leaving the back side of the first original (“A”) blank
11 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.
9 Touch the “Print from Front page” key.

Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next
screen in step 10.
Inch specifications
copy to start on the front side of the next page.
Scan next original(s). Set
Inch specifications Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Scan next original(s). Select paper Back Close

Set
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
11x81/2”
Job Build - Step2 Cancel Plain
11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2” Bypass
Color Plain
paper type 2 sided
2 sided copy-Left 81/2x14”
Offset AMS Back Edge Print from Plain
Finished page #:1 Front page
Reduce Orig. set Next copy page: Rear
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning
Metric specifications Scan next original(s). Set
Scan next original(s). Set Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Job Build- Step2 Cancel
Plain
Select Original 1-sided/ blank page Plain
paper type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left Bypass
Group AMS Back Edge Print from Colour Plain
Finished page #: 1
front page
Reduce/ Orig. set Next copy page: Rear
Finished Enlarge Plain
direction
Scanning
12 Set the second originals (“B”) to be copied. Press the [Start]

key.
5-59
● Step 4: Making the settings for the third original (“C” in the ● Step 5: Leaving the back side of the third original (“C”) blank
illustration on page 5-57.)
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the
“Select paper” screen.
16 Touch the “Print from Front page” key.
Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next
copy to start on the front side of the next page.
be displayed.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Job Build - Step5 Cancel

Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. 11x81/2” 1 sided 2 sided copy Insert
Job Build - Step4 Cancel paper type 2 sided
2 sided copy-Left
Offset AMS Back Edge Print from
1 sided 2 sided copy Finished page #:5 Front page
11x81/2” Insert
Reduce Orig. set Next copy page: Rear
Select Original 1 sided/ page Finished
/Enlarge direction
paper type 2 sided Scanning
2 sided copy-Left finished
Offset AMS Back Edge Print from Basic Quality Edit
Finished page #:4 Rear page
Reduce Orig. set Next copy page: Front
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning
finished
Basic Quality Edit
Metric specifications Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.

Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. 1-sided 2-sided Copy Insert
Job Build- Step4 Cancel paper type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left
1-sided 2-sided Copy Finished page #: 5
Insert front page
Reduce/ Orig. set Next copy page: Rear
1-sided/ blank page Finished
Select paper Original type Enlarge direction
2-sided Scanning
2-sided Copy-Left finished
Group AMS Back Edge Print from Basic Quality Edit
Finished page #: 4 rear page
Scanning
● Step 6: Making the settings for the fourth originals (“D” in the
illustration on page 5-57.)
14 Touch the “Bypass” key.
Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under
the “Select paper” screen.
screen in step 13.
Inch specifications 17 Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will
be displayed.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Inch specifications
11x8 /2”
1
Plain Job Build - Step6 Cancel

11x81/2”
Plain
11x81/2” Bypass
Color Plain
paper type 2 sided
81/2x14” 2 sided copy-Left
Plain Offset AMS Back Edge Print from
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning
finished
Metric specifications Basic Quality Edit

Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Metric specifications
Plain Job Build - Step6 Cancel
Plain
Bypass
Colour Plain
paper type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left
Plain Group AMS Back Edge Print from
Finished page #: 6
rear page
Scanning
15 Set the third original (“C”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the original will start.
5-60
18 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.

Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the 21 Touch the “Bypass” key.
screen in step 17. screen in step 20.

Scan next original(s). Set Scan next original(s). Set
Place the originals and press start key. Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper Back Close Select paper Back Close
11x8 /2”
1
11x8 /2”
1
Plain Plain
11x81/2” 11x81/2”
Plain Plain
11x81/2” Bypass 11x81/2” Bypass
Color Plain Color Plain
81/2x14” 81/2x14”
Plain Plain

Scan next original(s). Set Scan next original(s). Set
Place the originals and press start key. Place the originals and press start key.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Select paper Back Close Select paper Back Close
Plain Plain
Plain Plain
Bypass Bypass
Colour Plain Colour Plain
Plain Plain
Set the fourth originals (“D”) to be copied. Press the [Start] 22 Touch the “Insert page” [“Insert blank page”] key.
19 key.
Inch specifications
Scan next original(s).
Scanning of the originals will start. Place the originals and press start key.
Set
● Step 7: Making the settings for a blank rear cover 11x81/2” 1 sided 2 sided copy Insert
paper type 2 sided
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the Offset AMS Back Edge
2 sided copy-Left
Print from
“Select paper” screen. Finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning
be displayed.
Inch specifications Scan next original(s). Set
Scan next original(s). Set Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step7 Cancel
Job Build - Step7 Cancel 1-sided 2-sided Copy Insert

Original 1-sided/ blank page
11x81/2” 1 sided 2 sided copy Insert Select paper
type 2-sided
Select Original page 2-sided Copy-Left
1 sided/ Back Edge Print from
Group AMS Finished page #: 8
paper type 2 sided rear page
2 sided copy-Left Reduce/ Orig. set Next copy page: Front
Offset AMS Back Edge Print from Finished
Finished page #:8 Rear page Enlarge direction
Reduce Orig. set Next copy page: Front Scanning
Finished Basic Quality Edit finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning
Metric specifications 23 The job build set-up procedure is complete. Touch the
“Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.
Inch specifications
Job Build - Step7 Cancel Scan next original(s). Set
1-sided 2-sided Copy Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.
Insert
Original 1-sided/ blank page
Select paper Job Build - Step8 Cancel
type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 8 11x81/2” 1 sided 2 sided copy Insert
rear page
Reduce/ Orig. set Next copy page: Front Select Original 1 sided/ page
Finished Enlarge direction paper type 2 sided
Scanning 2 sided copy-Left
Basic Quality Edit finished Offset AMS Back Edge Print from
Finished page #:10
Rear page
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Scanning

paper type 2-sided
2-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 10
rear page
Scanning
5-61
2 Specifying the type of originals
24 If there are no problems with the copy set you made, then
you can use the repeat copy mode to make any additional This procedure specifies the type of originals being copied between
number of copy sets as desired (see “(2) Printing out with the 1-sided, 2-sided and open-faced.
repeat copy mode” on page 5-43).
1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Original type” key. The “Original type” screen will be
displayed.
(2) Selecting the settings and functions Inch specifications
1 Selecting the paper Ready to Job build. Set

This procedure selects the size of the copy paper.
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the

1 11x81/2” 1 sided 1 sided copy Insert
“Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will be paper type 2 sided
1 sided copy-Left
Offset AMS Back Edge Finished page #:0
displayed. Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Inch specifications Basic Quality Edit
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. Metric specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
11x81/2” 1 sided 1 sided copy Insert Set original. Press Start key.
paper type 2 sided Job Build-Step 1 End
1 sided copy-Left
Reduce Orig. set
Finished Select Original 1-sided/ blank page
/Enlarge direction
paper type 2-sided
Basic Quality Edit 1-sided Copy-Left
Reduce/ Orig. set
Metric specifications Basic Quality Edit
Set
Ready to Job build.
2
Select between “1 sided”, “2 sided” and “Book”, in
Job Build-Step 1 End
accordance with the originals being copied.
Select blank page
paper
Original
type
1-sided/
2-sided
Inch specifications
1-sided Copy-Left
Set
Finished
Reduce/
Enlarge
Orig. set Ready to Job build.
direction Place originals then press Start key.
Basic Quality Edit
Original type Back Close
Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
1 sided
2 Touch the key that corresponds to the drawer[cassette] which

contains the desired size of copy paper, and then touch the
2 sided
Book Rear
Left top
corner
“Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step
1.
Inch specifications Set
Ready to Job build.
Set Set original. Press Start key.
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. Original type Back Close
Select paper Back Close Check direction

Check direction of original.
11x81/2”
Plain 1 sided
11x81/2”
Plain 2-sided
11x81/2” Bypass Left top
Color Plain Book Back Edge corner
81/2x14”
Plain
Metric specifications NOTES

Set
Ready to Job build. • If you selected “1 sided”, verify the direction in which the originals

were set.
• If you selected “2 sided”, specify the binding direction of the originals
Plain and then verify the direction in which the originals were set.
Plain • If you selected “Book”, specify the binding direction of the originals.
Bypass
Colour Plain
Plain
3 screen in step 1.
5-62
3 Selecting between 1-sided or 2-sided copies
This procedure selects the type of finished copies to be made 3 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
between 1-sided and 2-sided.
1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the “1

sided/2 sided” key. The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be
4 Selecting how to finished up the copy sets
If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, this
displayed. procedure lets you select whether to staple or hole punch the finished
Inch specifications copy sets.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. 1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
“Finished” key. The “Finished” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications
paper type 2 sided Set
Offset AMS Back Edge
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page #:0
Ready to Job build.
Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction Job Build - Step1 End
Basic Quality Edit
paper type 2 sided
1 sided copy-Left
Metric specifications Offset AMS Back Edge Finished page #:0
Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Set
Ready to Job build. Basic Quality Edit
1-sided 1-sided Copy Insert Metric specifications

paper type 2-sided Set
Group AMS Back Edge
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Ready to Job build.
Reduce/ Orig. set
Finished Enlarge direction Job Build-Step 1 End
Basic Quality Edit
paper type 2-sided
1-sided Copy-Left
Reduce/ Orig. set
Finished
NOTE Enlarge direction
Basic Quality Edit
The setting in regard to making either 1-sided or 2-sided copies can

only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all
steps in the copy job.
NOTE
The setting in regard to how the copy sets will be finished can only be
made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps
in the copy job.
2 Touch the “1 sided” key or the “2 sided” key, as appropriate,
and then select the binding direction you want for the
finished copies.
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
1 sided/ 2 sided copy Back Close

Check direction of
original top side.
1 sided Open from

copy left
2 sided Open from
copy right
Open from Left top
top Rear corner
Set
Ready to Job build.
1-sided / 2-sided Copy Back Close

Check direction of
original.
1-sided Left
Copy binding
2-sided Right
Copy binding
Top Left top
binding Back Edge corner
IMPORTANT!
5-63
2 Select how you want the copy sets to be finished by touching

the “Staple mode” key, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple” ] 2 Select the desired magnification ratio.
If you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected
key or the “Punch mode” key, as appropriate. automatically, touch the “AMS” key.
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel If you want to manually set the magnification ratio, touch the
and verify the direction in which the originals were set. “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then enter the desired ratio with
the keypad, or touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the
Inch specifications
displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting in 1%
Set
Ready to Job build. increments.
You can also select the magnification ratio by touching the
Finished Back Close
Offset Staple Punch Check direction
preset zoom ratio keys at the right that corresponds to the
Check direction of
No cover No cover original top side. desired ratio.
Staple Punch
Off mode mode Inch specifications
On None
Saddle Set
Stitch
Rear
Left top
corner
Ready to Job build.
Reduce/Enlarge Back Close

Metric specifications (25 400)
100 % 154 % 77 %
AMS 51/2x81/2"R81/2x14" 11x17" R81/2x14"
Set
Ready to Job build. Standard 100 % 129 % 64 %
Set original. Press Start key. Zoom 81/2x11" R11x17" 11x17" R81/2x11"
400 % 121 % 50 %
Finished Back Close XY Zoom
81/2x14" R81/2x17" 11x17" R51/2x81/2"
Group Staple Punch Check direction 200 % 78 % 25 %
Group
# keys 51/2x81/2"R11x17" 81/2x14" R81/2x11"
Check direction of original.
Off Staple Punch

None Mode Mode Metric specifications
1 set 1 set None
Center Set
Staple
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Ready to Job build.

(25~400)
100 % 141% A 4➔A3 75%

IMPORTANT! AMS
A 5➔A4 11x15"➔A 4
Standard 100% 127% 70% A3➔A4
Zoom Folio➔A3 A4➔A5
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not XY Zoom
400% 106% 50%
11x15"➔A3
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. 200% 90% 25%
#-Keys A 5➔A 3 Folio➔A4

Set
Ready to Job build.
screen in step 1.

(25~400)
100 % 141% A 4➔A 3 81% B 4➔A 4

AMS B 5➔A 5
B 5➔B 4
5 Making copies at an enlarged or reduced magnification ratio Standard

Zoom
100% 122% A 4➔B 4
A 5➔B 5
70% A 3➔A 4
B 4➔B 5
50%
This procedure selects the magnification ratio of the finished copies. XY Zoom 400% 115% B 4➔A 3
B 5➔A 4
200% 86% A 3➔B 4 25%
#-Keys A 5➔A 3 A 4➔B 5
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the
1 “Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
screen in step 1.
Set
Ready to Job build.

paper type 2 sided
1 sided copy-Left
Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Basic Quality Edit
Set
Ready to Job build.

paper type 2-sided
1-sided Copy-Left
Reduce/ Orig. set
Basic Quality Edit
5-64
6 Specifying the direction that the originals were set 7 Setting the scanning density
This procedure specifies the direction of the set originals. This procedure sets the copy exposure for the finished copies.
1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the

“Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction” screen will be 1 Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch
the “Exposure mode” key. The “Exposure mode” screen will
displayed. be displayed.

Set Set
Job Build - Step1 End Job Build - Step1 End
11x81/2” 1 sided 1 sided copy Insert Density 4 Text+Photo Off Insert

Select Original 1 sided/ page Exposure Orig. image page
paper mode quality Eco Print
type 2 sided
1 sided copy-Left 1 sided copy-Left
Offset AMS Back Edge Finished page #:0 Finished page # : 0
Reduce Orig. set
Finished
/Enlarge direction
Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit

Set Set
Job Build-Step 1 End Job Build - Step1 End
1-sided 1-sided Copy Insert Manual 4 Text + Photo Off Insert

Select Original 1-sided/ blank page Exposure Image blank page
Eco Print
paper type 2-sided mode quality
1-sided Copy-Left 1-sided Copy-Left
Group AMS Back Edge Finished page #: 0 Finished page #: 0
Reduce/ Orig. set
2 Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner”
key, as appropriate, according to the direction of the 2 If you want to have the copy exposure selected
automatically, touch the “Auto” key.
originals. If you want to manually set the exposure, touch the “Manual”
key and then touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key to
Inch specifications
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the
Set
Ready to Job build. exposure as desired.
Org. set direction Back Close Inch specifications

Check direction
Check direction of Set
original top side. Ready to Job build.
" C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n
a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay. Exposure mode Back Close
Left top
Rear corner
Auto
Metric specifications Manual Lighter Darker
Set
Ready to Job build.
Orig. set direction Back Close Metric specifications

Check direction
Set
Check direction of
original.
Ready to Job build.
" C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n Exposure mode Back Close

a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay.
Left top
Back Edge corner
Auto
IMPORTANT!
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. 3 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1.
3 screen in step 1.
5-65
8 Setting the image quality 9 Turning the eco print mode ON
This procedure sets the image quality according to the type of This procedure allows you to turn the eco print mode ON in order to
originals being copied. save on toner use.
1 Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch

the “Orig. image quality” key. The “Orig. image quality” 1 Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch
the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications Set
Ready to Job build.
Set Place originals then press Start key.
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step1 End
Job Build - Step1 End Density 4 Text+Photo Off Insert

Exposure Orig. image page
Density 4 Text+Photo Off mode quality Eco Print
Insert
page 1 sided copy-Left
Exposure Orig. image
mode quality Eco Print Finished page # : 0
1 sided copy-Left
Finished page # : 0
Basic Quality Edit
Basic Quality Edit
Metric specifications Set
Ready to Job build.
Set Set original. Press Start key.
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key. Job Build - Step1 End
Job Build - Step1 End Manual 4 Text + Photo Off Insert

Exposure Image blank page
Eco Print
Manual 4 Text + Photo Off Insert mode quality
1-sided Copy-Left
Exposure Image blank page
Eco Print Finished page #: 0
mode quality
1-sided Copy-Left
Finished page #: 0
Basic Quality Edit
Basic Quality Edit
NOTE
2 Select the image quality mode by touching the “Manual” key

and then touching the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or
The setting in regard to whether or not to use the eco print mode can
only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all
the “Text” key, as appropriate.
steps in the copy job.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Touch the “On” key to turn the eco print mode ON.
Orig.image quality Back Close
2
Inch specifications
Text+Photo Text+Photo : Set this mode to copy orig. Set
w i t h m i xe d t ex t a n d p h o t o Ready to Job build.
Photo Photo : Add a dimensional effect of photo Place originals then press Start key.
Text : Copy a pencil or fine line.
Eco Print Back Close
Text
Eco Print
I t i s p o s s i bl e t o r e d u c e
toner consumption.
Metric specifications Image is a little light.
Eco Print i s s av i n g t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n ,
a n d i t i s e c o n o m i c a l l y.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key. Off On
Image quality orig. Back Close
Text+Photo Text+Photo: Set this mode to copy Set
original mixed (text & photo). Ready to Job build.
Photo Photo: Add a dimensional effect of photo. Set original. Press Start key.
Text : Copy pencil & fine line clearly.
Text
Eco Print
To n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
can be reduced.
Image resolution reduced.
E c o P r i n t e n a bl e s t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n
reduction.
screen in step 1. Off On
3 screen in step 1.
5-66
0 Selecting the sheet erase mode ! Manually selecting the size of the originals
This procedure selects the sheet erase mode in order to erase the This procedure allow you to select the size of the originals manually
shadows, lines, etc., that can occur around the edges of copies. using the touch panel.
“Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border Erase”
[“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed. 1 Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The “Select original
size” [“Select size original”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Set
Inch specifications
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. Set
Ready to Job build.
Job Build - Step1 End Place originals then press Start key.
Off Auto Off Job Build - Step1 End

Insert page
Erase orig.size Copy Off Auto Off
2 sided copy-Left Insert page
None None Border Select Modify
Finished page # : 0 Erase orig.size Copy
Margin/ 2 sided copy-Left
Page #
Centering None None Finished page # : 0
Margin/
Basic Quality Edit Page #
Centering
Basic Quality Edit
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key. Set
Ready to Job build.
Job Build - Step1 End Set original. Press Start key.
Off Auto None Insert Job Build - Step1 End

Mode size orig. copy Off Auto None Insert
2-sided Copy-Left
None None Finished page #: 0
Mode size orig. copy
Margin/ Page 2-sided Copy-Left
Imag.shift numbering None None Finished page #: 0
Margin/ Page
Basic Quality Edit Imag.shift numbering
Basic Quality Edit
2 Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or “Individual

BordrErase” [“Individual Erase Mode”] key and then set the
desired border width. 2 If you want the size of the originals to be detected
automatically, touch the “Auto” key. If you want to select a
standard original size, touch the key that corresponds to the
Inch specifications
desired size.
Set
Ready to Job build. If you want to select another standard original size, touch the
“Other stand. Size” [“Others stand. Size”] key and select the
Border Erase Back Close
desired size.
If you want to select the dimensions of the originals manually,
None Erase the border shadow of original. touch the “Input size” key and then set the corresponding
Sheet
Erase
Individual
BordrErase
dimensions.
Inch specifications
Set
Metric specifications Ready to Job build.
Set Select original size Back Close

Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key. User regist.
Auto 81/2 x 14" 11 x 15" 10 x 10"

Erase Mode Back Close
Select 11 x 17" 51/2 x 81/2" A4 9 x 9"
size
Input size 81/2 x 11" 81/2 x 51/2" A4 8 x 8"
Erase edge of original copy. Other

None 11 x 81/2" 12 x 12"
stand. Size
Border Individual
erase Erase Mode
Set
Ready to Job build.
3 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the Set original. Press Start key.
Select size original Back Close

screen in step 1.
Use regist.
Auto 215x400mm
Select
215x400mm
size
Input size 215x400mm
Others
stand. Size Folio 215x400mm
screen in step 1.
5-67
@ Selecting the repeat copy mode # Selecting the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode
This procedure allow you to select the repeat copy mode so that you This procedure selects the margin mode or the centering/image shift
can make any necessary number of additional copies later. mode in order to create a margin space or center the copy image.
“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be 1 Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the
“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] key. The “Margin/
displayed. Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] screen will be displayed.

Set Set
Off Auto Off Off Auto Off

Insert page Insert page
Border Select Modify Border Select Modify
Erase orig.size Copy Erase orig.size Copy
2 sided copy-Left 2 sided copy-Left
None None Finished page # : 0 None None Finished page # : 0
Margin/ Margin/
Page # Page #
Centering Centering

Set Set
Off Auto None Insert Off Auto None Insert

Erase Select Modify blank page Erase Select Modify blank page
Mode size orig. copy Mode size orig. copy
2-sided Copy-Left 2-sided Copy-Left
None None Finished page #: 0 None None Finished page #: 0
Margin/ Page Margin/ Page
Imag.shift numbering Imag.shift numbering
NOTES NOTE
• To make additional copies with the repeat copy mode, refer to The setting in regard to the margin mode or the centering/image shift
“(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode” on page 5-43. mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will
• The setting in regard to whether or not to use the repeat copy mode apply to all steps in the copy job.
can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will
apply to all steps in the copy job.
2 Touch the “Margin” key or the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key,

as appropriate.
2 Touch the “On” key to select the repeat copy mode. For more detailed information on these two settings, refer to
the explanation for the margin mode on page 5-6 or the
Inch specifications
centering/image shift mode on page 5-8, as appropriate.
Set
Ready to Job build.
Place originals then press Start key. Inch specifications
Modify Copy Back Close
Set
Ready to Job build.
Margin/Centering Back Close

W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .
Off
Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e
On

top/bottom, and also center image
Margin on paper.
Metric specifications Centering
Set
Ready to Job build.
Set original. Press Start key. Metric specifications
Modify copy Back Close
Set
Ready to Job build.
Margin/Image shift Back Close

Off When select [On], job can be saved.
WhenYouthecan
mode is set
recall and[On], it can
re-print at anytime.
On save a jobcan
You data and
set reprint it anytime.
a password to secure saved
And you can set that other user are not
document.
able to reprint.
None
Reposition image to left/right or
Margin top/bottom and center image on paper.
Image
shift
3 screen in step 1.
screen in step 1.
5-68
$ Selecting the print page numbers mode
This procedure selects the print page numbers mode in order to have
page numbers printed on the corresponding copies.
“Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #” [“Page
numbering”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Off Auto Off

Insert page
Erase orig.size Copy
2 sided copy-Left
None None Finished page # : 0
Margin/
Page #
Centering
Basic Quality Edit
Set
Ready to Job build.
Off Auto None Insert

Mode size orig. copy
2-sided Copy-Left
None None Finished page #: 0
Margin/ Page
Imag.shift numbering
Basic Quality Edit
NOTE
The setting in regard to the print page numbers mode can only be
made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps
in the copy job.
2 For more detailed information on this setting, refer to the

explanation for the print page numbers mode on page 5-16.
Inch specifications
Set
Ready to Job build.
Page # Back Close
None P.1
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.
-1- 1/n
Set
Ready to Job build.
Page numbering Back Close
None P.1
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.
-1- 1/n
3 screen in step 1.
5-69
5-70
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT
FUNCTIONS
1. Document management functions

NOTE (2) Form registration
The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use
this function. 1 Registering a form
Perform the following procedure when you want to register an images
as a “form” for use in the form overlay mode.
Set the document that you want to register as a form.

(1) What are the “document management” functions?
1
“Document management” functions refer to those functions that
enable you to scan and save documents onto the copier’s hard disk,
and then use that data for copying purposes.
2 Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Management” screen will be displayed.
Each function has it’s own separate “box” (the area where document
data is saved) on the hard disk and all data for that particular function
is saved into that specific box.
The following “document management” functions are available with

this copier:
● Form registration (pages 6-1 through 6-4)

You can store in a box on the copier’s hard disk, and you can then
manage the use of, those images that will be used as the “form” in the
form overlay mode.
● Shared data box (pages 6-4 through 6-8)

If you register data that will be shared by all users in the shared data
box, it will be possible for each user to print out that data at their own 3 Touch the “Form reg.” [“Form registr.”] key. The “Form
registration” screen will be displayed.
convenience. This is useful, for example, for registering business
forms and the like that are frequently used my many people. The data Inch specifications
that you register here will be stored permanently until the procedure to
delete it is performed. Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20
Document Management End
● Synergy print boxes (pages 6-9 through 6-19) Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box
If you store multiple sets of documents in a synergy print box, you can
Document Document Document Document Form
print out up to 10 of these sets at one time. reg. printing reg. printing reg.
Box Box Box

Editing Editing Editing
Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20
Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box

registr. printing registr. printing registr.
Box Box Box

6-1
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
2 Checking registered forms and changing form names
4 Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the
form data. Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of
If you do not want to register a name for the form data, a registered form, the size of the original document or the date and
go directly to the next step. time it was stored in memory, or when you want to print out the
Inch specifications document in order to check it. You can also use this procedure to
change the registered form name.
Original Register
Ready to register form(s). 11x81/2" 81/2x11"
Place originals then press Start key. 25/10/'01 19:20
Form registration
Form box
Cancel 1 Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Auto
Documents Select
orig. size
Form006
Auto size 100% Back Edge
Select Reduce Orig. set
regi. size /Enlarge direction
Change
name Basic Quality Edit
Original Register
Ready to register form(s). A4 A4
Set original. Press Start key. 25/10/'01 19:20
Form registration Job cancel
Form box
Auto
Documents Select
size orig.
FORM006
Select Reduce/ Orig. set
regi. size Enlarge direction
Change
2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form box”.

The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.
NOTE Inch specifications
Select function.
entering characters. 25/10/'01 19:20

Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”], “Select regi.
5 size”, “Reduce/Enlarge” and/or “Orig. set direction” keys if
reg.
Box
Editing
printing reg.
Box
Editing
printing reg.
Box
Editing
you want to perform the corresponding settings for the
originals being used.
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the
“Orig. image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those
settings, touch the “Quality” key.
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.

6 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the document will start.

Once the document has been completely scanned, the touch
Box
Editing
Box
Editing
Box
Editing
panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you want to register another form, repeat steps 3
through 6.
3 Select the form that you want to check and then touch the
“Conf/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The “Check/
Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be
7 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
contents of the “Basic” tab.
displayed.
Inch specifications
Box editing Close
Form Up Order of
indication
Form 005 11x81/2" 01/04/19
Conf/Crrt.
Form 004 11x81/2" 01/04/19
details
Form 003 81/2x11" 01/04/19
Form 002 11x81/2" 01/04/19
Down Delete
Form 001 11x81/2" 01/04/19
001/005
Document Management - Form box
Box editing Close
Form Up Order of
indication
Form 007 A4 25/10/01
Check/Rev.
Form 006 A4 25/10/01 details
Form 005 A4 25/10/01
Form 004 A4 25/10/01

Down Delete
Form 003 A4 25/10/01
001/007
6-2 Document Management - Form box

NOTE 3 Deleting a registered form

Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registered
It is possible to change the order of display for the registered forms.
form.
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as 1 Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
appropriate.
4 Check the displayed information.

If you want to print out the selected form, touch the “Print
Form” key.
If you want to change the name of the selected form, touch
the “Change form name” key and then enter the new name.
Inch specifications
Check/Correct details Close
Item Details
User name ----------- Change
Document name Form 001 form name
Size
Orig. set direction
Input source
11x17"
Back Edge
Copy Print
2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form Box”.
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.
Resolution 600dpi Form
Registration date 25/10/'01 14:06
Inch specifications
Document Management - Form box - Box editing

Check/revice details Close Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box
Item Details Document Document Document Document Form

User name ----------- Change reg. printing reg. printing reg.
Document name FORM007 form name
Box Box Box
Size A4
Orig. set direction Back Edge
Input source Copy Print
Resolution 600dpi Form
Registration date 25/10/'01 14:06
Document Management - Form box - Box editing

NOTE Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box

entering characters. registr. printing registr. printing registr.
Box Box Box

5 Once you have finished checking the information for that

form, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 3.
3 Select the form that you want to delete and then touch the
“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.
If you want to check the information for another registered Inch specifications
form, repeat steps 3 through 5.
Box editing Close
Form Up Order of
indication
6 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the screen in step 2.
Form 005
Form 004
11x81/2"
11x81/2"
01/04/19
01/04/19
Conf/Crrt.
details
Form 003 81/2x11" 01/04/19
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the Form 002 11x81/2" 01/04/19
Down Delete
contents of the “Basic” tab. Form 001 11x81/2" 01/04/19
001/005
Box editing Close
Form Up Order of
indication
Form 007 A4 25/10/01
Check/Rev.
Form 006 A4 25/10/01 details
Form 005 A4 25/10/01
Form 004 A4 25/10/01

Down Delete
Form 003 A4 25/10/01
001/007
6-3
NOTE (3) Shared data box
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.

To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort 1 Storing documents in the box
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
documents in the shared data box.
appropriate.
* Up to 100 sets of documents can be saved in the shared data box.
1 Set the documents to be stored.

Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
Inch specifications 2 Management” screen will be displayed.
Stop
Form name : Form 001
This form will be deleted. Do you really want to delete it?
Yes No
Stop
Form name : FORM007
This form will be deleted. Are you sure?
Yes No
3 Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under
“Shared Data Box”. The “Document registration” screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications
If you selected “Yes”, the selected form will be deleted and
Select function.
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3. 25/10/'01 19:20

in step 3 without deleting the selected form. Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box

reg. printing reg. printing reg.
5 If you want to delete another registered form, repeat steps 3

and 4.
Box
Editing
Box
Editing
Box
Editing
screen in step 2. Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the Document Management End
contents of the “Basic” tab. Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box

Box Box Box

6-4
2 Printing out stored documents
4 Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the
documents. Perform the following procedure when you want to print out
If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go documents that are stored in a shared data box.
directly to the next step.
Inch specifications 1 Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document

Original Register
Ready to register document(s). 11x81/2" 81/2x11"
Document registration Cancel
Shared Data Box Auto 1 sided

Documents Select Original
orig. size type
Job006
regi. size /Enlarge direction
Change
Original Register
Ready to register document(s). A4 A4
Document registration Job cancel
Shared Data Box Auto 1-sided

size orig. type
Job001
Auto size
Select
regi. size
100%
Reduce/
Enlarge
Back Edge
Orig. set
direction
2 Touch the “Document printing” key under “Shared Data Box”.
The “Document printing” screen will be displayed.
Change
Inch specifications

NOTE

Form
entering characters. Document
reg.
Document
printing
Document
reg.
Document
printing reg.
Box Box Box

5 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the
“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/
Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to
perform the corresponding settings.
“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those
settings, touch the “Quality” key. registr. printing registr. printing registr.
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] Box
Editing
Box
Editing
Box
Editing
key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”]

3 Select the documents to be printed out and then touch the

“Finish selecting” key.
6 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.
Once all of the documents have been completely scanned,
Inch specifications
If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3 Document printing Cancel
through 6. Document data box Up Order of

indication
Job 005 1 25/10/01
Job 004 1 25/10/01 Conf/Crrt.
details
Job 003 1 25/10/01
Job 002
Job 001
1
1
25/10/01
25/10/01
Down
Finish
001/010 selecting
Document Management - Shared Data Box
Document printing Job cancel
Document data box Up Order of

indication
JOB003 1 25/10/01
Check/Rev.
JOB002 1 25/10/01 details
JOB001 1 25/10/01
Down
Finish
001/003 Selecting
6-5
NOTE 3 Checking stored documents and changing their names

Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of
stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and
time they were stored in the shared data box, or when you want to
print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You
can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the
appropriate.
documents.

1 Management” screen will be displayed.
4 Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or

the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding
settings.
If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin”
key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” [“Page numbering”]
key, the “Booklet” key and/or the “Select of Output” key to
make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.

2 Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key

under “Shared Data Box”. The “Document printing” screen or
the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be displayed.
Inch specifications

Box Box Box


Box Box Box

6-6
3 Select the documents that you want to check and then touch
the “Cont/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. 5 Once you have finished checking the information for those
documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return
The “Check/Correct details” [“Check/revice details”] screen to the screen in step 3.
will be displayed. If you want to check the information for other stored
documents, repeat steps 3 through 5.
Inch specifications
Box editing Close
Document data box

Job 005 1 25/10/01
Up Order of
indication
to the screen in step 2.
Cont/Crrt.
Job 004 1 25/10/01
details Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Job 003 1 25/10/01
Job 002 1 25/10/01
Down Delete
Job 001 1 25/10/01
001/010
Box editing Close
Document data box Order of

Up
indication
JOB003 1 25/10/01
JOB002 1 25/10/01 Check/Rev.
details
JOB001 1 25/10/01
Down Delete
001/003
NOTE

appropriate.

If you want to print out the first page of the selected
documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head Print”] key.
If you want to change the name of the selected documents,
touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new
name.
Inch specifications
Item Details
User name -------------------- Change
Document name Job005 doc. name
Registration size 11x15"
page # 1
Input source Copy
Resolution 600dpi Print
Registration date '25/10/01 14:39 from 1st
Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing
Check/revise details Close
Item Details
User name --------------------
Document name Job006 Change
Registration size A4 doc. name
page # 1
Input source Copy
Resolution 600dpi Head
Registration date '25/10/01 14:39 print
Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing
NOTE

6-7
4 Deleting stored documents NOTE
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored
documents.
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document “Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
1 Management” screen will be displayed. appropriate.
Inch specifications
Stop
Document name : JOB 005
This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?
Yes No
2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Shared Data Box”.

The “Box editing” screen will be displayed. Metric specifications
Inch specifications Stop
Document Management End Document name :JOB002
Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box This document will be deleted. Are you sure?
Yes No
Box Box Box

If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted

Metric specifications and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20 in step 3 without deleting the selected documents.
Document
registr.
Document
printing
Document
registr.
Document
printing
Form
registr.
5 If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 3
and 4.
Box Box Box
6 screen in step 2.
Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
3 the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed. contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Box editing Close
Document data box Up Order of

indication
Job 005 1 25/10/01
Job 004 1 25/10/01 Cont/Crrt.
details
Job 003 1 25/10/01
Job 002 1 25/10/01
Down Delete
Job 001 1 25/10/01
001/010
Box editing Close
Document data box Order of

Up
indication
JOB003 1 25/10/01
JOB002 1 25/10/01 Check/Rev.
details
JOB001 1 25/10/01
Down Delete
001/003
6-8
(4) Synergy print boxes 4 Either touch the synergy print box in which you want to
register the documents, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document
1 Storing documents in a box registration” screen will be displayed.
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of Inch specifications
documents in a synergy print box.
Select box No. Box No.
1 Set the documents to be stored.

001 ABCD_0000001
002 EFGH_0000002
006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105
007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106
016 MNOP_0200104
017 QRST_0200105
0
(with #key)
0 7
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106

004 MNOP_0000004 009
005 QRST_0000005
IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102
010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103
019 ABCD_050010
020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
1/5
Document Management - Synergy Print Box

(with # key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104
0 0 7
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_050010
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102
Enter
1/ 5
3 Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under 5 Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the
documents.
“Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print
If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go
box will be displayed.
directly to the next step.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20 Ready to register document(s).
Original
11x81/2"
Register
81/2x11"
007 Auto 1 sided
orig. size type
Document Document Document Document Form Job001
reg. printing reg. printing reg. Auto size 100% Back Eage
Box Box Box regi. size /Enlarge direction
Change
Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20 Ready to register document(s).
Original Register
A4 A4
007 1-sided
Auto
size orig. type
Document Document Document Document Form Job001
registr. printing registr. printing registr. Auto size 100% Back Edge
Select Reduce/ Orig. set
Box Box Box regi. size Enlarge direction
Change
Basic Quality Edit
name
NOTE

6-9
2 Combining and printing out stored documents
6 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the
“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/ Perform the following procedure when you want to combine and print
Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to out documents that are stored in a synergy print box.
perform the corresponding settings.
“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document
settings, touch the “Quality” key. 1 Management” screen will be displayed.
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]
key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”]
7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.

Once all of the documents have been completely scanned,
If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3
through 7.
2 Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print

Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be
displayed.
Inch specifications

Box Box Box


Box Box Box

6-10
3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the

documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the 4 Select the document sets in order of how you want them
printed. Up to 10 sets of documents can be selected.
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Document printing Cancel

007 Select: 2 Up Order of Print once
Select box No. Box No. indication all data
JOB005 1 WED 15:32 2
(with #key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104 Conf/Crrt.
JOB004 1 WED 15:33 1
0 0 7 details
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105 JOB003 1 WED 15:34
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106 JOB002 1 WED 15:35
Select/
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101 Down
JOB001 1 WED 15:37 Cancel
Finish
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102 001/005 selecting
Enter Document Management - Synergy Print Box

1/ 5
Document Printineg Job cancel Order of Print once

007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Select : 2 Up
Select box No. Box No. indication all data
JOB005 1 WED 15:32 2
(with # key)
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104 JOB004 WED 15:33 1 Check/ Rev.
1
0 0 7 details
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105 JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35
Down Select/
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101 JOB001 1 WED 15:37 Cancel
Finish
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102 001/005 selecting
Enter Document Management - Synergy Print Box

1/ 5
NOTES
NOTES
• It is possible to change the order of display for the stored
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry documents. To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then
screen will be displayed. touch the “Sort by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the R New”) or the “Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z
“Enter” key. R A”), as appropriate.
• If you want to print out more than one set of documents, they must
Inch specifications
all be of the same size.
Enter password. Stop
Password ********
Clear
(Enter by #key)
5 Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or
the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding
settings.
Enter
007
If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin”
key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” key, the “Booklet”
Metric specifications key and/or the “Select of Output” key to make those settings,
touch the “Edit” key.
Password ******** (Enter #-key)

Clear
Enter
007 Box Name ABCDEFG
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for

information on registering the password.
6-11
3 Printing out the full contents of a box NOTES
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out all of the
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry
documents that are stored in a synergy print box at one time.
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document “Enter” key.
1 Management” screen will be displayed. Inch specifications
Password ******** (Enter by #key)
Clear
Enter
007
2 Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print

Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be Clear
displayed. Enter

Inch specifications
Select function. • Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for
25/10/'01 19:20

reg.
4 Touch the “Print once all data” key. Print out will start.
reg. printing reg. printing
Box Box Box

Editing Editing Editing Once printing is completed, the touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Metric specifications Inch specifications

Document Management End 007 Select : 0 Order of Print once

Up
indication all data
Job 005 1 WED 15:32
Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Conf/Crrt.
Job 004 1 WED 15:33
details
Job 003 1 WED 15:34
Document Document Document Document Form Job 002 1 WED 15:35
registr. printing registr. printing registr. Select/
Job 001 1 WED 15:37 Down Cancel
Finish
Box Box Box 001/005 selecting

documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the
Order of Print once

keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing” 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
1
Select : 0 Up
indication all data
JOB005 WED 15:32
screen will be displayed. JOB004 1 WED 15:33 Check/ Rev.
details
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
Inch specifications JOB002 1 WED 15:35
Down Select/
JOB001 1 WED 15:37 Cancel
Finish
Document printing Cancel 001/005 selecting
Select box No. Box No. Document Management - Synergy Print Box
(with #key)
0 0 7
Enter
1/ 5
Document Printineg Job cancel

(with # key)
0 0 7
Enter
1/ 5
6-12
4 Checking stored documents and changing their names
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the
stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”
time they were stored in the synergy print box, or when you want to screen or the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be
print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You displayed.
can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the Inch specifications
documents.
Box editing Cancel
(with #key)


Enter
1/ 5
Box editing Job cancel

(with # key)
Enter
1/ 5
2 Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key

under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy NOTES
print box will be displayed.
Inch specifications screen will be displayed.
Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20 “Enter” key.
Inch specifications

Box Box Box

Clear
Enter

007


Box Box Box

Clear
Enter

6-13
4 Select the documents that you want to check and then touch
the “Conf/Correct details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The
NOTE
“Check/Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on
displayed. entering characters.
Inch specifications
Box editing End
007
JOB005 1 WED 15:32
Up Order of
indication
Delete all
data / box 6 Once you have finished checking the information for those
documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return
JOB004 1 WED 15:33 Conf/Crrt Box
details Password to the screen in step 4.
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35
If you want to check the information for other stored
Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37 documents, repeat steps 4 through 6.
001/005
Metric specifications 7 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Box editing End
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Order of
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Up Delete all
indication box data
JOB005 1 WED 15:32
JOB004 WED 15:33 Check/ Rev. Box
1
details Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35

Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
001/005
NOTE

appropriate.

If you want to print out the first page of the selected
documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.
If you want to change the name of the selected documents,
touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new
name.
Inch specifications
Item Details
User name -------------------- Change
Document name Job006 doc. name
Registration size 11x81/2"
page # 1
Input source Copy
Resolution 600dpi Print
Registration date '25/10/01 14:39 from 1st
Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing
Check/revise details Close
Item Details
User name --------------------
Change
Document name Job006
Registration size A4 doc. name
page # 1
Input source Copy
Head
Resolution 600dpi
Registration date '25/10/01 14:39 print
Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing
6-14
5 Deleting stored documents from a box NOTES
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored
documents.
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document “Enter” key.
1 Management” screen will be displayed. Inch specifications
Clear
Enter
007
2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. Clear
Enter
Inch specifications 007 Box Name ABCDEFG


Box Box Box

4 Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch
the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Box editing End
Document Management End 007 Up Order of Delete all

indication data / box
JOB005 1 WED 15:32
Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Conf/Crrt Box
JOB004 1 WED 15:33
details Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
Document Document Document Document Form JOB002 1 WED 15:35

registr. printing registr. printing registr. Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
Box Box Box 001/005
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the
3 documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the
Box editing End
Order of Delete all

keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK
1
Up
indication box data
JOB005 WED 15:32
will be displayed. JOB004 1 WED 15:33 Check/ Rev.
details
Box
Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
Inch specifications JOB002 1 WED 15:35
Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
Box editing Cancel 001/005
Select box No. Box No. Document Management - Synergy Print Box
(with #key)

NOTE
1/ 5
Enter It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.
Document Management - Synergy Print Box To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort
Metric specifications “Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as
Job cancel
appropriate.
Box editing
(with # key)

Enter
1/ 5
6-15
6 Deleting the full contents of a box
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete the full
Inch specifications
contents of a synergy print box in one step.
Stop

Document name : Job 005
This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?
Yes No
Stop
Document name : JOB005
This document will be deleted. Are you sure?
Yes No
If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted 2 Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen Inch specifications
in step 4 without deleting the selected documents.
6 If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 4

and 5.

Box Box Box
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return Metric specifications
to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

Box Box Box

Either touch the synergy print box that contains the

3 documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen
will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Box editing Cancel

(with #key)

Enter
1/ 5

(with # key)

Enter
1/ 5
6-16
NOTES 5 Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry Inch specifications
screen will be displayed. Stop
“Enter” key.
Document Number: 10
Inch specifications
All data in box will be deleted. Do you want to delete?
Yes No

Clear
Stop
Enter
007
Document Number : 5
All data in box will be deleted. Are you sure?
Are you sure?
Yes No
Clear If you selected “Yes”, the entire contents of the selected box
Enter will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in
007 Box Name ABCDEFG step 4.
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for in step 4 without deleting any documents.
screen in step 2.
Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return
4 Touch the “Delete all data / box” [“Delete all box data”] key. A
verification screen will be displayed.
to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Inch specifications
Box editing End
007 Up Order of Delete all

JOB005 1 WED 15:32
details Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35
Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
001/005
Box editing End
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Up Order of Delete all

indication box data
JOB005 1 WED 15:32
1
details Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35

Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
001/005
6-17
7 Registering a password for a box
For security and privacy purposes, you can register a password for
3 Either touch the synergy print box that you want to set the
password for, or enter its number using the keypad. Then
each synergy print box. In this case, it will be necessary to enter the touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen will be
registered password in order to print out, check or delete any displayed.
documents stored in that box. Perform the following procedure when Inch specifications
you want to change the password settings for any box.
Box editing Cancel
(with #key)
Enter
1/ 5

(with # key)
Enter
1/ 5
2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. NOTE
Inch specifications If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen
will be displayed.
Select function. 25/10/'01 19:20 Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the
“Enter” key.
Inch specifications
reg. printing reg. printing reg. Enter password. Stop
Box Box Box


Clear

Enter
007

Document Document Document Document Form Enter password. Stop
Box Box Box

Clear
Enter
6-18
4 Touch the “Box Password” key. A verification screen will be

displayed.
Inch specifications
Box editing End
007 Up Order of Delete all

JOB005 1 WED 15:32
details Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35
Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
001/005
Box editing End
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Up Order of Delete all

indication box data
JOB005 1 WED 15:32
1
details Password
JOB003 1 WED 15:34
JOB002 1 WED 15:35

Down Delete
JOB001 1 WED 15:37
001/005
5 Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and
then touch the “Enter” key. The new password will be
registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in
step 4.
Inch specifications
Box Password Stop
Enter password.
New password (Enter by #key)
Clear
Enter
007
Box Password Stop
Enter password
New password ******** (Enter #-key)
Clear
Enter
NOTES
• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.

• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the
“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field,
touch the “Enter” key.
screen in step 2.
6-19
2. Output management functions

(1) What are the “output management” functions?
The “Output management” functions use the “Print status” screen to manage printing conditions.
Objective Procedure
When you want to know how many jobs are You can verify the documents that are waiting to be printed by checking the “Print status” screen.
scheduled to be printed before yours. The jobs in the list are printed in order from the top down, so you can easily see in which order
your documents will be printed.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
When you want to know whether or not your Check the “Print status” screen. If your job IS in the “Print status” screen, that job has not yet
job (scheduled using the job reservation been printed.
function) was printed. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.
When you are using the printer functions of With the “output management functions”, jobs using the printer functions of this copier to print out
this copier to print out data from a computer, data from a computer or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data are displayed
or using the fax functions of this copier to just like any other copy job. These print jobs can be verified just like copy jobs by checking the
receive fax data, and you want know the “Print status” screen. (A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, a “ ” icon
status of your print job. indicates a print job, and a “ ” icon indicates a fax job.)
When you want to check the contents of a The number of originals, number of copies to be made, the date the job was scheduled, and the
copy job that is waiting to be printed. status of printing can all be verified in the “Print status” screen. In addition, if you need even more
detailed information on any particular job, just select that job and touch the “Conf/Crrt. details”
[“Check/ Correct details”] key to display the e size of the paper the job will be output to and, if it
has been designated, the location of ejection of the finished copies.
When you want to force-print a copy job that Select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Move
is waiting to be printed immediately. ahead” [“Move up”] key to move that job upwards to the top of the list.
* It is only possible to change the printing order for copy jobs. It is not possible to move copy jobs
ahead of print and fax jobs.
OR, select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the
“Interrupt print” key to stop the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the
selected job.
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to force-print a copy job.
When you want to cancel a copy job that is Select the job that you want to cancel in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Cancel/Delete”
waiting to be printed. key. The selected job will be canceled.
6-20
The following operations can be managed.
● When the optional Hard Disk is NOT installed
Check print Change the Interrupt Cancel / Delete Check job

status print order printing contents
(force-print)
Copy job ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Print or Fax job ✕ ✕ ✕
● When the optional Hard Disk IS installed
Check print Change the Interrupt Cancel / Delete Check job

status print order printing contents
(force-print)
Copy job *1
Print or Fax job ✕ ✕ ✕
*1 Print or fax jobs will automatically be moved to a position immediately after the job currently being printed. It is not possible to move copy jobs
ahead of print and fax jobs.
(2) Display of the output management functions
Press the [Job Queue] key. The “Print status” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Print management End
Job Input source Original Set Registration State

123 Copy 100 100 10/10 23:00 Printing
124 Printer ___ ___ ___ Waiting

127 Fax ___ ___ ___ Waiting
128 Copy 1 5 10/10 23:00 Waiting
Move Move interrupt Cancel/ Conf/Crrt.

ahead behind print Delete details
Prt status 10/10 23:50
Print management End
Job Input source Original Set Registration State

123 Copy 100 100 10/10 23:00 Printing
124 Printer ___ ___ ___ Waiting

127 Fax ___ ___ ___ Waiting
128 Copy 1 5 10/10 23:00 Waiting
Move Move interrupt Cancel / Check/ Rev.

up down print Delete details
Prnt status 10/10 23:50
6-21
(3) The “Print status” screen
This screen displays the currently set printing conditions and the job queue of documents waiting to be printed.

1 8 7 1 8 7
Print management End Print management End
Job Input source Original Set Registration State Job Input source Original Set Registration State
123 Copy 100 100 10/10 23:00 Printing 123 Copy 100 100 10/10 23:00 Printing
124 Printer ___ ___ ___ Waiting 124 Printer ___ ___ ___ Waiting
127 Fax ___ ___ ___ Waiting 127 Fax ___ ___ ___ Waiting
128 Copy 1 5 10/10 23:00 Waiting 128 Copy 1 5 10/10 23:00 Waiting
Move Move interrupt Cancel/ Conf/Crrt. Move Move interrupt Cancel / Check/ Rev.
ahead behind print Delete details up down print Delete details
Prt status 10/10 23:50 Prnt status 10/10 23:50
2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6
1 Job queue 6 “Conf/Crrt.details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key

Displays information about each job in the queue. Touching this key displays the “Check/Correct details” [“Check/
The job at the top of the list is that job that is currently being revise details”] screen, enabling you, for example, to check the
printed. The rest of the jobs will be printed in order from the top contents of, or change the number of copies to be made for, the
down. currently selected (highlighted) job. (This is only available when
A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, a “ ” the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
icon indicates a print job, and a “ ” icon indicates a fax job.
Inch specifications
2 “Move ahead” key
Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job Check/Correct details Close
upward in the job queue. A job can be moved as far as the second
Item Details
highest position in the list. In this case, print out for that job will Orig. page 1
begin as soon as the current job is completed. (This is only Set
Print size
1
11x81/2"
Input source Copy
available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) Registration date 11/01 15:31
Change
3 “Move behind” [“Move down”] key Preset
Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job

Job 5
downward in the job queue. (This is only available when the
optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) Metric specifications
4 “Interrupt print” key
Close
Touching this key interrupts the job that is currently being printed Check/revise details
and start print out for the currently selected (highlighted) job. (The
Item Details
selected job will be moved to the top of the list.) Original 1
Set 1
5 “Cancel/Delete” key Print size A4
Input source Copy
Touching this key cancels the currently selected (highlighted) job Registration date 11/01 15:31
Change
Preset
and deletes it from the job queue. (This is only available when the
optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) Job 5
7 “M” and “N” cursor keys

Use these keys to select a job from the job queue.
8 “End” key
Touching this key quits the output management function. In this
case, the touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
6-22
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
1. Copy management mode

By registering a different department ID-code for each individual department that uses the copier, the copy management function will help you
manage the overall number of copies made by each department.
The copy management function in this copier offers the following features.
• Manage use of all optional functions (printer, scanner and fax) utilized by the same department ID-code.
• Manage up to 100 individual departments. (Up to 1000 when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)
• Register department ID-codes of up to 8 digits (between 0 and 99999999).
• Check the total number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole or by each individual department.
• Set copy limits to any 1-page increment up to 999,999.
• Clear the copy counts for all department ID-codes at one time or for each individual department.
• Check copy counts for your own department without the need to enter the management code. Just enter the corresponding department ID-code.
IMPORTANT!
In order to access the “Change restrictions for use” procedure under “Editing copy management information”, it is necessary to select “On” under
“Copier function management ON/OFF”. When the optional Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it is necessary to
select “On” under the corresponding “Printer function management ON/OFF”, “Scanner function management ON/OFF” or “Fax function
management ON/OFF” procedure. (See “(6) Changing the copy management default settings” on page 7-25.)
7-1
(1) Copy management procedures
Procedure Description Reference

page
Editing copy management • Register new department ID-codes 7-4

information Perform this procedure when you want to register a new department ID-code and set the
restrictions for using the copier under that ID-code. Up to 100 department ID-codes can
be registered. (When the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier, up to 1000
department ID-codes can be registered.)
• Delete department ID-codes 7-16

Perform this procedure when you want to delete registered department ID-codes.
• Change registered information 7-17

Perform this procedure when you want to change a department name or the
corresponding ID-code.
• Change restrictions for use 7-20

Perform this procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier
under each department ID-code.
Checking the copy management • Check all departments 7-21

counts Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under
all department ID-codes as a whole, print out a copy management report and clear the
copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes.
• Check individual departments 7-23

Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under
each individual department ID-code and/or clear the copy counts for individual
departments as well.
Turning the copy management Perform this procedure and touch the “On” key when you want to turn the copy 7-25
function ON/OFF management function ON, or touch the “Off” key to turn the copy management function
OFF.
Changing the copy management Perform this procedure when you want to change the default settings for the copy 7-25
default settings management function.
7-2
(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen 3 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the 4-digit
management code.
Perform the following procedure in order to access the copy The factory default management code for 30 cpm copiers is
management menu screen. “3000”, for 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers
is “5000”.
1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the
[Default Setting/Counter] key.
If the entered management code matches the currently
registered one, the copy management menu screen will be
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed. displayed.
Inch specifications
Enter the administrator number Close
2 Touch the “Management” key on the right side of the touch

panel.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter

Default setting End
Copy
default Language Management
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired procedure.
Bypass
setting
BOX
Management
Counter
check
4 The setting screen for that procedure will be displayed.
Machine Document Register Print User
default Management orig. size report Adjustment
Inch specifications
Management Close
Managem. Total Register/Sett. Management

Management Each Mgt. Management Management
Default setting End total Total edit Def. Set. Off
Copy On
Bypass Hard Disk Counter Default setting

setting Management check

default Management orig. size report Adjustment Metric specifications
Management Close

total Total edit Def. Set. Off
On
Default setting
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code. (See

“Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
• Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
7-3
(3) Editing copy management information 3 Touch the “Register” key.

The “New register” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
● Register new department ID-codes
Management edit Close
Perform the following procedure when you want to register
department ID-codes (up to 8-digits per ID-code) and the Department Up
Order of
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
corresponding department name, and set certain restrictions for using 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
0001 3rd Sales Dept. correction in use
the copier under that ID-code. 0014 4th Sales Dept.
00000015 5th Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
1 Access the copy management menu screen.

(See “Accessing the copy management menu screen”.)
Default setting - Management

001/010
Register
Inch specifications
Default setting End
Department Order of
Up
Copy indication
default Language Management 01 1st Sales Dept.
02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
Bypass BOX Counter 0001 3rd Sales Dept. correction in use
setting Management check 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Machine Document Register Print User Delete
default Management orig. size report Adjustment 00000016 6th Sales Dept.
Down
Register
001/010

Default setting End
4 Select “ID-code” under the “Setting item” column on the left
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
Copy
default Language Management The “ID-code” screen will be displayed.
Bypass Hard Disk Counter
setting Management check Inch specifications
New register Cancel
Setting item Value
ID-code (No register)

Name to display (No register)
2 Touch the “Management edit” key.

The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.
Change #
Next
Inch specifications Default setting - Management - Management edit
Management Close
Managem. Total Register/Sett. Management New register Job cancel
Setting item Value

total Total edit Def. Set. Off ID-code (No register)
On
Default setting
Change #
Next
Metric specifications Default setting - Management - Management edit
Management Close

On
Default setting
7-4
5 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the department

ID-code that you want to register (up to 8 digits). 8 Enter the name for that department, and then touch the
“End” key.
You can enter any number between “0” and “99999999”. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
ID-code Back Close Name to display Stop End
1st Sales Dept. Limit:32 letters including #

AllDel. Del. prev
(0~99999999)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
ID-code 0007
Clear a s d f g h j k l ; '
z x c v b n m , . /

Management - Management edit - New register
ID-code Back Close Name to display Stop End
1st Sales Dept. Limit: 32 letters inc. # key

AllDel. Del. prev
(0~99999999)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
ID-code 0007
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
Clear a s d f g h j k l ; '
z x c v b n m , . /

NOTE
6 Touch the “Close” key.
For information on how to enter the department name, refer to
“11. Entering characters” on page 7-104.
7 Select “Name to display” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Name to display” screen will be displayed.
Once you are finished registering that department's ID-code
Inch specifications 9 and name, touch the “Next” key.
New register Cancel
Inch specifications
Setting item Value New register Cancel
ID-code 0007
Setting item Value
ID-code 0007
Change # Name to display 1st Sales Dept.
Next
Default setting - Management - Management edit Change #
Next
Default setting - Management - Management edit

New register Job cancel
Setting item Value
ID-code 0007 New register Job cancel

Setting item Value

Change #
ID-code 0007
Next Name to display 1st Sales Dept.

Change #
Next
NOTES
• Be sure to register both of the setting items above, If you do not, an

error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step.
• If you attempt to register a department ID-code or a department
name that is already registered, an error will occur and you will be
unable to continue to the next step. In this case, select a different ID-
code and/or name, as appropriate.
7-5
10 Set the restrictions for using the copier under that

department ID-code. 12 Touch the “Close” key.
New register Cancel Management edit Close
0007 1st Sales Dept.

Department Order of
Up
Setting item Value indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Copy limitation On 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
Printer limitation No limit 0001 3rd Sales Dept. correction in use
Output limitation No limit 0007 1st Sales Dept.
Scanner limitation No limit 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Delete
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit 00000015 5th Sales Dept.
Change # Down
Registr. Register
001/011
Default setting - Management - Management edit Default setting - Management
New register Job cancel Management edit Close

Department Order of
Up
Setting item Value indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Copy limitation On 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
Printer limitation No limit 0001 3rd Sales Dept. correction in use
Output limitation No limit 0007 1st Sales Dept.
Scanner limitation No limit 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Delete
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit 00000015 5th Sales Dept.
Change # Down
Registr. Register
001/011
Default setting - Management - Management edit Default setting - Management
NOTE NOTE
For information on how to set restrictions, refer to “Setting the If you want to register an ID-code for a new department, touch the
restrictions for use” on page 7-7. “Register” key and repeat steps 4 through 12.
11 Once you are finished setting the restrictions for that

department ID-code, touch the “Registr.” key. 13 Touch the “Close” key.
Inch specifications
New register Cancel

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Printer limitation No limit
Output limitation No limit
Scanner limitation No limit
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit Change #
Registr.
New register Job cancel

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Registr.
7-6
● Setting the restrictions for use
Perform the following procedure when you want to set certain restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code.
The setting items available for restriction will differ depending upon whether you have selected “All” or “Each” as the “Copy/Printer output
management” setting. (See “Copy/Printer output management” on page 7-30.)
The following settings are available.
If “All” is selected as the “Copy/Printer output management” setting (“All” is the factory default setting)
Copier Printer Scanning Fax Reference

transmission page
Copying privileges ON/OFF ● 7-8
Printing privileges ON/OFF ● 7-9
Output limitation m m 7-10
Scanning restrictions 7-11
Fax transmission restrictions 7-12
: The available settings are “No limit”, “Counter limit” and “Is not permitted”
m: The available settings are “No limit” and “Counter limit”
●: The available settings are “Can use” and “Is not permitted”
If “Each” is selected as the “Copy/Printer output management” setting
Copier Printer Scanning Fax Reference

transmission page
Copying restrictions 7-13
Printing restrictions 7-14
Scanning restrictions 7-11
Fax transmission restrictions 7-12
: The available settings are “No limit”, “Counter limit” and “Is not permitted”
7-7
Copying privileges ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copying
3 To allow copying privileges for this ID-code, touch the “Can
use” key. To cancel copying privileges completely, touch the
privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID-code. “Is not permitted” key.
Inch specifications
NOTE Copy limitation Back Close
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Copier
function management ON/OFF” setting.
Can use
Is not
permitted
1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting

items. (See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4
or “Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.) Metric specifications
Inch specifications Copy limitation Back Close
Department Order of
Up
indication Can use
01 1st Sales Dept.
02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit Is not
correction in use permited
0001 3rd Sales Dept.
Delete
Down Management - Management edit - New register
Register
001/010
NOTE
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Delete

Down
001/010
Register
2 Select “Copy limitation” under the “Setting item” column on

key.
The “Copy limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Printer limitation On
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
7-8
Printing privileges ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or
3 To allow printing privileges for this ID-code, touch the “Can
use” key. To cancel printing privileges completely, touch the
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to turn “Is not permitted” key.
printing privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID- Inch specifications
code.
Printer limitation Back Close
NOTE
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer Can use
Is not
function management ON/OFF” setting. permitted
items.
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Inch specifications Can use

Is not
permited
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept. Management - Management edit - New register
Delete
Down
00000017 7th Sales Dept. NOTE
Register
001/010
Default setting - Management If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
Department Order of

Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
02
0001
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
2 Select “Printer limitation” under the “Setting item” column on

key.
The “Printer limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
7-9
Output limitation
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum
2 Select “Output limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
number of copies and printouts that can be made under the key.
corresponding department ID-code. If the optional Printer Kit or The “Output limitation” screen will be displayed.
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, this limit will apply to the Inch specifications
number of copies AND printouts that can be made in total.
Limit in use Close
NOTE Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
This setting will not be available when “Is not permitted” is selected for Output limitation No limit
both the “Copying privileges ON/OFF” and the “Printing privileges ON/ Fax Transm. Limitation No limit Change #
OFF” settings, or when “Is not permitted” is selected as the “Copying

privileges ON/OFF” setting and the optional Printer Kit or Printer/ Default setting - Management - Management edit
Scanner Kit is NOT installed in your copier.

Limit in use Close

items.
Setting item
Copy limitation
Printer limitation
On
On
Value
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or Output limitation

Scanner limitation
No limit
No limit
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.) Fax Transm. Limitation No limit Change #
Department Order of
Up
indication
01
02
0001
0014
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
3rd Sales Dept.
4th Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf.
correction
Limit
in use 3 To set the maximum limit for copying and printing under this
ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed to the
Delete next step.
Down
Register
To allow unlimited copying and printing, touch the “No limit”
001/010
key and then proceed to step 5.
Inch specifications
Output limitation Back Close
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit No limit
Counter
0014 4th Sales Dept. limit
Delete
Down
Register
001/010 Management - Management edit - New register
No limit
Counter
limit
NOTE
7-10
4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum

number of copies and printouts that can be made in total
Scanning restrictions
under this ID-code. The limit can be set to any 1-page number of originals that can be scanned under the corresponding
increment up to 999,999. department ID-code when the optional Printer/Scanner Kit is installed
Inch specifications in your copier.
NOTE
(1~999,999)
Limited value 999,999

This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the
No limit
“Scanner function management ON/OFF” setting.
Counter Clear
limit
Metric specifications 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting
items.
(1~999,999)

Inch specifications
No limit
Counter Clear Management edit Close
limit
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
Register

The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2. Default setting - Management
001/010
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
Register
001/010
2 Select “Scanner limitation” under the “Setting item” column

on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
The “Scanner limitation” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
7-11
Fax transmission restrictions
3 To set the maximum number of originals that can be scanned
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum
to the next step. number of documents that can be transmitted under the
To allow unlimited scanning, touch the “No limit” key, and to corresponding department ID-code when the optional Fax Kit is
cancel scanning privileges completely, touch the “Is not installed in your copier.
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.

Scanner limitation Back Close
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Fax
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted

items.
Metric specifications “Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Scanner limitation Back Close Inch specifications
Department Order of
Up
No limit indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Counter 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
limit 0001 3rd Sales Dept. correction in use
Is not 0014 4th Sales Dept.
permited 00000015 5th Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
Management - Management edit - New register 00000017 7th Sales Dept.
Register
001/010
NOTE Metric specifications

If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the Management edit Close
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Delete
4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum

number of originals that can be scanned under this ID-code.
001/010
Down
Register

The scanning limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to
999,999.
Inch specifications

2 Select “Fax transm. Limitation” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the
“Change #” key.
(1~999,999) The “Fax transm. Limitation” screen will be displayed.
No limit
Inch specifications
Counter Clear
limit
Is not Limit in use Close
permitted
Management - Management edit - New register Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Metric specifications Output limitation No limit

(1~999,999)

No limit
Counter Clear
limit
Is not Close
Limit in use
permited
Setting item Value
Copy limitation On
Touch the “Close” key.
5 The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
7-12
3 To set the maximum number of documents that can be

transmitted under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key
Copying restrictions
and proceed to the next step. number of copies that can be made under the corresponding
To allow unlimited fax transmission, touch the “No limit” key, department ID-code.
and to cancel fax transmission privileges completely, touch
the “Is not permitted” key and proceed to step 5.
NOTES
Inch specifications
• This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the
Fax Transm. Limitation Back Close
“Copier function management ON/OFF” setting.
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
items.
Management - Management edit - New register (See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or
Inch specifications
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
No limit
Counter 0014 4th Sales Dept.
limit
Is not Delete
permited Down
Register
001/010
NOTE
Department Order of
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2. Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum Register
001/010
number of documents that can be transmitted under this ID- Default setting - Management
code. The document limit can be set to any 1-page increment

up to 999,999.
Inch specifications 2 Select “Copy limitation” under the “Setting item” column on
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change
Fax Transm. Limitation Back Close #” key.
The “Copy limitation” screen will be displayed.
(1~999,999)
Limited value 999,999 Inch specifications

No limit
Counter Clear
Limit in use Close
limit
Is not 0007 1st Sales Dept.
permitted
Setting item Value
Management - Management edit - New register Copy limitation No limit
Metric specifications Fax Transm. Limitation No limit
Change #

(1~999,999)
Limited value 999,999 Metric specifications

No limit
Counter Clear
limit Limit in use Close
Is not
permited 0007 1st Sales Dept.
Setting item Value
Copy limitation No limit
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit
Change #

The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2. Default setting - Management - Management edit
7-13
3 To set the maximum number of copies that can be made

under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed
Printing restrictions
Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or
to the next step. Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to set the
To allow unlimited copies, touch the “No limit” key, and to maximum number of printouts that can be made under the
cancel copying privileges completely, touch the “Is not corresponding department ID-code.
Inch specifications
NOTE
Copy limitation Back Close
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted

items.
Metric specifications “Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)
Copy limitation Back Close Inch specifications
Department Order of
Up
No limit indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Counter 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
limit correction in use
Is not 0014 4th Sales Dept.
permited 00000015 5th Sales Dept.
Delete
Management - Management edit - New register Down
Register
001/010
NOTE
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Delete
4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum 00000016 6th Sales Dept.
Down
number of copies that can be made under this ID-code. The 001/010
Register
copy limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to 999,999. Default setting - Management
Inch specifications
(1~999,999)

No limit
Counter Clear
limit
Is not
permitted
(1~999,999)

No limit
Counter Clear
limit
Is not
permited

7-14
2 Select “Printer limitation” under the “Setting item” column on

the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change 4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum
number of printouts that can be made under this ID-code.
#” key. The printing limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to
The “Printer limitation” screen will be displayed. 999,999.
Limit in use Close Printer limitation Back Close

Setting item Value (1~999,999)
Copy limitation No limit
No limit
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit Counter Clear
limit
Change #
Is not
permitted
Default setting - Management - Management edit Management - Management edit - New register

Limit in use Close

Setting item Value (1~999,999)
Copy limitation No limit Limited value 999,999

Printer limitation No limit No limit
Counter Clear
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit
limit
Change # Is not
permited
Default setting - Management - Management edit Management - Management edit - New register
3 To set the maximum number of printouts that can be made

under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed
to the next step.
To allow unlimited printing, touch the “No limit” key, and to
cancel printing privileges completely, touch the “Is not
Inch specifications
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permitted
No limit
Counter
limit
Is not
permited
NOTE
7-15
● Delete department ID-codes
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete registered
3 Select the department ID-code that you want to delete, and
then touch the “Delete” key.
department ID-codes. Inch specifications

(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
Management edit
Department Up
Order of
Close
indication
page 7-3.) 01 1st Sales Dept.
Mgt. Inf. Limit
02 2nd Sales Dept.
Inch specifications 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
Default setting / Counter 00000017 7th Sales Dept.
Register
001/010
Default setting End Default setting - Management
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Management edit Close

Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
Metric specifications 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Delete
Down
Default setting / Counter 00000017 7th Sales Dept.
Register
001/010
Default setting End Default setting - Management
Copy

NOTE
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is
displayed.
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Management Close

On
Default setting
Management Close

On
Default setting
7-16
● Change registered information
4 Verify that this is the ID-code that you want to delete, and
touch the “Yes” key. Perform the following procedure when you want to change a
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3. previously registered department name or the corresponding ID-code.
Inch specifications
Stop
page 7-3.)
ID-code: 0007 Inch specifications

Name to display: 1st Sales Dept.
Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code? Default setting / Counter
Yes No Default setting End
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

Metric specifications setting Management check

Stop
ID-code: 0007 Metric specifications

Name to display: 1st Sales Dept.
Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code?
Yes No Default setting End
Copy

NOTE Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
If you want to delete another ID-code, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Inch specifications
Management Close

On
Default setting
Management Close

On
Default setting
7-17
3 Select the department ID-code for which you want to change

the registered information, and then touch the “Mgt. Inf. 5 Touch the “Clear” key to delete the old ID-code. Use the
numeric keys on the keypad to enter the new ID-code (up to
Correction” key. 8 digits).
The “Department inform. edit” [“Department info. Editing”]
Inch specifications
ID-code Back Close
Inch specifications

(0~99999999)
Order of ID-code 0007

Department Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit Clear
Delete
00000016 6th Sales Dept. Management - Management edit
Down
Register
001/010

ID-code Back Close

Management edit Close (0~99999999)
ID-code 0007
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept. Clear
Delete Management - Management edit
Down
Register
001/010
To change the registered ID-code, proceed to the next step. 6 Touch the “Close” key.
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4. Proceed
To change the registered department name, proceed to step
to step 10.
7.
Inch specifications
Back Close
NOTE ID-code
(0~99999999)
displayed. ID-code 0007
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by
Clear
Management - Management edit
4 Select “ID-code” under the “Setting item” column on the left

ID-code Back Close
The “ID-code” screen will be displayed. (0~99999999)
ID-code 0007
Inch specifications
Clear
Department inform. edit Back Close
Management - Management edit

Setting item Value
ID-code 0007
Name to display 1st Sales Dept.
Change #
Department info. Editing Back Close
Setting item Value
ID-code 0007
Change #
7-18
7 Select “Name to display” under the “Setting item” column on

the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” 9 Touch the “End” key.
key.
The “Name to display” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications 10 Touch the “Close” key.

Department inform. edit Back Close
ID-code
Name to display
Setting item
0007
1st Sales Dept.
Value
Change #

Department info. Editing Back Close
Setting item Value
ID-code 0007
Change #
8 Touch the “AllDel.” key to delete the old department name,

then enter the new name.
Inch specifications
1st Sales Dept. Limit:32 letters including #

AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
z x c v b n m , . /
1st Sales Dept. Limit: 32 letters inc. # key

AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
z x c v b n m , . /
NOTE
For information on how to enter the department name, refer to

“11. Entering characters” on page 7-104.
7-19
● Change restrictions for use
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the
3 Select the department ID-code for which you want to change
the restrictions, and then touch the “Limit in use” key.
restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code. The “Limit in use” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
IMPORTANT! Management edit Close
Order of
In order to access the “Change restrictions for use” procedure under Department Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
“Editing copy management information”, it is necessary to select “On” 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
under “Copier function management ON/OFF”. When the optional 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Delete
Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it 00000016 6th Sales Dept.
Down
is necessary to select “On” under the corresponding “Printer function 001/010
Register
management ON/OFF”, “Scanner function management ON/OFF” or Default setting - Management
“Fax function management ON/OFF” procedure. (See “(6) Changing

the copy management default settings” on page 7-25.) Metric specifications
Department Order of
Up
indication
01 1st Sales Dept.
1 Access the copy management menu screen. 02 2nd Sales Dept. Mgt. Inf. Limit
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on 0014

00000015
4th Sales Dept.
5th Sales Dept.
Delete
page 7-3.) 00000016
00000017
6th Sales Dept.
7th Sales Dept.
Down
Register
001/010
Inch specifications Default setting - Management

Default setting End
NOTE
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

displayed.
default Management orig. size report Adjustment To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by

Default setting
Copy
End
4 Change the restrictions for using the copier under that
department ID-code as desired.
setting Management check Inch specifications
Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
Copy limitation On

Scanner limitation
Fax Transm. Limitation
No limit
No limit Change #
Management Close
Managem. Total Register/Sett. Management Limit in use Close

Setting item Value
total Total edit Def. Set. Copy limitation On
Off
On Output limitation No limit
Default setting Fax Transm. Limitation No limit Change #

Management Close
NOTE
For information on how to change restrictions, refer to “Setting the

Management Each Mgt. Management Management restrictions for use” on page 7-7.
On
Default setting
7-20

(4) Checking the copy management counts
Inch specifications
● Check all departments
Limit in use Close
Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total
number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole,
Setting item Value
Copy limitation On print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all
Output limitation No limit of the registered department ID-codes.

page 7-3.)
Limit in use Close
Setting item Value Default setting End
Copy limitation On
Copy
Printer limitation On default Language Management
Scanner limitation No limit Bypass BOX Counter
Fax Transm. Limitation No limit setting Management check
Change #

Default setting End
Copy
7 Touch the “Close” key. Bypass

setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check

2 Touch the “Management total” key.

The “Management total” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Management Close

On
Default setting
Management Close

On
Default setting
7-21
3 The total number of copies made under all department ID-

codes as a whole will be displayed. If you want to print out a 5 When the confirmation message appears, touch the “Yes”
key.
copy management report, touch the “Print report” key.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Stop
Management Total Close

Number print.
Copy Printer Fax Total
Black & White: 300 100 50 450
The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted

Are you sure?
Scan.Transm. Fax Transm. Counter
Scanner Fax clear
Scan # pages: 100 Trsm. # pages: 100 Yes No
Commun.Time: Print
1Hrs 10Mins
report
Stop

Number print.
Black & White: 300 100 50 450
The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted

Are you sure?
Scan.Transm. Fax transm. Counter
Scanner Fax clear
Scan # pages: 100 Trsm. # pages: 100 Yes No
Commun.Time: Print
1Hrs 10Mins
report
NOTES 6 Touch the “Close” key.

• The type of report printed out will vary according the setting selected
for “Copy/Printer output management” under the copy management
default settings. 7 Touch the “Close” key.
• If any of the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings is selected

under the copy management default settings, the total size report
will also be printed out.
4 To clear all of the copy counts, touch the “Counter clear” key.
Inch specifications

Number print.
Black & White: 300 100 50 450

Scanner Fax clear
Scan # pages: 100 Trsm. # pages: 100
Commun.Time: Print
1Hrs 10Mins
report

Number print.
Black & White: 300 100 50 450

Scanner Fax clear
Commun.Time: Print
1Hrs 10Mins
report
7-22
● Check individual departments
Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total
3 Select the department ID-code for which you want to check
the copy counts, and then touch the “Total” key.
number of copies made under each individual department ID-code Inch specifications
and/or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well.
Each Management Total Close
Access the copy management menu screen.

1 (See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on
Department
! 01
02
1st Sales Dept.
2nd Sales Dept.
Up
Order of
indication
Total
page 7-3.) 0001 3rd Sales Dept.

! 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Inch specifications 00000016 6th Sales Dept.
Down
001/010
Default setting / Counter Default setting - Management
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
Bypass BOX Counter Each Management Total Close

Machine Document Register Print User Department Order of

default Management orig. size report Adjustment Up Total
indication
! 01 1st Sales Dept.
02 2nd Sales Dept.
! 0014 4th Sales Dept.
Metric specifications 00000016 6th Sales Dept.
Down
001/010
Default setting / Counter Default setting - Management
Default setting End
Copy

NOTES
Machine Document Register Print User • The “---ETC” displayed in the list indicates the number of printouts
that were made without entering an ID-code.
· The printouts included under “---ETC” are as follows:
· Report print out
· Printer error report print out
2 Touch the “Each Mgt. Total” key.
The “Each Management Total” screen will be displayed.
· Print out from a computer for which an ID-code is not set (When
the “Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer)” is set to “ON”
Inch specifications under the copy management default settings.)
· Fax reception print out
Management Close
· Fax report print out
• It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes
is displayed. To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then
touch the “Sort by code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”)
total Total edit Def. Set. Off or the “Sort by Name” key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as
On appropriate.
Default setting
Management Close

On
Default setting
7-23
4 The total number of copies made under that department ID-

code will be displayed. 6 When the confirmation message appears, touch the “Yes”
key.
Each Management Total Close Stop

Number print.
Copy Printer Total Number in( )
Black & White: 50 30 80 is limit value
Scan.Transm. Fax Transm. Counter The count value of this ID-code will be deleted
Scanner Fax clear
Are you sure?
Commun.Time: 1Hrs 10Mins
Yes No
Default setting - Management 0007 1st Sales Dept.

Each Management Total Close Stop
Number print.

Scanner Fax clear The count value of this ID-code will be deleted
Are you sure?
Yes No
NOTE
On the “Each Management Total” screen, the number in the brackets

following the number of copies made indicates the maximum number
of copies that can be made.
5 To clear all of the copy counts for that ID-code, touch the
“Counter clear” key. 9 Touch the “Close” key.
Inch specifications

Number print.

Scanner Fax clear

Number print.

Scanner Fax clear
7-24
(5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF (6) Changing the copy management default settings
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default
management ON or OFF. settings for the copy management function.
The following default settings are available.
• Copier function management ON/OFF (Page 7-26.)
• Printer function management ON/OFF (Page 7-27.)
page 7-3.) • Printer error report (Page 7-28.)
Inch specifications • Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer) (Page 7-29.)
• Copy/Printer output management (Page 7-30.)
Default setting / Counter • Scanner function management ON/OFF (Page 7-31.)
Default setting End
• Fax function management ON/OFF (Page 7-32.)
Copy
• Response to exceeded restriction (Page 7-33.)
• Default copy limit (Page 7-34.)
Bypass BOX Counter
setting Management check • Total count for specified paper size (1 to 5) (Page 7-35)
● Accessing the copy management default settings
Default setting / Counter page 7-3.)
Default setting End
Inch specifications
Copy
Bypass Hard Disk Counter Default setting / Counter

Machine Document Register Print User Default setting End

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter


2 To turn copy management ON, touch the “On” key. To turn

copy management OFF, touch the “Off” key.
Management Close
Default setting End
Copy

Management Each Mgt. Management Management setting Management check
On
Default setting
Management Close

On
Default setting
7-25
● Copier function management ON/OFF
2 Touch the “Management Def. Set.” key.
The “Managem. Def. Set.” screen will be displayed. Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
Inch specifications management ON or OFF for the copier functions of this machine.
Management Close
1 Select “Copy management” under the “Setting item” column
“Change #” key.
The “Copy management” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
On
Managem. Def. Set. Close

Default setting
Setting item Value

Metric specifications Copy management On
Print. Managem. On
Printer error report On
Management Close Others Mgt. Reg. (print) On
Copy/Printer output mgt. All
Scanner Managem. On Change #
Fax Management On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.

On

Default setting
Setting item Value
Copy management On
Print. managem. On
3 Select the default setting that you want to change and then
touch the “Change #” key.
Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
Scanner Managem.
Fax Management
On
All
On
On
Change #
Inch specifications Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Setting item Value
Copy management
Print. Managem.
Printer error report
On
On
On
2 To turn copy management ON for the copier functions of this
machine, touch the “On” key.
Others Mgt. Reg. (print) On
Scanner Managem. On Change # Inch specifications
Fax Management On
Copy management Back Close

Copy management can be set up.
Off
On
Setting item Value
Copy management On Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.

Print. managem. On
Others mgt. Reg. (print) On
Scanner Managem. On Change # Metric specifications
Fax Management On
Copy management Back Close

Copy management can be set up.
NOTE Off
On
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
setting.
NOTE

7-26
● Printer function management ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy
2 To turn copy management ON for the printer functions of this
management ON or OFF for the printer functions of this machine. Inch specifications
Print. Managem. Back Close
NOTE Printer management can be set up.
This setting is only available when the optional Printer Kit or Printer/
Scanner Kit is installed in your copier. Off
On
1 Select “Print. Managem.” under the “Setting item” column on

the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” Metric specifications
key.
Print. managem. Back Close
The “Print. Managem.” screen will be displayed. Printer management can be set up.
Inch specifications
Off
On
Setting item Value
Copy management On
Print. Managem. On Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Fax Management On
NOTE
Metric specifications “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Setting item Value

Copy management On
Print. managem. On
Others mgt. Reg. (print) On The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Fax Management On
7-27
● Printer error report
Perform the following procedure if you want an error report printed
2 To have a printer error report printed out, touch the “On” key.
If you do not want the printer error report printed out, touch
anytime “On” is selected as the “Printer function management ON/ the “Off” key.
OFF” setting and printing is attempted with an invalid department ID- Inch specifications
code.
Printer error report Back Close
Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch.
NOTE
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer Off
function management ON/OFF” setting. On
1 Select “Printer error report” under the “Setting item” column
Printer error report Back Close
“Change #” key. Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch.
The “Printer error report” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications Off
Close On
Managem. Def. Set.
Setting item Value Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.

Copy management On
Print. Managem. On
Fax Management On NOTE
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
Setting item
Copy management
Print. managem.
On
On
Value
Fax Management On
NOTE
If anyone attempts to print using an invalid department ID-code, an
error will occur under the printing functions and printout will not be
possible. When the [Printer] key is touched, “Department ID-code
mismatch.” will be displayed. Touch the “GO” key to print out an error
report.
Inch specifications
Department code mismatch.
Off line
Cancel GO
Department code mismatch.
Off line
Cancel GO
7-28
● Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer)
Perform the following procedure when “On” is selected as the “Printer
2 To allow the use of printer drivers other than those available
under copy management, touch the “On” key.
function management ON/OFF” setting and you want to want to allow Inch specifications
the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy
Back Close
management. Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code
NOTE
Off
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer On

1 Select “Others Mgt. Reg. (print)” under the “Setting item”

Others mgt. Reg. (print)
Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code

Back Close
“Change #” key.
The “Others Mgt. Reg. (print)” screen will be displayed.
Off
Inch specifications On
Setting item Value
Copy management On
Print. Managem. On
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)
Copy/Printer output mgt.
On
All
NOTE
Fax Management On
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set. “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Setting item Value

Copy management On
Print. managem. On
Fax Management On
7-29
● Copy/Printer output management
Perform the following procedure to determine whether management of
2 To have copier and printer functions both handled together,
touch the “All” key. To have copier and printer functions each
copier and printer functions will be handled together or separately. handled separately, touch the “Each” key.
Inch specifications
NOTE Copy/Printer output mgt. Back Close
Copy/Printer output management method setting.

If this setting is changed, it will affect which setting items are available
for restriction under the copy management function. (See “Setting the
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.) All
Each
1 Select “Copy/Printer output mgt.” under the “Setting item”

column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Metric specifications
“Change #” key.
Copy/Printer output mgt. Back Close
The “Copy/Printer output mgt.” screen will be displayed. Copy/Printer output management method setting.
Inch specifications
All
Each
Setting item Value
Copy management On
Fax Management On
NOTE
Setting item Value

Copy management On
Print. managem. On
Fax Management On
7-30
● Scanner function management ON/OFF
2 To turn copy management ON for the scanner functions of
this machine, touch the “On” key.
management ON or OFF for the scanner functions of this machine. Inch specifications
Scanner Managem. Back Close
NOTE Scanner management can be set up.
This setting is only available when the optional Printer/Scanner Kit is

installed in your copier. Off
On
1 Select “Scanner Managem.” under the “Setting item” column

on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Metric specifications
“Change #” key.
Scanner Managem. Back Close
The “Scanner Managem.” screen will be displayed. Scanner management can be set up.
Inch specifications
Off
On
Setting item Value
Copy management On
Fax Management On
NOTE
Setting item Value

Copy management On
Print. managem. On
Fax Management On
7-31
● Fax function management ON/OFF
2 To turn copy management ON for the fax functions of this
management ON or OFF for the fax functions of this machine. Inch specifications
Fax Management Back Close
NOTE Fax management can be set up.
This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in
your copier. Off
On
1 Select “Fax Management” under the “Setting item” column on

the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” Metric specifications
key.
Fax Management Back Close
The “Fax Management” screen will be displayed. Fax management can be set up.
Inch specifications
Off
On
Setting item Value
Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
Excess of limit Setting Unable to use
Def. Val. of coun. limit 999999
Total size 1 81/2x11" No specif.
Total size 2 81/2x11" No specif. Change #
NOTE
Setting item Value

Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On
Excess of limit Setting You cannot use
Def. Val. of coun. limit 999999 The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Total size 1 A3 No specif.
Total size 2 B4 No specif. Change #
7-32
● Response to exceeded restriction
Perform the following procedure to determine whether further use of
2 To discontinue further use of the machine immediately
(starting with the current job) when a department ID-code
the machine by the corresponding department will be discontinued has exceeded its set limit, touch the “Stop job immediatly”
immediately (starting with the current job) or with the next job, or if key. To cancel further use of the machine starting from the
only an error message will be generated when a department ID-code next job, touch the “Stop after job done” key. To have an error
has exceeded its set limit. message generated, touch the “Only warning” key.
Inch specifications
NOTE Excess of limit Setting Back Close
Select proper setting when limit exceeded.

If the optional Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit is installed on your copier,
even if you select here to have further use of the machine
discontinued immediately (starting with the current job), if a Stop job
immediatly
Stop after
department ID-code exceeds its set limit during scanning or during fax job done
Only
transmission, the actual restriction will start from the next job. warning
1 Select “Excess of limit Setting” under the “Setting item”

Excess of limit Setting
Select proper setting when limit exceeded.

Back Close
“Change #” key.
The “Excess of limit Setting” screen will be displayed.
Stop job
immediatly
Inch specifications Stop after
job done
Only
Managem. Def. Set. Close warning
Setting item Value
Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On
Def. Val. of coun. limit
Total size 1
999999
81/2x11" No specif.
NOTE
Total size 2 81/2x11" No specif. Change #
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set. “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.
Setting item Value

Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On
7-33
● Default copy limit
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default
2 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the default copy
limit. The limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to
copy limit for new department ID-codes. 999,999.
Inch specifications
1 Select “Def. Val. of coun. limit” under the “Setting item”
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Def. Val. of coun. limit Back Close
“Change #” key. Default value of counter limit can be set.
The “Def. Val. of coun. limit” screen will be displayed. (1~999,999)

Inch specifications
Clear

Setting item Value
Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On
Excess of limit Setting Unable to use Metric specifications
Total size 2 81/2x11" No specif. Change # Def. Val. of coun. Limit Back Close
Default value of counter limit can be set.

(1~999,999)

Clear

Setting item Value
Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On
Total size 1 A3 No specif. NOTE

7-34
● Total count for specified paper size (1 to 5)
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a specific
Inch specifications
paper size in order to calculate and check the copy counts for that
Back Close
particular size of paper. It is also possible to register a paper size AND Total size 1
Can set totals of paper size and type.

type.
Off
NOTES On
• You can register up to 5 different paper sizes for this function.

• If the type of paper is not registered in any of the settings, the Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
corresponding copy counts for that size of paper will be calculated

regardless of the type of paper that is used. However, if the same Metric specifications
size of paper is registered in another setting along with a paper type,
Total size 1 Back Close
the counts for the first setting will NOT include copies made with the Can set totals of paper size and type.
type of paper that is registered in the second setting.
Off
On
1 Select one of the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings

under the “Setting item” column on the left side of the touch Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.
panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The corresponding setting screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications 3 Touch the “Select size” key.
Inch specifications

Setting item Value Can set totals of paper size and type.
Scanner Managem. On
Paper size Paper type
Fax Management On
Def. Val. of coun. limit 999999 1
8 /2x11" With no
Total size 1 81/2x11" No specif. Select specif. Select
Total size 2 81/2x11" No specif. Change # Off size paper type
On

Setting item Value Can set totals of paper size and type.
Scanner Managem. On
Fax Management On
Def. Val. of coun. limit 999999 A4 With no
Total size 1 A3 No specif. Select specif. Select
Total size 2 B4 No specif. Change # Off size paper type
On
NOTE
7-35
4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper size,

and then touch the “Close” key. 6 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper type,
and then touch the “Close” key.
Select size Back Close Select paper type Back Close
With no Thick
A3 B4 11x17" Plain Labels Cardstock Custom 1 Custom 5
specif. paper
1 Transp-
A4 B5 8 /2x14" arency Recycled Color Envelope Custom 2 Custom 6
A5 Folio 81/2x11" Rough Preprinted Prepunched Custom 3 Custom 7
High
51/2x81/2" Vellum Bond Letterhead quality
Custom 4 Custom 8
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1 Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1
Select paper type Back Close

Select size Back Close
With no Thick
B4 11x17" Plain Labels Cardstock Custom 1 Custom 5
A3 specif. paper
Transp-
1
arency Recycled Colour Envelope Custom 2 Custom 6
A4 B5 8 /2x14"
Rough Preprinted Prepunched Custom 3 Custom 7

A5 Folio 81/2x11"
High
Vellum Bond Letterhead Custom 4 Custom 8
51/2x81/2" quality
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1

Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1

5 To specify a paper type as well, touch the “Select paper type”
key and proceed to the next step. If you do not want to
specify a paper type, proceed to step 7.

You can check the copy counts for the paper sizes registered under
Can set totals of paper size and type. the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings on the total size report
that is printed together with the copy management report. For
81/2x11" With no
specif. Select
information on how to print out a copy management report, refer to
Select
Off size paper type
“Check all departments” on page 7-21.
On
Can set totals of paper size and type.
A4 With no
Select specif. Select
Off size paper type
On
7-36
(7) Making copies when copy management is turned NOTES

ON • If you enter the wrong ID-code, touch the “clear” key and reenter the
When copy management is turned ON, copying will only be possible correct ID-code.
when a valid department ID-code is entered. • If an invalid (unregistered) department ID-code is entered, an error
alarm will sound. Enter the correct ID-code.
• If you enter your department ID-code and touch the “Each Mgt.
IMPORTANT! Total” key, you can check the copy counts for your own department.
Once you are finished copying, BE SURE to press the [Management] Inch specifications
key so that the “Enter ID-code” screen is displayed again.
Number print.
Scan.Transm. Fax Transm.

Scanner Fax
Default setting - Management 1st Sales Dept.

Number print.
Scan.Transm. Fax transm.

Scanner Fax
Default setting - Management 1st Sales Dept.
1 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter your

department ID-code, and then touch the “Enter” key.
The “Basic” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
2 Perform the desired copy operation as usual.
Enter ID-code.
Each Mgt.
Total
3 Once you are finished copying, press the [Management] key.
****
Clear
Enter
Enter ID-code.
Each Mgt.
Total
****
Clear
Enter
7-37
2. Default settings
The state that the copier enters at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed is called the “initial mode”. The modes, functions and other
settings that are automatically pre-set for the initial mode are called “default settings”. These default settings are separated into two categories:
“Copy defaults” and “Machine defaults” and can be changed as desired to suit your copying needs.
(1) Machine default settings
The following table indicates the machine default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the
most effective use of your copier.
Default setting Description Available Factory Reference

settings setting page
Auto drawer[cassette] If the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during On / Off On 7-42
switching ON/OFF copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching
function will switch paper feed from the empty
drawer[cassette] to another drawer[cassette] that
contains the same size of paper in the same orientation
for uninterrupted copying. To enable this function, it is
necessary to turn the related setting “On”.
In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different All types of paper / All types of
type of paper from being switched to when the automatic Feed same paper paper
drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, it is type
necessary to select “Feed same paper type” as well.
Paper size Sets the size of paper that is loaded in Auto Detection / Auto Detection 7-43
(drawer[cassette] No.1 – drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4. Standard sizes
No.4) If you want the size to be detected automatically, select
“Auto Detection” (Automatic size detection). If you want
to manually set the size of paper, select “Standard
sizes”.
<If you select “Auto Detection”> Inch Inch

You can also select the desired unit of measurement: Centimeter specification:
“Inch” or “Centimeter”. Inch
Metric
specification:
Centimeter
<If you select “Standard sizes”> A3 –––

You can then select the paper size. A4
A4R
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only A5R
be available when the optional Paper Feeder is B4
installed on your copier. B5
B5R
Folio
11 x 17
8 1/2 x 14
11 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 11
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 13
8K
16K
7-38

Paper type Sets and then displays the type of paper that is loaded in Plain Plain 7-44
(drawer[cassette] No.1 - drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4. Preprinted
No. 4) * The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only Recycled
be available when the optional Paper Feeder is Letterhead
installed on your copier. Color [Colour]
Prepunched
Rough
Bond
High quality
Vellum
Custom 1 –
Custom 8
Multi-bypass tray Turn this setting ON if you want the “Bypass setting” On / Off Off 7-45
settings display ON/OFF screen to be displayed whenever the “Bypass” key is
touched in the “Basic” tab.
Custom paper type for Sets whether or not each custom paper type (custom 1 – On / Off On 7-46
2-sided copying custom 8) will be available for use in
2-sided copying.
-
Special paper action When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead Adj. print Direction / Speed Priority 7-46-1
setting paper, and performing both 1-sided copying and 2-sided Speed Priority
copying from the same drawer[cassette], the positioning
of the holes in relation to the copied image may be
different for each copy or the front and rear images of 2-
sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of
the paper. If you select “Adj. print Direction”, both 1-sided
and 2-sided copies will be created with the same
orientation.
Example: Set the paper as shown in the illustration
Drawer[Cassette]
Setting 1-sided copying 2-sided copying
Adj. print
Direction
Speed
Priority
* When “Adj. print Direction” is selected, the speed of 1-

sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal.
* When making copies with “Adj. print Direction”
selected, set the paper as shown in illustration A and
with the first image being copied set face-down. (If the
optional Built-in Finisher is installed on your copier, set
the paper as shown in illustration B and with the first
image being copied set face-down.)
* If the optional Document Finisher or Built-in Finisher is

installed on your copier and you have selected either
the Staple mode or the Hole Punch mode, the direction
that the copy image is created in may not conform to
the desired position of the staples or holes.
7-39

Auto sleep time Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the auto 1, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60, 60 (minutes) 7-47
sleep function engages and turns the copier OFF (O) if 90, 120, 180, 240
no operation is performed on the copier during that time. (minutes)
* It is recommended that you try to set a longer time
interval before the auto sleep function engages if you
use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there
are long intervals between use.
* For more detailed information on the auto sleep
function, see page 4-11.
Auto low power time Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the Low 1, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60, 15 (minutes) 7-48
Power mode is automatically activated if no operation is 90, 120, 180, 240
performed on the copier during that time. (minutes)
* For more detailed information on the Low power mode,
see page 4-11.
Copy eject location Sets the location for the ejection of finished copies. Inner tray Inner tray 7-49
* This setting will only be displayed when the optional Job separator
Document Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator Finisher tray
is installed on your copier. Finisher main tray
* The available location for ejection will differ depending Finisher sub tray
upon the optional equipment that is installed on your
copier.
Fax eject location Sets the location for the ejection of received faxes. Inner tray Inner tray 7-50
* This setting will only be displayed when the optional Job separator
Fax Kit and Document Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher Finisher tray
or Job Separator) are installed on your copier. Finisher main tray
* The available location for ejection will differ depending Finisher sub tray
upon the optional equipment that is installed on your Mailbox 1
copier.
Default operation mode Sets which operation mode, the copy operation mode or Copy mode Copy mode 7-51
the fax operation mode, will be selected when the power FAX mode
is turned on to the copier.
7-40

Touch panel sound ON/ Sets whether or not the touch panel will emit a “beep” On / Off On 7-52
OFF sound each time a key is touched.
Silent mode ON/OFF The copier can be switched to a silent mode, which On / Off Off 7-53
shortens the length of time that the laser data writing
motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished.
Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor
bothers you in any way.
Day & time Sets the current date and time. Year: 2001-2049 Year: 2001 7-54
Month: 1 – 12 Month: 01
Day: 1 – 31 Day: 01
Time: 00:00 – 23:59 Time: 00:00
Time difference Sets the time difference from the world standard time +12:00 – -12:00 00:00 7-55
(GMT).
Changing the Changes the management code that is used by the copy 0000 – 9999 30 cpm copiers: 7-56
management code manager. 3000
IMPORTANT: 40 cpm copiers:
If you change the management code from its factory 4000
default, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new 50 cpm copiers:
management code. If, for any reason, you forget the 5000
registered management code, you will need to contact
your service representative.
Auto sleep ON/OFF Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function On / Off On 7-57
automatically engage and turn the copier OFF (O) if no
operation is performed on the copier for a designated
amount of time.
* If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations,
turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended
that you try to set a longer time interval until auto sleep
engages before you actually turn it OFF.
* For more detailed information on turn the auto sleep
function, see page 4-11.
Changing the energy- Changes the energy-saving mode that will be entered Low power mode Low power 7-58
saving mode into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed. Sleep mode mode
(See “5. Energy-saving modes” on page 4-11 for more
information.)
* This setting is displayed when the optional Printer Kit
or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.
If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax
Kit is installed in your copier, you can press the
[Energy Saver] key to engage the Low power mode.
7-40-1
(2) Accessing the machine default settings 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
screens for each of the various machine default settings.
Inch specifications

The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.
Touch the “Machine default” key on the left side of the touch
2 panel. 4 If the entered code matched the registered one, the
“Machine default” screen will be displayed.
Default setting / Counter Default setting / Counter
Default setting End Close
Machine default
Copy
Default menu Setting mode Up
Bypass BOX Counter Auto drawer switching On / All types of paper
setting Management check Paper size (1st drawer) Auto / Inch
Down
Paper size (2nd drawer) Auto / Inch
Paper size (3rd drawer) Auto / Inch
Paper size (4th drawer) Auto / Inch Change #
Default setting
Default setting / Counter Default setting / Counter

Default setting End Machine default Close
Copy
default Language Management Default menu Setting mode
Up
Auto cassette switching On / All types of paper
setting Management check Paper size (1st cassette) Auto / Centimeter
Down
Paper size (2nd cassette) Auto / Centimeter
Machine Document Register Print User Paper size (3rd cassette) Auto / Centimeter
default Management orig. size report Adjustment Paper size (4th cassette) Auto / Centimeter Change #
Default setting
NOTES
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.

(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making
machine default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).
7-41
(3) Making machine default settings 3 Touch the “On” key to automatic drawer[cassette] switching
ON.
Inch specifications
setting.
Auto drawer switching Back Close
● Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF When paper drawer is empty, switch to another one,
set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.
Perform the following procedure to turn automatic drawer[cassette] Function Paper type
All types
switching ON or OFF, as desired. On
of paper
Feed same
Off paper type
1 Display the “Machine default” screen.

(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
Default setting - Machine default
page 7-41.) Metric specifications

Inch specifications Auto cassette switching Back Close
When paper cassette is empty, switch to another one,

Default setting / Counter set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.
Paper type
Function
Default setting End All types

On
of Paper
Copy Feed same
default Language Management Off
paper type
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Default setting - Machine default

In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different

Metric specifications 4 type of paper from being switched to when the automatic
Default setting / Counter drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, touch the
Default setting End
“Feed same paper type” key under “Paper type”.
Copy
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
NOTE
default Management orig. size report Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
2 Select “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto cassette switching”] in

the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
touch the “Change #” key.The “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto screen in step 2.
cassette switching”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
to the “Default setting”screen.
Machine default Close
Default menu
Auto drawer switching
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Up 7 contents of the “Basic” tab.
Paper size (1st drawer) Auto / Inch
Down
Default setting

Default menu Setting mode

Up
Paper size (1st cassette) Auto / Centimeter
Down
Paper size (3rd cassette) Auto / Centimeter
Paper size (4th cassette) Auto / Centimeter Change #
Default setting
7-42
● Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.1 – No.4)
Perform the following procedure to set the size of paper that is loaded
3 If you select “Auto Detection” (automatic size detection) here,
select the desired unit of measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as
in drawer[cassette] No.1 through No.4. well.
If you select “Standard sizes” (standard paper size) here,
simply touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper
that is loaded in that drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
page 7-41.)
Paper type(1st drawer) Back Close
Inch specifications
Select paper size.
Default setting / Counter A3 B4 11x17" 51/2x81/2"

Auto
Detection
A4 B5 81/2x14" 81/2x13"
Default setting End
Standard B5 11x81/2" 8K
A4
Copy sizes
A5 Folio 81/2x11" 16K
Bypass BOX Counter
Metric specifications Paper size (1st cassette) Back Close
Select paper size.

A3 B4 11x17" 51/2x81/2"
Default setting End
Auto
A4 B5 81/2x14" 81/2x13"
Detection
Copy
default Language Management Standard
A4 B5 11x81/2" 8K
sizes
setting Management check A5 Folio 81/2x11" 16K

default Management orig. size report Adjustment Default setting - Machine default
NOTES
2 Select one of the “Paper size” settings

(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch • The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available
the “Change #” key. when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.
The screen to set the paper size for that drawer[cassette] will
be displayed.
Inch specifications

screen in step 2.
Default menu
Auto drawer switching
Paper size (1st drawer)
Setting mode
On / All types of paper
Auto / Inch
Up
Down
Default setting


Up
Paper size (1st cassette) Auto / Centimeter
Down
Paper size (3rd cassette) Auto / Centimeter
Paper size (4th cassette) Auto / Centimeter Change #
Default setting
7-43
● Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No. 4)
Perform the following procedure to set the type of paper that is loaded
3 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper that is
loaded in that drawer[cassette].
in drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4. Inch specifications
Paper type(1st drawer) Back Close
Display the “Machine default” screen.

1 (See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on
Select and display paper type.
Plain Color
High
quality Custom 1 Custom 5
page 7-41.) Preprinted Prepunched Vellum Custom 2 Custom 6
Recycled Rough Custom 3 Custom 7

Inch specifications
Letterhead Bond Custom 4 Custom 8
Default setting / Counter Default setting - Machine default
Default setting End
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter Paper type (1st cassette) Back Close

Select and display paper type.
High
Plain Colour quality Custom 1 Custom 5
Preprinted Prepunched Vellum Custom 2 Custom 6
Recycled Rough Custom 3 Custom 7

Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
NOTES

• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.
2 Select one of the “Paper type” settings

(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
the “Change #” key. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
The screen to set the paper type for that drawer[cassette] will
be displayed.
Inch specifications 5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
Machine default

Close
Up
Paper type (1st drawer) Plain
Paper type (2nd drawer) Plain
Down
Paper type (3rd drawer) Plain
Paper type (4th drawer) Plain
Check bypass sizing Off Change #
Default setting


Up
Paper type (1st cassette) Plain
Paper type (2nd cassette) Plain
Down
Paper type (3rd cassette) Plain
Paper type (4th cassette) Plain
Default setting
7-44
● Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to have the “Bypass setting” screen
3 Touch the “On” key if you want to have the “Bypass setting”
screen appear.
appear whenever the “Bypass” key is pressed in the “Basic” tab. Inch specifications
Check bypass sizing Back Close

Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting.
Select "On" when using custom size or changing paper type.
page 7-41.) On
Off
Inch specifications
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
Bypass BOX Counter Check bypass sizing Back Close

Machine Document Register Print User Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting.
default Management orig. size report Adjustment Select "On" when using custom size or changing paper type.
On
Off
Default setting End
Copy

NOTE
Machine Document Register Print User If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
2 Select “Check bypass sizing” in the settings list on the left

side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
The “Check bypass sizing” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter 5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
to the “Default setting” screen.
Up
Paper type (1st drawer) Plain
Down
Default setting


Up
Paper type (1st cassette) Plain
Down
Default setting
7-45
● Custom paper type for 2-sided copying
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not each custom
3 Select one of the “custom” paper type settings (“Custom 1”
through “Custom 8”) under the “Default menu” column on the
type of paper (custom 1 - custom 8) will be available for use in 2-sided left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
copying. key.
Inch specifications

Select paper type(2sided)
Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.

Close
page 7-41.) Default menu Setting mode Up

Custom 1 On
Custom 2 On Down
Inch specifications Custom 3 On
Custom 4 On
Custom 5 On Change #
Default setting / Counter Custom 6 On
Custom 7 On
Default setting End Default setting - Machine default
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Select paper type(2sided) Close

Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.

Custom 1 On
Custom 2 On Down
Metric specifications Custom 3 On
Custom 4 On
Custom 5 On Change #
Default setting / Counter Custom 6 On
Custom 7 On
Default setting End Default setting - Machine default
Copy
Touch the “Off” key if you do NOT want that custom paper
Machine Document
Bypass
setting
Register
Hard Disk
Management
Print
Counter
check
User
4 type to be available for use in 2-sided copying.
Inch specifications
Custom 1 Back Close
Select “Select paper type (2sided)” in the settings list on the

2 left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” On
key. Off
The “Select paper type (2sided)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications Default setting - Machine default - Select paper type (2sided)
Default setting / Counter Metric specifications

Custom 1 Back Close

Up
Down
Check bypass sizing Off On
Select paper type (2sided) Change #
Off
Default setting
Metric specifications Default setting - Machine default - Select paper type (2sided)

Machine default Close NOTE
Up If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
Down “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.
Check bypass sizing Off
Select paper type (2sided) Change #
Default setting
screen in step 3.
6 screen in step 2.
“Default setting”screen.
7-46
● Special paper action setting
When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, and
3 Select “Adj. print Direction”.
Inch specifications
performing both 1-sided copying and 2-sided copying from the same
drawer[cassette], the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied Special paper action mode Back Close
Possible to set action of the paper

image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of (Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead)
2-sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper. If
Adj. print
you select “Adj. print Direction”, both 1-sided and 2-sided copies will Direction
Speed
be created with the same orientation. Priority

(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on Metric specifications
page 7-41.)
Specif. paper action mode Back Close
Inch specifications Possible to set action of the paper
(Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead)

Adj. print
Direction
Default setting End
Speed
Priority
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

setting Management check Default setting - Machine default
NOTES
• When “Adj. print Direction” is selected, the speed of 1-sided copying
Default setting / Counter will be somewhat slower than normal.
Default setting End
Copy


screen in step 2.
2 Select “Special paper action mode” [“Specif. paper action

mode”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel 5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Special paper action mode” [“Specif. paper action
mode”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications


Up
Down
Select paper type (2sided)
Special paper action mode Speed priority Change #
Default setting


Up
Down
Select paper type (2sided)
Specif. paper action mode Speed priority Change #
Default setting
7-46-1
● Auto sleep time
Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will
3 Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time
to the desired setting (between 1 minutes and 240 minutes).
elapse before the auto sleep function engages and turns the copier Inch specifications
OFF (O) if no operation has been performed on the copier during that
Back Close
time. Sleep mode changing time
Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode
after last setting,or when copying is done.
Minute

(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on +
page 7-41.) –
Inch specifications Default setting - Machine default

Default setting End
Sleep mode changing time Back Close
Copy
Language Management Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode
default
Bypass BOX Counter
Minute
Metric specifications Default setting - Machine default

Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
NOTES
default

setting Management check • The setting can be made to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180
minutes or 240 minutes.
• It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before
the auto sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently, and
to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use.
2 Select “Sleep mode changing time” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Sleep mode changing time” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.

Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
Sleep mode changing time
Low power mode chng. time
Select Copy output mode
60 Minute
15 Minute
Inner tray
Down
5 to the “Default setting”screen.
Select FAX output mode Inner tray
Select the main mode Copy mode Change #
Default setting


Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute
Low power mode chng. time 15 Minute Down
Select COPY output mode Inner tray
Select main mode COPY Mode Change #
Default setting
7-47
● Auto low power time
Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will
to that desired (any available setting between 1 minute and
elapse before the auto low power function automatically engages and 240 minutes).
puts the copier in the Low power mode if no operation has been Inch specifications
performed on the copier during that time.
Low power mode chng. time Back Close
Set Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode

M i nu t e
page 7-41.) +
–
Inch specifications
Default setting End Metric specifications
Copy
default Language Management Low power mode chng. time Back Close
Bypass BOX Counter Set Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode
setting Management check after last setting,or when copying is done.

default Management orig. size report Adjustment Minute
Default setting End
Copy

NOTES
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
• The setting can be made to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30
minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180
minutes or 240 minutes.
2 Select “Low power mode chng. time” in the settings list on the
key.
The “Auto preheat time” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
screen in step 2.

Low power mode chng. time 15 Minute
Down
Select Copy output mode Inner tray
Select FAX output mode
Select the main mode
Inner tray
Copy mode Change #
Default setting


Default setting
7-48
● Copy eject location
Perform the following procedure to set where finished copies will be
3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.
Inch specifications
ejected.
Select Copy output mode Back Close
Set the default copy output destination
NOTE Job
separator
This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document Inner tray
Finisher
Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier. main tray
Finisher
sub tray
Select COPY output mode Back Close
page 7-41.) Set the default copy output destination.
Inch specifications Job

separator
Inner tray
Default setting / Counter Finisher
main tray
Finisher
Default setting End
sub tray
Copy
default Language Management Default setting - Machine default
Bypass BOX Counter


NOTES
• The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the
Metric specifications optional equipment that is installed on your copier.
Default setting End
Copy

Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
2 Select “Select Copy output mode” in the settings list on the
key.
The “Select Copy output mode” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the


Down
Default setting


Default setting
7-49
● Fax eject location
Perform the following procedure to set where incoming faxes will be
3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.
Inch specifications
ejected.
Select FAX output mode Back Close
Set the default fax output destination
NOTE Job
MailBox 1
separator
This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and Inner tray
Document Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher or Job Separator) are

Finisher
installed on your copier. sub tray

Select FAX output mode
Set the default fax output destination.

Back Close
page 7-41.)
Job
Mailbox 1
separator
Inch specifications Inner tray
Default setting / Counter Finisher

sub tray
Default setting End

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

Machine Document Register Print User NOTES

• The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the
optional equipment that is installed on your copier.
Metric specifications • If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
Default setting End
Copy
Machine Document
Bypass
setting
Register
Hard Disk
Management
Print
Counter
check
User
screen in step 2.
2 Select “Select FAX output mode” in the settings list on the left
The “Select FAX output mode” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the


Down
Default setting


Default setting
7-50
● Default operation mode
Perform the following procedure to set whether the display that
3 Select the "Copy mode" key or the "FAX mode" key, as
appropriate.
appears after power is turned on to the copier will be the one for the Inch specifications
copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode.
Select the main mode Back Close
Select the default display panel mode

when the power is on.
NOTE
This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in Copy mode
your copier. FAX mode
Select main mode Back Close
page 7-41.) Select the default display panel mode
when the power is on.
Inch specifications
COPY Mode
FAX mode
Default setting End
Copy
default Language Management Default setting - Machine default
Bypass BOX Counter


NOTE

Default setting End
Copy
default Language
Bypass
Management
Hard Disk Counter

screen in step 2.

2 Select “Select the main mode” [“Select main mode”] in the

settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
the “Change #” key. 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
The “Select the main mode” [“Select main mode”] screen will
be displayed.
Inch specifications


Down
Default setting


Default setting
7-51
● Touch panel sound ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the touch panel
3 Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key to turn the sound on the
touch panel ON or OFF, as desired.
will emit a “beep” sound each time a key is touched. Select “Off” if you Inch specifications
want to turn the sound OFF.
Key sound ON/OFF Back Close
Select panel key sound mode off/on.

(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on On
page 7-41.) Off
Inch specifications
Copy
Language Management Back Close
default Key sound ON/OFF
Bypass BOX Counter Select panel key sound mode off/on.


On
Off
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
NOTE
default

setting Management check If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
Machine Document Register Print User “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2 Select “Key sound ON/OFF” in the settings list on the left 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
The “Key sound ON/OFF” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications 5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return

Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode On
Down
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02
Time difference GMT+08:00
Management code change 5000 Change #


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode Off
Down
Date/Time 30/10/'01 14:02
Change MGMT code with # 5000 Change #
Default setting
7-52
● Silent mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to use the silent
3 Touch the “On” key if you want to use the silent mode.
Inch specifications
mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing
motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. Turn the silent Silent mode Back Close
U s e t h i s m o d e i f yo u a r e d i s t ra c t e d by m o t e r s o u n d s.
mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way.
Off

On
page 7-41.)
Inch specifications
Silent mode Back Close
Default setting End Shorten laser motor rotating time for before/after copying
Use this mode if you are distracted by motor sound.
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

setting Management check Off
Machine Document Register Print User On

Default setting / Counter NOTE

Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

4 screen in step 2.
2 Select “Silent mode” in the settings list on the left side of the
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Silent mode” screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
Inch specifications


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode On
Down
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode Off
Down
Date/Time 30/10/'01 14:02
Default setting
7-53
● Day & time
Perform the following procedure to set the current date and time.
information for each field (“Year”, “Month”, “Day” and “Time”)
to the current time and date.
If you want the time to be automatically calculated for
NOTE daylight savings time, touch the “On” key under
“Summertime”.
BE SURE to perform the “Time difference” setting prior to setting the
day and time. Inch specifications
Date/Time Back Close
Year 2001
Summertime

Month 10
Day 16 Off
page 7-41.)
On
Time 18:27
Inch specifications

Default setting End
Copy Date/Time Back Close

Bypass BOX Counter

setting Management check Year 2001
Summertime
default Management orig. size report Adjustment Month 10
Day 16 Off
On
Time 18:27

Default setting End
NOTE
Copy
Bypass Hard Disk Counter If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
2 Select “Date/Time” in the settings list on the left side of the

screen in step 2.
The “Date/Time” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
Default menu
Key sound ON/OFF
Silent mode
On
On
Setting mode
Up 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Down
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode Off
Down
Date/Time 30/10/'01 14:02
Default setting
7-54
● Time difference
Perform the following procedure to set a designated time difference
difference to the desired setting.
from the world standard time (GMT). Inch specifications
Time difference Back Close

page 7-41.) GMT+ 00 : 00
Inch specifications
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
Bypass BOX Counter

Time difference Back Close

GMT+ 00 : 00
Default setting End
Copy

NOTE
2 Select “Time difference” in the settings list on the left side of

the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
The “Time difference” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications

Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode On
Down
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode Off
Down
Date/Time 30/10/'01 14:02
Default setting
7-55
● Changing the management code
Perform the following procedure to change the management code
3 Use the keypad to enter a new 4-digit management code.
Inch specifications
used by the copy manager.
Management code change Back Close
A bl e t o c h a n g e m a n a g e m e n t c o d e. ( # key )
IMPORTANT!
If you change the management code from its factory default, be sure
to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any
reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to Default setting - Machine default
contact your service representative.

Change MGMT code with # Back Close
A bl e t o c h a n g e m a n a g e m e n t c o d e. ( # key )

page 7-41.)
Inch specifications
Default setting End
Copy
default Language Management NOTE
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
Default setting / Counter 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
Bypass
setting
Hard Disk
Management
Counter
check
2 Select “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code

with #”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel
and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code with
#”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode On
Down
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02


Up
Key sound ON/OFF On
Silent mode On
Down
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02
7-56
● Auto sleep ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to have the
3 Touch the “On” key if you want to use the auto sleep function.
Inch specifications
auto sleep function automatically engage and turn the copier OFF (O)
if no operation is performed on the copier for a designated amount of Auto sleep Back Close
Autom. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time

time. after last setting,or when copying is done.
On

Off
page 7-41.)
Inch specifications
Auto sleep Back Close
Default setting End Autom. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

setting Management check On
Machine Document Register Print User Off


Default setting End NOTES
Copy
Language Management
default • If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations, turn this
setting Management check function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn
it OFF.
Select “Auto sleep” in the settings list on the left side of the
2 touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Auto sleep” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
screen in step 2.
Date/Time
2001/10/30 14:02
Up 5 to the “Default setting”screen.
Down
Management code change 5000
Auto sleep On
Energy Saver key setting Low power mode Change #


Up
Date/Time 30/10/'01 14:02
Down
Change MGMT code with # 5000
Auto sleep On
Default setting
7-57
● Changing the energy-saving mode
Perform the following procedure to change the energy-saving mode
3 Touch the “Low power mode” key or the “Sleep mode” key, as
desired.
(the Low power mode or the Sleep mode) that will be entered into Inch specifications
when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed.
Energy Saver key setting Back Close
When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set.

(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on Low power
mode
page 7-41.) Sleep
mode
Inch specifications
Copy
default Language Management Energy Saver key setting Back Close
Bypass BOX Counter When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set.

Low power
mode
Sleep
mode
Default setting End
Copy

NOTE
2 Select “Energy Saver key setting” in the settings list on the

key. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
The “Energy Saver key setting” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Up
Date/Time 2001/10/30 14:02
Down
Management code change 5000
Auto sleep On


Up
Date/Time 30/10/'01 14:02
Down
Change MGMT code with # 5000
Auto sleep On
Default setting
7-58
(4) Copy default settings
The following table indicates the copy default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most
effective use of your copier.
Default setting Description Available settings Factory Reference

setting page
Exposure mode Selects between auto exposure and manual Manual / Auto Manual 7-63
exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the
initial mode.
Exposure adjustment Changes the incremental step to be used during 1 step / 0.5 step 1 step 7-64
step adjustment of the copy exposure.
Original quality Determines the default setting that will be used for Text+Photo / Text / Text+Photo 7-65
the image quality in the initial mode. Photo
Eco print mode ON/OFF Determines whether the Eco print mode will be the On / Off Off 7-66
default setting in the initial mode. In this case, the
amount of toner that is used to make the copies will
be reduced, and images will be printed out relatively
lighter than normal.
Background exposure Adjusts the ground color of the copied paper. -2 – +2 Standard setting 7-67
adjustment (0)
Paper selection Sets whether the copier will automatically select the APS / Default APS 7-68
same size of copy paper as the original once an drawer[cassette]
original is set (APS: auto paper selection mode), or
whether the drawer[cassette] selected “Default
drawer” [“Default cassette”] setting will be
automatically selected.
Paper type (auto paper Sets which types of paper can be selected under the Off / On On 7-69
selection mode) auto paper selection mode.
* It is possible to select the type of paper that has Plain Plain
been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently Preprinted
in use. Recycled
Letterhead
Color [Colour]
Prepunched
Rough
Bond
High quality
Vellum
Custom 1 –
Custom 8
Default drawer[cassette] Sets one drawer[cassette] that will be selected 1st paper 1st paper 7-70
automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded 2nd paper
in that drawer[cassette]. 3rd paper
* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray 4th paper
as the default drawer[cassette].
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will
only be available when the optional Paper Feeder
is installed on your copier.
7-59

setting page
Cover drawer[cassette] Sets which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the 1st paper Bypass 7-71
cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching 2nd paper
mode and the book to booklet mode. 3rd paper
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will 4th paper
only be available when the optional Paper Feeder Bypass
is installed on your copier.
Default magnification Sets whether or not the auto magnification selection Manual / AMS Manual 7-72
ratio mode will be used to automatically calculate the
appropriate magnification ratio when you select the
size of copy paper.
Auto exposure Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto -3 – +3 Standard setting 7-73
adjustment exposure mode. (0)
Auto exposure Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with -3 – +3 Standard setting 7-74
adjustment (OCR) OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when (0)
using the optional scanner functions of this copier.
Manual exposure Adjusts the median exposure value when the -3 – +3 Standard setting 7-75
adjustment (text+photo text+photo mode is selected for the image quality. (0)
mode)
Manual exposure Adjusts the median exposure value when the text -3 – +3 Standard setting 7-76
adjustment (text mode) mode is selected for the image quality. (0)
Manual exposure Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo -3 – +3 Standard setting 7-77
adjustment (photo mode is selected for the image quality. (0)
mode)
Sort/Finished mode ON/ Determines whether or not the Sort and/or the Sort mode : Sort mode : 7-78
OFF Finished modes will be the default setting in the On / Off On
initial mode. Finished mode : Finished mode :
Off / On [1 set (Output Off
each page) ]
Auto Rotation mode Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode Rotate / No Rotate Rotate 7-79
will be the default setting in the initial mode. If Auto
Rotation is turned ON, the image will be
automatically rotated even if the orientation of the
original is different from that of the paper loaded in
the drawers[cassettes].
Margin width Determines the default value of the location and Inch specification Inch 7-80
width of the margins in the margin mode. 0 – 3/4 (inches) specification
Metric specification Left: 1/4 (inches)
0 – 18 (mm) Top: 0 (inches)
Metric
specification
Left: 6 (mm)
Top: 0 (mm)
7-60

setting page
Erased border width Determines the default value for the width of the Inch specification Inch 7-81
border to be erased in the two border erase modes. Outside border: specification
0 – 3/4 (inches) Outside border:
Center area: 1/4 (inches)
0 – 1 1/2 (inches) Center area:
1/2 (inches)
Metric specification Metric

Outside border: specification
0 – 18 (mm) Outside border:
Center area: 6 (mm)
0 – 36 (mm) Center area:
12 (mm)
Copy limit Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) 1 – 999 999 7-82
that can be made at a time.
Repeat copying ON/ Sets whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as Off / On On 7-83
OFF well as whether or not to make repeat copying the
default setting in the initial mode. Sets whether to
turn the repeat copy mode ON or OFF.
Sets whether or not to make repeat copying the Off / On Off

default setting in the initial mode.
* This setting is displayed when the optional Hard

Disk is installed.
Registration keys ON/ Sets whether or not to allow a “Register” key to be Off / On On 7-84
OFF displayed in the screen for those function and modes
which can be registered under the registration keys.
Functions and/or modes can only be registered
under registration keys through the “Register” key.
Customize screen layout Changes the order of the main functions and modes Exposure Mode / 1 Exposure 7-85
(Main functions) that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User Reduce/Enlarge / Mode
choice” tabs in order to make the display more Sort/Finished / 2 Reduce/
appropriate to the way you use the copier. 1/2 sided / Enlarge
* Up to 6 functions and modes can be listed and Original size / 3 Sort/Finished
displayed. Orig. quality 4 1/2 sided
[Quality orig.] 5 Original size
6 Orig. quality
[Quality orig.]
Customize screen layout Adds often-used functions and/or modes, and All functions and modes 7 Margin 7-86
(Add functions) changes the order of their layout, in order to make other than those in the 8 Border Erase
the display more appropriate to the way you use the “Basic” tab and the [Erase Mode]
copier. “main functions” in the 9 Combine
“User choice” tab. [Merge]
10 (None)
11 (None)
12 (None)
13 (None)
7-61
(5) Accessing the copy default settings 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
screens for each of the various copy default settings.
Inch specifications

Touch the “Copy default” key on the left side of the touch
2 panel.
Inch specifications
4 If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Copy
default” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Default setting End Default setting / Counter
Copy
default Language Management Copy default Close
Bypass BOX Counter

setting Management check Default menu Setting mode Up
Exposure mode Manual
Machine Document Register Print User Exposure steps 1 step
default Management orig. size report Adjustment Down
Original image quality Text + Photo
Eco Print Off
Background exp. adj. Standard Change #
Default setting
Default setting End
Copy Copy default Close
Bypass Hard Disk Counter Default menu Setting mode

setting Management check Up
Machine Document Register Print User Exposure steps 1 step
default Management orig. size report Adjustment Down
Image quality original Text + Photo
Eco Print Off
Default setting
NOTES

• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(6) Making copy
default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).
7-62
(6) Making copy default settings 3 Touch the “Manual” key or the “Auto” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
setting. Exposure mode Back Close
Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.
● Exposure mode Manual
Perform the following procedure to select between auto exposure and Auto
manual exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial

mode. D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
1 Display the “Copy default” screen.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.) Exposure mode Back Close
Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.

Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter Manual
Auto
Default setting End
Copy
Default setting - Copy default
Bypass BOX Counter

NOTE
Default setting / Counter “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Default setting End
Copy
Machine
default
Document
Management
setting
Register
orig. size
Management
Print
report
check
User
Adjustment
screen in step 2.
2 Select “Exposure mode” in the settings list on the left side of

the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Exposure mode” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Exposure steps 1 step
Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting

Copy default Close

Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting
7-63
● Exposure adjustment step
Perform the following procedure to change the incremental step to be
3 Touch the “1 step” key or the “0.5 step” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
used during adjustment of the copy exposure.
Exposure steps Back Close
S e l e c t s t e p o f c o py ex p o s u r e.
Display the “Copy default” screen.

1 (See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.) 1 step
step
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
Bypass BOX Counter Exposure steps Back Close

S e l e c t a d j u s t m e n t s t e p o f c o py ex p o s u r e.
1 step
0.5 step
Default setting / Counter Default setting - Copy default
Default setting End
Copy

NOTE
2 Select “Exposure steps” in the settings list on the left side of

The “Exposure steps” screen will be displayed. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Exposure steps
Original image quality
Eco Print
Background exp. adj.
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Down
Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting
7-64
● Original quality
Perform the following procedure to determine the default setting that
3 Touch the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or the “Text” key,
as appropriate.
will be used for the image quality in the initial mode. Inch specifications
Original image quality Back Close

1
S e l e c t d e fa u l t m o d e o f o r i g i n a l i m a g e q u a l i t y.
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)

Text + Photo
Inch specifications
Photo
Default setting / Counter Text
Default setting End D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Image quality original. Back Close
S e l e c t d e fa u l t m o d e o f o r i g i n a l q u a l i t y.
Text+Photo
Photo
Default setting / Counter Text
Default setting End Default setting - Copy default
Copy


default Management orig. size report Adjustment NOTE
2 Select “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] in

the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
The “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] screen 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Copy default Close
Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting

Copy default Close

Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting
7-65
● Eco print mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the eco
3 Touch the “On” key if you want to make the eco print mode
the default setting in the initial mode.
print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. Inch specifications

1 (See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)
S e l e c t d e fa u l t E c o P r i n t .
Off
Inch specifications
On

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Eco Print Back Close

Select default EcoPrint.
Off
On

Copy

NOTE
2 Select “Eco Print” in the settings list on the left side of the
The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close
5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will
return to the “Default setting”screen.

Exposure steps
Eco Print
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Down
Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting
7-66
● Background exposure adjustment
Perform the following procedure to adjust the ground color of the
3 Touch the “Lighter” key or “Darker” key to adjust density.
Inch specifications
copied paper.
Background exp. adj. Back Close
1 Display the “Copy default” screen. Able to adjust exposure of paper background.
Inch specifications Lighter Darker

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Background exp. adj. Back Close
Able to adjust exposure of paper background.
Metric specifications Lighter Darker

Copy

NOTE
Select “Background exp. adj.” in the settings list on the left

2 side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Background exp. adj.” screen will be displayed. 4 screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Exposure steps
Eco Print
1 step
Text + Photo
Off
Standard
Down
Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Down
Eco Print Off
Default setting
7-67
● Paper selection
Perform the following procedure to set whether the copier will
3 Touch the “APS” key to have the same size of copy paper as
the original selected automatically, and the “Default
automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once drawer[cassette]” key to have paper fed from the designated
an original is set, or whether the designated default drawer[cassette] default drawer[cassette].
will be automatically selected. Inch specifications
1 Display the “Copy default” screen. S e t a u t o p a p e r s e l e c t i o n m o d e.

APS
Inch specifications
Default
drawer

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Select paper Back Close

S e t t i n g p a p e r s e l e c t m o d e.
APS
Default
cassette

Copy

NOTE
Select “Select paper” in the settings list on the left side of the
2 touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Select paper” screen will be displayed. 4 screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Up
Select paper APS
Select paper type(APS)
Default drawer
Drawer for cover paper
Plain
1st paper
Bypass
Change #
Down
Default magnification Manual
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Select paper APS
Select paper type(APS) Plain
Down
Default cassette 1st paper
Cassette for cover paper Bypass
Default mode Manual Change #
Default setting
7-68
● Paper type (auto paper selection mode)
Perform the following procedure to set which types of paper can be
3 Touch the “On” key and then touch the key that corresponds
to the types of paper you want to allow to be used under the
selected under the auto paper selection mode. auto paper selection mode. If you do NOT want to limit the
types of paper that will be available for use in that mode,
touch the “Off” key.
Inch specifications
Select paper type(APS) Back Close

Inch specifications
Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.
Default setting / Counter Plain Color

High
quality Custom 1 Custom 5
Off Preprinted Prepunched Vellum Custom 2 Custom 6

Default setting End
On Recycled Rough Custom 3 Custom 7
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Select paper type(APS) Back Close

Metric specifications Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.
High
Default setting / Counter Plain Colour quality Custom 1 Custom 5
Off Preprinted Prepunched Vellum Custom 2 Custom 6

Default setting End
On Recycled Rough Custom 3 Custom 7
Copy

setting Management check Default setting - Copy default
NOTES
• It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for
2 Select “Select paper type(APS)” in the settings list on the left

the drawer[cassette] currently in use.
The “Select paper type(APS)” screen will be displayed. the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close
screen in step 2.
Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default drawer 1st paper
Drawer for cover paper
Default magnification
Bypass
Manual Change # 5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default setting
7-69
● Default drawer[cassette]
Perform the following procedure to set one drawer[cassette] that will
3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired
drawer[cassette].
be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in Inch specifications
that drawer[cassette].
* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the default Default drawer Back Close
Select priority drawer.

drawer[cassette].
1st paper
2nd paper

3rd paper
4th paper
Inch specifications Default setting - Copy default

Default setting End
Default cassette Back Close
Copy
default Language Management Select paper cassette for default setting.
Bypass BOX Counter

setting Management check 1st paper
Machine Document Register Print User 2nd paper

3rd paper
4th paper
Metric specifications Default setting - Copy default

Default setting End NOTES
Copy
Language Management
default • If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
setting Management check the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
2 Select “Default drawer[cassette]” in the settings list on the left

side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
The “Default drawer[cassette]” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Copy default Close
Up
Select paper APS
Down
Drawer for cover paper Bypass
Default magnification Manual Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default setting
7-70
● Cover drawer[cassette]
Perform the following procedure to set which drawer[cassette] will be
3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired
drawer[cassette].
used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching Inch specifications
mode and the book to booklet mode.
Drawer for cover paper Back Close
Select drawer for cover paper.

1st paper
2nd paper
3rd paper Bypass

Inch specifications
4th paper
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
default
Bypass BOX Counter Back Close

Cassette for cover paper
Machine Document Register Print User Select cassette for cover paper.
1st paper
2nd paper
3rd paper Bypass

4th paper
Default setting End
Copy

NOTES
Machine Document Register Print User • If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch
2 Select “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”]

in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
The “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”] 4 screen in step 2.
Inch specifications
Copy default Close
Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default setting
7-71
● Default magnification ratio
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the appropriate
3 Touch the “Manual” key or the “AMS” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when you select the
size of copy paper. Default magnification Back Close
S e l e c t d e fa u l t m a g n i f i c a t i o n m o d e.

Manual
AMS
Inch specifications
D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Copy
default Language Management Default mode Back Close
Bypass BOX Counter S e l e c t d e fa u l t zo o m m o d e.


Manual
AMS
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
NOTE
default

Machine Document Register Print User “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2 Select “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] in the settings

list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
“Change #” key.
The “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Select paper APS
Down
Default setting
7-72
● Auto exposure adjustment
Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level
3 Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to
for the auto exposure mode. exposure as desired.
Inch specifications

Adjust auto exposure.
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( Au t o )
Back Close
Inch specifications
Lighter Darker

Default setting End
Copy D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Bypass BOX Counter

Adjust auto exposure. Back Close
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( Au t o )
Lighter Darker
Default setting End
Copy Default setting - Copy default



NOTE
2 Select “Adjust auto exposure.” in the settings list on the left
The “Adjust auto exposure.” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4 screen in step 2.
Copy default Close
Default menu
Adjust auto exposure.
Setting mode
Standard
Up
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Standard
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed) Standard Down
Adj. manual expo.(Text) Standard
Adj. manual expo.(Photo) Standard Change #
Default setting 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the

Copy default Close

Up
Adjust auto exposure. Standard
Down
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed) Standard
Default setting
7-73
● Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)
Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level
for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software exposure as desired.
when using the optional scanner functions of this copier. Inch specifications
Adjust auto exposure (OCR) Back Close

Inch specifications Lighter Darker

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter

Machine Document Register Print User Adjust auto exposure (OCR) Back Close
Metric specifications Lighter Darker

Copy


2 Select “Adjust auto exposure (OCR)” in the settings list on

the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change
#” key.
The “Adjust auto exposure (OCR)” screen will be displayed. 4 screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Up
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
Adj. manual expo.(Text)
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard Change #
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-74
● Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value
when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality. exposure as desired.
Inch specifications

Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , Tex t + P h o t o )
Back Close
Inch specifications
Lighter Darker
Default setting End
Bypass BOX Counter

Adj. manual expo.(Mixed) Back Close
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , Tex t + P h o t o )
Lighter Darker
Default setting End



NOTE
2 Select “Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed)” in the settings list on the
key.
The “Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4 screen in step 2.

Copy default Close
Up
Standard
Standard Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-75
● Manual exposure adjustment (text mode)
when the text mode is selected for the image quality. exposure as desired.
Inch specifications

Adj. manual expo. (Text)
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , Tex t )
Back Close
Inch specifications
Lighter Darker

Default setting End
Bypass BOX Counter

Adj. manual expo. (Text) Back Close
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , Tex t )
Lighter Darker
Default setting End



NOTE
2 Select “Adj. manual expo. (Text)” in the settings list on the
key.
The “Adj. manual expo. (Text)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4 screen in step 2.

Copy default Close
Up
Standard
Standard Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-76
● Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)
when the photo mode is selected for the image quality. exposure as desired.
Inch specifications

Adj. manual expo. (Photo)
A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , P h o t o )
Back Close
Inch specifications
Lighter Darker

Default setting End
Bypass BOX Counter

Adj. manual expo. (Photo) Back Close
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , P h o t o )
Lighter Darker
Default setting End



NOTE
2 Select “Adj. manual expo. (Photo)” in the settings list on the
key.
The “Adj. manual expo. (Photo)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
4 screen in step 2.

Copy default Close
Up
Standard
Standard Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-77
● Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Sort
3 Touch the “Sort:On” key under “Sort” if you want to make the
Sort mode the default setting in the initial mode.
and/or the Finished modes will be the default setting in the initial Inch specifications
mode.
Sort Back Close
Select default mode for sort, ON or OFF.
Sort Offset

Sort : Off
Sort : On
Off
On
Inch specifications

Copy
Language Management Close
default Sort Back
Bypass BOX Counter Select default mode of sort, ON or OFF.

Sort Group
Sort : Off Off
Sort : On 1 set
Default setting
Copy
End
4 Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key under “Offset” [“Group”] if you
want to make the Finished mode the default setting in the
Bypass Hard Disk Counter initial mode.

• In metric specification copiers, if you select “Sort:Off” under
“Sort”, the “1 set” key that appears under “Group” will
change to the “Output each page” key.
NOTE
Select “Sort” in the settings list on the left side of the touch
2 panel and then touch the “Change #” key. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
The “Sort” screen will be displayed. “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close
screen in step 2.
Up
Sort Sort : On / Offset : Off
Auto Rotation Rotate
Down
Default margin width Left 1/4" 0"
Default erase width
Preset limit
Border 1/4" Center 1/2"
999 Set Change #
Default setting
Metric specifications Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Copy default Close

Up
Sort Sort : On / Group : Off
Down
Default margin width Left 6mm 0mm
Default erase width Border 6mm Center 12mm
Preset limit 999 Set Change #
Default setting
7-78
● Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Auto
3 Touch the “Rotate” key if you want to make the Auto Rotation
mode the default setting in the initial mode.
Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. Inch specifications
Auto Rotation Back Close

Select default mode for Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.
No Rotate
Inch specifications
Rotate

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Auto Rotation Back Close

Select default mode of Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.
No rotate
Rotate

Copy

NOTE
2 Select “Auto Rotation” in the settings list on the left side of

The “Auto Rotation” screen will be displayed. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Up
Auto Rotation
Default margin width
Default erase width
Preset limit
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
999 Set Change #
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-79
● Margin width
Perform the following procedure to determine the default value of the
3 Touch the “O” key or the “P” key, and the “M” key or the “N”
key, as desired, to change the default margins and margin
location and width of the margins in the margin mode. widths to the desired setting.
Inch specifications

A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f m a r g i n w i d t h .
Front page
Back Close
(0~3/4)
Inch specifications 0 "
Default setting / Counter (0~3/4)
Left 1
/4 "
Default setting End
Bypass BOX Counter

Default margin width Back Close
Adjust default setting of margin width.
Front page
(0~18)
Metric specifications 0 mm
Default setting / Counter (0~18)
Left 6 mm
Default setting End



2 Select “Default margin width” in the settings list on the left

The “Default margin width” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
screen in step 2.

Copy default Close
Up
Down
Default erase width
Preset limit
999 Set Change # 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-80
● Erased border width
Perform the following procedure to determine the default value for the
3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key under the “Border” and
“Center” fields to change the displayed widths to those
width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes. desired.
Inch specifications

Default erase width
A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f e ra s e w i d t h .
Back Close
(0~3/4) (0~11/2)
Inch specifications Border 1

/4 " Center 1
/2 "
Default setting / Counter + +

– –
Default setting End
Bypass BOX Counter

Default erase width Back Close
Adjust default setting of erase width.
(0~18) (0~36)
Metric specifications Border 6 mm Center 12 mm
Default setting / Counter + +

– –
Default setting End



2 Select “Default erase width” in the settings list on the left side
of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.
The “Default erase width” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
screen in step 2.

Copy default Close
Up
Down
Default erase width
Preset limit
999 Set Change # 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-81
● Copy limit
Perform the following procedure to set the limit for the number of
3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the copy limit to
the desired setting.
copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time. Inch specifications
Preset limit Back Close

1
S e t o u t p u t q u a n t i t y.
~
Set
Inch specifications +

Copy
Bypass BOX Counter
Machine Document Register Print User Preset limit Back Close

S e l e c t c o py p r e s e t i n o n e j o b ( # key ) .
Set

Copy

NOTE
2 Select “Preset limit” in the settings list on the left side of the
The “Preset limit” screen will be displayed. 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close

Up
Auto Rotation
Default erase width
Preset limit
Rotate
Left 1/4" 0"
999 Set Change #
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-82
● Repeat copying ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to prohibit
3 If you want to prohibit repeat copying, touch the “Off” key. If
you want to make repeat copying the default setting in the
repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the initial mode, touch the “On” key.
default setting in the initial mode. Inch specifications
Modify Copy Back Close
NOTE S e l e c t O N t o a c t i va t e M o d i f y C o py o r O F F
t o i n a c t i va t e i t .
Function D e fa u l t
This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed.
Off Off
On On

Inch specifications
Modify copy Back Close
Default setting / Counter Select ON to activate Modify Copy or OFF
to inactivate it.
Function Default
Default setting End
Copy Off Off

Bypass BOX Counter On On


Default setting / Counter NOTE
Default setting End If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the
Copy
default Language Management “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

4 screen in step 2.
2 Select “Modify Copy” in the settings list on the left side of the
The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed. to the “Default setting”screen.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Copy default Close

Up
Preset limit 999 Set
Modify Copy On / Default Off
Down
Display register key On
Customize(Main function)
Customize(Add function) Change #
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Modify copy On / Default Off
Down
Display"Register"key On
Default setting
7-83
● Registration keys ON/OFF
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to allow a
3 If you want the “Register” key to be displayed, touch the “On”
key. If you do NOT want it to be displayed, touch the “Off”
“Register” key to be displayed in the screen for those function and key.
modes which can be registered under the registration keys. Functions Inch specifications
and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through
the “Register” key. Display register key Back Close
S e l e c t O n e t o u c h key O n / O f f.
A bl e t o u s e R e g i s t e r key o n e a c h s c r e e n .

On
Off
Inch specifications
Copy
default Language Management Display"Register"key Back Close
Bypass BOX Counter S e l e c t t o s h ow R e g i s t e r key O n / O f f.

setting Management check A bl e t o u s e R e g i s t e r key t o r e g i s t e r / d e l e t e a t e a c h p a g e.

On
Off
Default setting End
Copy

NOTE
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment
2 Select “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] in the

settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
the “Change #” key.
The “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] screen
will be displayed.
Inch specifications

Copy default Close 6 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the
Up
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-84
● Customize screen layout (Main functions)
Perform the following procedure to change the order of the main
3 If you want to change the order of the basic functions and
modes, touch the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key to select the item
functions and modes that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User you want to move. Then touch the “Move ahead” key or the
choice” tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way “Move behind” [“Move backward”] key to move that item and
you use the copier. change the order of display. The final display of the basic
functions and modes will be in accordance with the numbers
in the list and those shown in the tabs to the left of that list.

Inch specifications
Customize(Main function) Back Close

Inch specifications
Basic Register mode
Default setting / Counter Exposure Mode

Reduce/Enlarge
Move
Ahead
Sort/Finished
Move
Default setting End 1/2 sided Behind
User choice
Original size
Copy Orig. quality
Bypass BOX Counter

Customize(Main function) Back Close

Basic Register mode
Exposure Mode Move
Default setting / Counter Reduce/Enlarge ahead
Sort/Finished
Move
1/2 sided backward
Default setting End User choice
Original size
Quality orig
Copy

setting Management check Default setting - Copy default
NOTE
Select “Customize(Main function)” in the settings list on the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
2 left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”
key.
The “Customize(Main function)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications 4 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2.
Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting contents of the “Basic” tab.

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-85
● Customize screen layout (Add functions)
Perform the following procedure to add often-used functions and/or
3 If you want to add functions and/or modes to the “User
choice” tab, touch the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key under the list
modes, or to change the order of their layout, in order to make the on the right to select the item you want to add. Then touch
display more appropriate to the way you use the copier. the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key under the list on the left to
select in what order you want it to be added in that tab.
Finally, touch the “b” key to add the selected item to the
“User choice” tab.
Inch specifications
Inch specifications
Customize(Add function) Back Close
Default setting / Counter Basic Register mode Addition mode

Margin None
Default setting End Border Erase Select paper
Combine Combine
Copy None Auto Selection
default Language Management User choice
None Batch scanning
None Margin
Bypass BOX Counter

default Management orig. size report Adjustment D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t
Metric specifications Customize(Add function) Back Close
Default setting / Counter Basic Register mode Addition Mode

Margin None
Erace Select paper
Default setting End
Merge Merge
None Auto selection
Copy User choice
default Language Management None Batch scanning
None Margin

default Management orig. size report Adjustment Default setting - Copy default
NOTE
2 Select “Customize(Add function)” in the settings list on the
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
key.
The “Customize(Add function)” screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications

screen in step 2.
Copy default Close
Default menu
Preset limit
Modify Copy
999 Set
Setting mode
On / Default Off
Up
Down
Default setting

Copy default Close

Up
Down
Default setting
7-86
3. Multi-bypass tray paper settings

(1) Paper size and type 3 Specify the desired method of selecting the paper size.
If you select “Auto Detection” here, select the desired unit of
Perform the following procedure in order to use the multi-bypass tray measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as well, and then go directly
to feed copy paper. to step 5. If you want to select a custom paper size, touch the
“Input size” and then go to the next step.
[Default Setting/Counter] key. Inch specifications
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.
Default setting / Counter A4
Bypass setting Back Close
Paper size Unit Paper type
Auto Plain Select

Centimeter paper type
Detection
Input size Inch

Others
Standard

Touch the “Bypass setting” key.

2 The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.
Auto
Detection
Centimeter Plain Select
paper type
Input size Inch
Inch specifications Others

Standard

Default setting End
Copy
default Language Management 4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the
displayed sizes (length and width) to the desired settings.
Bypass BOX Counter
setting Management check * In metric specification copiers, the desired sizes can also
Machine Document Register Print User be entered directly by touching the corresponding “#-Keys”
key and then using the keypad.
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter 297x432mm

Default setting End Paper size (37/8~115/8) (57/8~17)

Paper type
Copy
Y 1111/16 " X 169/16 "
Auto Select
Detection + + Plain
paper type

Input size
– –
Others
default Management orig. size report Adjustment Standard # keys # keys

Paper size (98~297) (148~432)

Paper type
Y 297 mm X 420 mm
Auto Select
Detection + + Plain
paper type
Input size
– –
Others
Standard #-Keys #-Keys
7-87
5 Touch the “Select paper type” key.

The “Select paper type” screen will be displayed.
(2) Selecting other standard sizes
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out onto other
6 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be
used, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will
standard sizes of special paper.
return to the screen in step 4.

[Default setting/Counter] key.
Inch specifications
Thick
Plain Labels Cardstock Custom 1 Custom 5
paper
Transp-
Recycled Color Envelope Custom 2 Custom 6
arency
High
Vellum Bond Letterhead Custom 4 Custom 8
quality

Thick
Plain Labels Cardstock Custom 1 Custom 5
paper
Transp-
2 Touch the “Bypass setting” key.

arency Recycled Colour Envelope Custom 2 Custom 6

The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.
High
Vellum Bond Letterhead quality Custom 4 Custom 8
Inch specifications
to the screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel
Default setting End
Copy
Language Management
will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab. default
Bypass BOX Counter



Default setting End
Copy


Touch the “Others Standard” key.

3
Inch specifications
Default setting / Counter A4
Auto Plain Select

Detection
Input size Inch

Others
Standard

Auto Plain Select

Detection
Input size Inch
Others
Standard
7-88
4 Touch the “Select size” key. The “Select size” screen will be
displayed. 6 Touch the “Select paper type” key. The “Select paper type”
screen will be displayed. Touch the key that corresponds to
the type of paper you want to use, and then touch the “Close”
Inch specifications
key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.
Paper Size
Default setting / Counter ISO B5
Inch specifications

Auto Select Select
EX Plain
Detection size paper type
Thick
Input size Plain Labels Cardstock Custom 1 Custom 5
paper
Others Transp-
Standard Recycled Color Envelope Custom 2 Custom 6
arency
High
Metric specifications Vellum Bond Letterhead
quality
Custom 4 Custom 8


Auto Select Select
EX Plain
Detection size paper type
Thick
Input size Plain Labels Cardstock Custom 1 Custom 5
paper
Transp-
Others Recycled Colour Envelope Custom 2 Custom 6
Standard arency
High
Vellum Bond Letterhead quality Custom 4 Custom 8
5 Touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper you want
to use, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will
return to the screen in step 4. 7 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will
Inch specifications return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

ISO B5 Comm.#10 EX 81/2x13"
Envelope OUFUKU
Comm.#9 8K
DL HAGAKI
Envelope Comm.
YOUKEI 2 16 K
C5 #6-3/4
Envelope
MO YOUKEI 4
C4

ISO B5 Comm.#10 EX 81/2x13"
Envelope OUFUKU
Comm.#9 8K
DL HAGAKI
Envelope Comm.
YOUKEI 2 16 K
C5 #6-3/4
Envelope
MO YOUKEI 4
C4
7-89
4. Original size registration

Perform the following procedure in order to register a custom original
size that can be used under the “Original size selection” procedure. 3 Select of the “Original size (custom 1)” to “Original size
(custom 4)” settings under the “Default menu” column on the
key.
The corresponding setting screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications

Register orig. size Close

Original size (custom 1) 2x2"
Down
Change #
Default setting

Register orig. size Close

Touch the “Register orig. size” key.
2 The “Register orig. size” screen will be displayed.
Original size (custom 1)
50x50mm
50x50mm
50x50mm
Up
Down
Original size (custom 4) 50x50mm
Inch specifications Change #
Default setting
Default setting End
Copy
default Language
Bypass
Management
BOX Counter
4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the
displayed sizes (Y = width and X = length) to the desired
settings.
If you do not want to register a custom original size, touch
the “Off” key.
Original size (custom 1) Back Close

Default setting / Counter Register custom size original.
(2~115/8) (2~17)
Default setting End " "
2 2
Copy
Off

setting Management check On

Default setting - Register orig. size
Original size (custom 1) Back Close

Register custom size original.
(50~297) (50~432)
50 mm 50 mm
Off
On
Default setting - Register orig. size
screen in step 3.
screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-90
5. Drum refresh
Perform the following procedure if the copy image becomes blurred or
if white spots which are not on the originals appear on the copies. The 4 Touch the “Drum refresh” key. The “Drum refresh” screen will
be displayed.
drum refreshing operation will take approximately 5 minutes.
Inch specifications
1 Set 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", A4 or A3 size paper on the multi-

bypass tray.
User adjustment Close
Drum
refresh

Default setting

User adjustment Close
Drum
refresh
Default setting
3 Touch the “User adjustment” key.
Inch specifications

Default setting End
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter



Default setting End
Copy


7-91
5 Touch the “On” key. The drum refreshing process will begin.
Inch specifications
Drum refresh Close
Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear

on the image.
On
Default setting - User adjustment
Drum refresh Close
Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear

on the image.
On
Default setting - User adjustment
The “Now drum refreshing.” message will appear and the

paper is fed from the multi-bypass tray to execute drum
refreshing.
Inch specifications
Now drum refreshing.
Orig. page Count/Set Output
---------- 11x81/2"
1 sided 1 sided
Now drum refreshing.
Original Count/Set Output
---------- A4
1-sided 1-sided
Rtop / rear Sort Inner tray
NOTE
To cancel drum refreshing, press the [Stop/Clear] key.
When drum refreshing completes after ejecting the paper,

the touch panel will return to the “Drum refresh” screen.


8 Touch the “End” key.

The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-92
6. Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report
Perform this procedure when you want to check, on the touch panel,
the total count of copies, etc., made on this machine as a whole. You 3 The total number of copies and printouts made will be
displayed.
can also print out the information as a counter report. If you want to print out a counter report, touch the “Print
report” key.
NOTES Inch specifications
• You can also check the total number of printouts made under each Counter check Close
of the optional printer, scanner a fax functions. Number print.

Black & White: 1,073 ------- ------- 1,073
• You can additionally check the number of originals scanned on this
machine.
Num. of pages
Copy scanner Fax Total
Original: 3 ------- ------- 3
Print
report
Default setting

[Default Setting/Counter] key. Metric specifications
Counter check Close
Number print.
Black & White: 1,073 ------- ------- 1,073
Num. of pages
Original: 3 ------- ------- 3
Print
report
Default setting
NOTE
Make sure there is 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper loaded in one of the
drawers[cassettes] when you print out the counter report.
2 Touch the “Counter check” key.

The “Counter check” screen will be displayed. 4 Once you are finished checking the counts, touch the “Close”
key.
Inch specifications The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.
Default setting / Counter Inch specifications

Default setting End Counter check Close
Copy Number print.

default Language Management Copy Printer Fax Total
Black & White: 1,073 ------- ------- 1,073
Bypass BOX Counter

Num. of pages
Original: 3 ------- ------- 3
Print
report
Default setting

Default setting End Counter check Close
Copy Number print.

default Language Management Copy Printer Fax Total
Black & White: 1,073 ------- ------- 1,073

Num. of pages
Original: 3 ------- ------- 3
Print
report
Default setting
5 Touch the “End” key.

7-93
7. Box management default settings

Perform the following settings in order to manage the “boxes” that are used under the document management functions.
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed.
(1) Box settings
Setting Description Reference

page
● Document list print out This procedure will allow you to print out a list of all of the images stored in the box for the form 7-95
overlay mode, of the documents stored in the shared data box or of the documents stored in the
synergy print boxes.
● Reset box This procedure will delete all of the image data that is stored in the “Form” box, as well as the 7-96
documents stored in the shared data box and the synergy print boxes. Make absolutely certain
that you do not need the corresponding data before you attempt to delete it.
● Box name & password / This procedure will allow you to change the name and password for any one of the synergy print 7-97
Clear data in box boxes as well as delete at one time all of the data registered in any one box. If you register a
password for any of these boxes, you will need to enter the registered password in order to print
out or delete any documents that are stored win that box.
● Document save time This procedure will allow you to select the length of time that will elapse before each job in a 7-98
synergy print box is automatically deleted. Set this time to any number of days between 1 and 7.
* This setting cannot be made independently for each box.
Touch the “Document Management” key.

(2) Accessing the box management default settings 2
Inch specifications
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the
“Document Management” screen for each of the various box Default setting / Counter
management default settings.
Default setting End
Copy

default Language
Bypass
setting
Management
BOX
Management
Counter
check
The “Default setting/Counter” screen will be displayed. Machine Document Register Print User

Default setting End
Copy


7-94
3 Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.

(3) Making box management default settings
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”. Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired
If the entered code matched the registered one, the setting.
“Document Management” screen will be displayed.
● Document list print out
Inch specifications

1 Touch the “Print the list” key under the box (“Form Box”,
“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) for which you
want to print out the document list.
Inch specifications
Document Management
Document Management Close

Print Print Box Print
the list the list editing the list
Reset Reset Document Reset
Box Box save term Box
Default setting
Document management
Document management Close
4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired box

management default setting.
Print
the list
Print
the list
Box
editing
Print
the list

Box Box saving Box
Inch specifications
Default setting
Document Management
Document Management

Close
2 A document list will be printed out for that box. once print out
is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step
1.
3
Document
Reset
Box
Reset
Box save term
Reset
Box Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the
Default setting
“Default setting”screen. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel
will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
Document management


Box Box saving Box
Default setting
NOTES

• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making box
management default settings” and perform the corresponding
setting(s).
7-95
● Reset box ● Box name & password / Clear data in box
Touch the “Reset Box” key under the box (“Form Box”,
1 “Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) that you want to 1 Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The
“Box editing” screen will be displayed.
delete all data for.
Inch specifications
A verification screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications Document Management

Document Management
Default setting
Default setting Metric specifications
Metric specifications Document management

Document management
Print Print Box Box saving Box
Box Print
Default setting
Box Box saving Box
Default setting

information to be modified, or enter its number using the

Inch specifications
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key.
Inch specifications
Stop
Box editing Cancel
(with #key)
Shared Data Box 002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 017 QRST_0200105
003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106

Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?

Yes No
Enter
1/ 5
Default setting - Document management
Stop
(With # key)
Shared Data Box
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 017 QRST_0200105
003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106
Reset this box. Do you really want to reset?

Yes No
Enter
1/5
Default setting - Document management
If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be
deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step
1. If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the
screen in step 1 without deleting any data.
“Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The touch
panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-96
3 If you want to change the name of that box, first select “Box
name” and then touch the “Change #” key. Enter the new 6 If you want to delete all of the data in that box, select “Reset
Box”. A verification screen will be displayed.
name as desired.
Inch specifications 7 Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
Box007 Close
Stop
Default menu Setting mode Reset

Box Box No. : 007
Box name ABCD_0000101
Password (No register) Box name : ABCD_0000101
Change # Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?
Default setting - Document Management - Box editing Yes No
Box 007 Close
Stop
Default menu Setting mode Reset 007

Box Box No. :
Box name ABCD_0000101
Password (No register) Box name : ABCD_0000101
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?

Change #
Yes No
Default setting - Document management - Box editing
NOTE If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be
deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on 3.
entering characters. If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the
screen in step 3 without deleting any data.
screen in step 2.
4 If you want to change the name of that box, first select
“Password” and then touch the “Change #” key. The
“Password” screen will be displayed.
9 screen in step 1. Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will
Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and return to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key.
5 then touch the “Close” key. The new password will be The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in
step 3.
Inch specifications
Password Back Close
Enter new password.
Password (Enter by #key)
Clear
Default setting - Document Management - Box editings - 007
Password Back Close
Enter new password.
Password (Enter #-key)
Clear
Default settund - Document management - Box editing - 007
NOTES
• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.

• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the
“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field,
touch the “Close” key.
7-97
● Document save time
Touch the “Document save term” [“Document saving”] key

1 under “Synergy Print Box”. The “Document data saving term”
[“Document data save period”] screen will be displayed.
Inch specifications
Document Management


Default setting
Document management


Box Box saving Box
Default setting
2 Touch the “Set save term” [“Set save period”] key and then
touch “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed save time
to the desired setting.
Inch specifications
Document data saving term Back Close
Set saving term for documents in synergy print box.
(1~7)
Set save
term
7 Days
No time
limit +
–
Default setting - Document Management
Document data save period Back Close

Set save period for documents in synergy print box.
(1~7)
Set save
period
7 Days
No time
limit +
–
Default Setting - Document management
NOTES
• The save time can be set to any number of days between 1 and 7.
The factory default setting is for “7 Days”.
• If you want the data to be saved indefinitely, touch the “No time limit”
key to highlight it.
screen in step 1.
to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The
touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-98
8. Hard disk management

Perform the following procedure to access the “HDD management
mode” screen and check available space and/or delete any invalid 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
data on the optional Hard Disk. 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
If the entered code matched the registered one, the “HDD
[Default setting/Counter] key.
Management mode” [“HDD Management”] screen will be
displayed.
Inch specifications
2 Touch the “BOX Management” [“Hard Disk Management”]

key.
Inch specifications

Default setting End
Copy
default Language Management 4 Touch the “On” key under “Check HDD capacity” (left side of
the touch panel). The overall size of the hard disk, as well
Bypass BOX Counter
setting Management check as the currently available space, will be displayed. If you
Machine
default
Document
Management
Register
orig. size
Print
report
User
Adjustment want to delete any invalid data, go to the next step. If you
are finished with this procedure, go directly to step 6.
Inch specifications
HDD management mode
HDD management mode Close
Default setting End
Check HDD capacity Delete invalid data
Copy Able to check the free space and capacity Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
of HDD.

On On
Default setting
HDD management mode

HDD management Close
Check HDD capacity Delete invalid data

Able to check the free space and capacity Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
of HDD.
On On
Default setting
7-99
5 Touch the “On” key under “Delete invalid data” (right side of
the touch panel). The operation to delete invalid data will
start.
Inch specifications
HDD management mode

HDD management mode Close
Delete invalid data.

Item Setting mode
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
Free Space 18, 569 MB
Capacity 19, 092 MB
On
Default setting
HDD management mode

HDD management Close
Delete invalid data.

Item Setting mode
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.
Free space 18, 569 MB
Capacity 19, 092 MB
On
Default setting
6 screen in step 2.Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.
7-100
9. Report print out

Perform the following procedure to print out one of the following
reports. 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.
< Copy report > 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.
Lists all of the values for the copy default settings.
Inch specifications
< Machine report >
Lists all of the values for the machine default settings. Enter the administrator number Close
< Toner coverage report>

Lists the average toner density (black ratio) for each size of copy
paper used under each of the copy, printer and fax functions of this
machine.
NOTE
Make sure that 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper is loaded in one of the Metric specifications
drawers[cassettes].

NOTE
It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.

4 Once the “Print report menu” screen is displayed, touch the

“Copy report” key, the “Machine report” key or the “Toner
coverage” key, as appropriate.
Inch specifications
2 Touch the “Print report” key. Print report

Inch specifications Print report menu Close
Copy Toner
Default setting / Counter report coverage
Machine
report
Default setting End
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter Default setting


default Management orig. size report Adjustment Metric specifications
Print report
Metric specifications Print report menu Close
Copy Toner
Default setting / Counter report coverage
Machine
report
Default setting End
Copy
Default setting

7-101
5 The “Printing report” screen will be displayed and printing of

the corresponding report will start.
Inch specifications
Printing report.
Orig. page Count/Set Output

Cancel
11x81/2"
1 sided Cancel
Sort Inner tray
Printing report.
Or iginal Count/set Output
Plain
1-sided Cancel
Sort Inner tray
NOTE
If you want to cancel print out of the corresponding report, touch the
“Cancel” key.
When the report is complete, the touch panel will return to

the screen in step 4.
screen in step 2.
7-102
10. Changing the language used for messages

You can select the language that will be used on the touch panel.
3 Touch the key that corresponds to the language that you
want to use.
The available languages are as follows: The language used on the touch panel will change to that
Inch specification copiers: selected.
English, French (“Français”), Spanish (“Español”) and Japanese
Inch specifications
(“ ”)
Metric specification copiers: Language Stop
English, German (“DEUTSCH”), French (“FRANÇAIS”), Italian

(“ITALIANO”) and Spanish (“ESPAÑOL”)
English Français Español

The “Default setting/Counter” screen will be displayed.
Default setting
Language Stop
English Deutsch Français
Español Italiano
Default setting
2 Touch the “Language” key. The “Language” screen will be

displayed.
Inch specifications

Default setting End
Copy
Bypass BOX Counter



Default setting End
Copy


7-103
11. Entering characters

Use the following screens to enter characters when registering names Capital keyboard
for programs and for departments, etc.
A Limit:16 letters including #

(1) Character input screens AllDel. Del. prev
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + -
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l
Inch specifications A S D F G H J K L : "
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Letter keyboard
1 6 7 9 8 0
Numeral/Symbol keyboard
A Limit:16 letters including # Name to display Stop End

AllDel. Del. prev Limit:16 letters including #
A
AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " # $ %
& ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = >
? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ' { l } ~
z x c v b n m , . /

2 3 4 5
1 Entry field
Displays entered information.
2 “Capital” key
Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters.
3 “Letter” key
Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters.
4 “Num. /Sym.” key
Touch this key when you want to enter numerals and symbols.
5 “Space” key
Touch this key when you want to enter a space.
6 “AllDel.” key
Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have
been entered to this point.
7 “r” and “R” keys
Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor.
8 “Del. prev” key
Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of
the cursor.
9 “Stop” key
Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return
to the previous screen.
0 “End” key
Touch this key when you want to register the entered information.
7-104
Metric specifications Capital keyboard
Letter keyboard Name to display Stop End

1 7 8 0 9 ! A
AllDel. Del. prev
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ~
Name to display Stop End Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l `
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key A S D F G H J K L : "

A
AllDel. Del. prev Z X C V B N M < > ?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = ` Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
Symbol 1 keyboard
z x c v b n m , . /
Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space Name to display Stop End
A Limit:16 letters including #

AllDel. Del. prev
2 3 4 5 6
1 Entry field
Displays entered information.
2 “Capital” key Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space
Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters.

3 “Letter” key
Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters. Symbol 2 keyboard
4 “Symbol 1” key Name to display Stop End
Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols. A Limit:16 letters including #
5 “Symbol 2” key AllDel. Del. prev
Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols.

6 “Space” key
Touch this key when you want to enter a space.
7 “AllDel.” key Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space
Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have
been entered to this point.
8 “r” and “R” keys
Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor.
9 “Del. prev” key
Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of
the cursor.
0 “Stop” key
Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return
to the previous screen.
! “End” key
Touch this key when you want to register the entered information.
7-105
(2) Character input procedure 3 Touch the “b”, “c”, “d” and “e” keys, in that order, on the
keyboard.
Inch specifications
[Example] “Abcde”
1 Touch the “Capital” key. The “Capital” will be displayed. Touch Abcde Limit:16 letters including #
AllDel. Del. prev
the “A” key on the keyboard.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
Inch specifications q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \
Name to display Stop End z x c v b n m , . /

AllDel. Del. prev
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + -
A S D F G H J K L : "
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Abcde Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
Name to display Stop End z x c v b n m , . /
Limit:16 letters including # Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space

AllDel. Del. prev
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + -
A
W
S
E
D
R
F
T
G
Y
H
U
J
I
K
O
L
P
:
{
"
} l `
4 Once you have finished entering the information, touch the
“End” key.
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Inch specifications
Abcde Limit:16 letters including #
2 Touch the “Letter” key.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AllDel.
8 9 0 - = `
Del. prev
Inch specifications
Name to display Stop End a s d f g h j k l ; '
Limit:16 letters including # z x c v b n m , . /

A
AllDel. Del. prev Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + -
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space Limit: 16 letters inc. # key
Abcde
AllDel. Del. prev
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ `
Name to display Stop End a s d f g h j k l ; '
Limit:16 letters including # z x c v b n m , . /

A
AllDel. Del. prev Capital Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Space
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ~
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l `
Z X C V B N M < > ?
7-106
3 Document Processor part names

(1) Document Processor
The Document Processor automatically feeds one-sided originals one 6
by one for scanning. It also reverses two-sided originals automatically
for duplex copying and page separation copying. 5 2
1
1 Original table
(Place the originals here.)
2 Original insertion guides
(Adjust the guides to the width of the originals.)
3 Document Processor open/close handle
1 Originals that can be used with the Document Processor
(Hold this handle when opening and closing the Document
• Sheet originals only Processor.)
• Original weights: Single-sided original of 35 g/m2 to 160 g/m2 two- 4 Original eject cover
sided original of 50 g/m2 to 120g g/m2 (Copied originals are stored here.)
• Original sizes: 11" x 17"/A3 (maximum) to 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"/A5R 5 Document Processor original cover
(minimum) (Open this cover to remove an original misfed in the Document
• Capacity: Processor.)
100 sheets (8 1/2" x 11"/A4 and smaller, 75 g/m2 or 80 g/m2) 6 Original set indicator
70 sheets (8 1/2" x 14"/Folio and larger, 75 g/m2 or 80 g/m2) (Lights green when the originals are set.)
30 sheets in auto selection mode
2 Precautions for the use of Document Processor

Do not use any of the originals given below with the Document
Processor. Also do not set originals with punch holes or tear-off strips
positioned at the leading edge.
• Transparency films
• Carbon paper and extremely creased or folded originals, originals of
sort material such as vinyl
• Non-square originals, wet originals, originals with adhesive tape or
glue
• Originals bundled with a paper clip or staple (if inevitable, remove
the paper clip or staple and straighten out the creases and folds
before setting the originals)
• Clipped out originals, originals with slippery surface
• Originals with still-wet whiteout
• Originals with creases (if inevitable, straighten out the creases
before setting the originals)
8-1
4 How to set originals in the Document Processor
IMPORTANT!
Adjust the original insertion guides to the original size. Do not set originals exceeding the limit indicated on the sticker
1 attached on the rear original insertion guide. Setting more originals
than specified may cause original misfeed.
5 How to set originals on the platen

When using an original that cannot be set in the Document Processor,
such as a book or magazine, open the Document Processor and
place it on the platen.
1 Hold the Document Processor open/close handle and open

the Document Processor.
* Before opening the Document Processor, check that no
original is present on the original table or original eject
cover. If present, the original may fall off when the
Document Processor is opened.
NOTE
Before setting the originals in the Document Processor, check that no

original from the previous operation is remaining on the original eject
cover. Originals remaining on the original eject cover may cause
original misfeed.
2 Set the originals on the original table in correct sequence

with the side to be copied facing upward. Securely insert the
leading edge of the originals into the Document Processor as
far as they will go.
2 Set the original with the side to be copied facing downward.

Be sure to align the original with the original size scales.
* When setting large size paper such as 8 1/2" x 11", A4R or

larger, pull out the support extension.
8-2
6 Auto selection/Filing mode
3 Hold the Document Processor open/close handle and close
the Document Processor. With this mode, when you are using the Document Processor without
pressing one of the paper size keys, and thereby, specifying a desired
paper size, originals will be checked one by one for their size, and you
can select to either have paper of the same size as each original
selected automatically (auto selection) or to have the originals all
copied onto one single size of copy paper (filing).
11"✕17" 11"✕8 1/2"

(A3) (A4)
8 1/2"✕14" 8 1/2"✕11"
(Folio) (A4R)
B4 B5
IMPORTANT!
Do not press the Document Processor against the platen with force.
Doing so many cause damage to the glass material.
IMPORTANT!
• You can set up to 30 originals in the Document Processor in this

mode.
CAUTION Inch specifications

• Only 11" x 8 1/2" and 11" x 17", or 8 1/2" x 14" and 8 1/2" x 11", size
originals can be used together in this mode, and the originals must
DO NOT leave the Document Processor open as be arranged together so that their widths coincide.
there is a danger of personal injury. Metric specifications
• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, or A4R and Folio, size originals can be
used together in this mode, and the originals must be arranged
together so that their widths coincide.
• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, size originals can be used together in
this mode, and the originals must be arranged together so that their
widths coincide.
● Differing finished sizes (Auto selection)

Each original will copied onto the same size copy paper as that
original.
8-3
● Matching finished sizes (Filing)
All originals will copied onto the same size copy paper.
4 Specify the size of the very first original to be copied and
then touch the “Close” key.
Inch specifications
Place originals in Document processor. Paper size Set
11x81/2"
Auto Selection Register Back Close

1st pg. orig.
Off 81/2x11"/
11x81/2" Able to scan mix size originals at
one time using Document processor,
Auto 81/2x14"/
selection and copy them in unified paper size.
11x17"
Electronic
Filing
Place originals in Document processor. Paper size Set
Set the originals to be copied in the Document Processor.

1 Auto selection
1st original
Register Back Close
2 Press the [Auto Selection] key.

The lamp in the [Auto Selection] key will light and the auto
Off
Auto
selection
A4
A4
A3 /B4
Folio
/B5
/
/
Able to scan different size originals at
one time using Document processor,
and copy them to unified paper size.
selection/filing mode screen will be displayed. Electronic

Filing
NOTE
In order to have the binding direction set properly for stapling or hole
punching, etc., finished copies, be sure to specify the size of the very
first original being copied.
5 Select the desired drawer[cassette].
Inch specifications
Paper Size Set
3 Touch the “Auto selection” key or the “Electronic Filing” key,

as appropriate. 11x81/2"
Combine
Plain Orig.image
1
8 /2x11" quality
APS AMS Sort:Off
Color Reduce
If you selected “Auto selection”, go directly to step 6. 11x81/2" Bypass Auto
Sort:On
/Enlarge
11x81/2"
If you selected “Electronic Filing”, go to the next step.
Inch specifications
Paper size Set
Paper Size Set
Auto Selection Register Back Close

Ready to copy.
Merge copy
Plain Image
quality
Off Able to copy mix size originals at APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/
one time using Document processor.
Auto Bypass Auto Enlarge
selection
Electronic Exposure Reduce/
Recycled Sort/
Filing mode Enlarge Finished
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Auto selection Register Back Close
Copying will start.
Off Able to copy mixed size originals at

one time using Document processor.
Auto
selection
Electronic
Filing
8-4
IMPORTANT!
(2) Paper Feeder
• If copies come out curled or are tacked unevenly, turn the paper in
Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer[cassette] in the main the drawer[cassette] over.
body can be added. • When copying onto special paper such as OHP film and other
Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the transparencies, use Non-sort mode.
standard drawer[cassette] in the main unit.
* Paper misfed in the optional Paper Feeder can be removed by
opening its left cover.
1 Copying in the Sort:ON mode

This mode automatically sorts copies made from multiple originals
(3) Paper Feeder into sets identical to the originals.
The Paper Feeder holds up to 3,000 sheets of 11" x 8 1/2" [A4 or B5
(B5 is for Asia-Pacific specification copiers only)] size standard paper. 1 Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go, and then
load up to 1,500 sheets of paper in each rows. Inch specifications
* The cover on the left side of the Paper Feeder is prepared to remove Paper size Set
misfed paper.
paper Combine

mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/ Border Cover

Booklet
Finished Erase Mode
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Merge copy

Up

overlay
Sort/ Erase Cover

(4) Document Finisher Finished
Basic
Mode
User choice
Mode
Function
Booklet
Program
This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the
position of each copy set for ease of sorting. It can staple finished
copy sets and bind them. It is also possible to use the Document
Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes (optional). For
more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for the
Document Finisher.
8-5
2 Copying in the Sort:OFF mode
2 Touch the “Sort:On” key.
(Only for metric specification copiers produced) This mode automatically groups copies made from multiple originals,
The “Output each page” key will be changed to the “1 set” with all the copies produced from an individual original stacked
key. together in one set.
Inch specifications
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set 1 The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
Sort/Finished Register Back Close Inch specifications

Sor t Offset Staple Punch Check direction
original top side. Ready to copy. 11x81/2"
Staple Punch
Sort:Off Off mode
mode Select 2 sided/ Select
paper Combine
Sort:On On
Left top Up
Rear mode /Enlarge Selection scanning
corner
Page # Down
Metric specifications Sort/

Finished
Border
Erase
Cover
Mode
Booklet
Paper size Basic User choice Function Program

Set
Ready to copy.
Sort/Finished Register Back Close Metric specifications
Sor t Group Staple Punch Check direction
original. Ready to copy.
Sort:Off Off Staple Mode Punch Mode
Merge copy
Output paper Split size orig.
Sort:On each page
Left top Exposure Reduce/ Auto Large # of
Up
Back Edge mode Enlarge selection originals
corner
overlay
Sort/ Erase Cover

Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.
3
Booklet
Finished Mode Mode
4 Touch the “Close” key. The message display returns to the

Function screen. 2 Touch the “Sort:Off” key.
Inch specifications

Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
Sort/Finished Register Back Close
6 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The
number of scanned originals will be displayed.
Check direction of
original top side.
Staple Punch
Sort:Off Off mode
mode
Sort:On On
NOTE Rear
Left top
corner
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key. Metric specifications
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
7 Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face

down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the
Check direction of
original.
Sort:Off Off Staple Mode Punch Mode

previous one. Output
Sort:On each page
Left top
8 Remove all of the finished copies from the tray. Back Edge
corner
3 Touch the “On” [“Output each page”] key.
4 Touch the “Close” key. The message display returns to the

Function screen.
8-6
NOTE 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired stapling style.
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all Inch specifications
the originals have been scanned, press the “Scanning finished” key. Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
Staple mode Back Close

Staple Check direction
Check direction of
original top side.
7 Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face

down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the
None
1 staple
Limited number of staple pages.
The limit is set in setting mode.
When selecting staple function

previous one. 2 staples
the offset can not be combined.
Rear
Left top
corner
8 Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.

Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
3 Copying in the Staple mode
Staple Mode Back Close
This mode automatically staples each copy set. Staple Check direction
Check direction of
original.
1 Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.

The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.
None
1 staple
Limited number of pages to be stapled.
The limitation depends on setting mode.
Cannot combine sort function and

staple. Left top
Inch specifications 2 staples Back Edge corner
Paper size Set

* Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration

Combine
paper Separation orig. size (as viewed from the front of the copies).
mode Up

Page # Down
Sort/
Finished
Basic
Border
Erase
User choice
Cover
Mode
Function
Booklet
Program
A A A A
Ready to copy.
Paper size Set
A A A
A A A A
Merge copy

Up

quality
Sort/
Finished
Imag. shift
Erase
Mode
numbering
Cover
Mode
overlay
Booklet
Down
A A A
Set the originals to be copied. Check the direction of the

2 Touch the “Staple mode” key.
The staple mode set-up screen will appear.
4 original top side.
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x81/2"
Set
Check direction of
original top side.
Sort:Off Off
Staple
mode
Punch
mode
NOTE
Sort:On On
Left top
Rear corner
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.
Paper size Set
Ready to copy.
Sort/Finished
Sor t Group Staple
Register
Punch
Back Close 6 Copying will begin and the copies will be automatically
stapled and ejected face down onto the tray.
Check direction
Check direction of
original.
Sort:Off Off
Output
Staple Mode Punch Mode 7 Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.
Sort:On each page

Left top
Back Edge
corner
8-7
4 Copying in the Hole Punch mode (optional)
Copies can be automatically hole punched.
3 <Inch specification copiers>
Touch the “2 holes” key or the “3 holes” key, as appropriate.
The screen to select the hole positioning will appear.
<Metric specification copiers>
1 Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear. Touch the “4 holes” key. The screen to select the hole
positioning will appear.
Inch specifications * If your copier has been set for 2-hole punching, you can
Paper size Set have the “4 holes” key changed in order to display it as a “2
holes” key.
paper Separation orig. size
Combine Inch specifications
mode Up Paper size Set
Page # Down
Punch mode Back Close
Sort/ Border Cover
Booklet Punch P r ev i ew Check direction
Finished Erase Mode
Check direction of
Basic User choice Function Program original top side.
None
Metric specifications 2 holes
Left top
Paper size Set 3 holes Rear
corner
Ready to copy.
Merge copy Metric specifications
Up Paper size Set

Ready to copy.
overlay
Punch Mode Back Close
Finished Mode Mode Punch Preview Check direction
Check direction of
Basic User choice Function Program original.
None
2 Touch the “Punch mode” key.

The hole “Punch” screen will appear.
4 holes
Back Edge
Left top
corner
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Paper size
11x8 /2"
1
Set 4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired position of holes.
Inch specifications
Sort/Finished Register Back Close Paper size Set
Check direction of
original top side. Punch mode Back Close
Staple Punch Punch Position Preview Check direction
Sort:Off Off mode
mode Check direction of
Sort:On On original top side.
Left top None Left side

Rear corner
2 holes Right side
Left top
3 holes Top side Rear corner
Paper size Set
Ready to copy. Metric specifications
Paper size Set
Check direction of
original. Punch Mode Back Close
Punch Position Preview Check direction

Sort:Off Off Staple Mode Punch Mode Check direction of
Output original.
Sort:On each page
Left top None Left side
Back Edge
corner
4 holes Right side
Left top
Top side Back Edge
corner
IMPORTANT!
* Hole punching will be accomplished as shown in the
When the optional punch unit is not installed, the “Punch mode” key illustration (as viewed from the front of the copies).
will not appear. Inch specifications Metric specifications
A A A A
A A A A
A
A
A
A A A A
A A A A
A
A
A
8-8
IMPORTANT!
(6) Document Finisher
The position of the holes on each page may differ very slightly due to
the fact that holes are punched in one sheet at a time. The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts
multiple sets (Sort: ON) or groups copies made from multiple
originals, with all the copies produced from an individual original
grouped together in one set (Sort: OFF). It is also possible to use the
Document Finisher to staple sorted copy sets.
For detailed information on the sort mode, refer to the Operation
Guide for the Document Finisher. For more information on the
corresponding procedures, refer to “(4) Document Finisher” on page
number of scanned originals will be displayed. 8-5 of this guide.
NOTE
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.
7 Copying will begin and the copies will be automatically

punched and ejected face down onto the tray.
8 Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.

* Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration
(at the top and from the front of the copies).
(5) Document Finisher

The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts
multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected. It is also
possible to use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or
punch holes in them for filling purposes.
For detailed information on the sort mode, refer to the Operation
A A
Guide for the Document Finisher. For more information on the
corresponding procedures, refer to “(4) Document Finisher” on page
8-5 of this guide.
(7) Built-in Finisher

The finisher stores a large quantity of copies. It can also sorts multiple
copies into sets by shifting the eject position. Paginated copies can be
stapled, too.
* Stacking mode
If the number of copies to be made in the Non-sort mode is set to a
number greater than the acceptable limit (250 sheets), the finished
2
copies will be ejected onto the Sort tray.
1 Sort tray
2 Finisher tray
8-9
* Sorted copies are ejected to the Sort tray.
3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple holder.
* When setting large size paper such as 8 1/2" x 11", A4R or larger,
pull out the support extension.
4 Hold the staple holder in one hand and the new staple
cartridge in the other and insert the new staple cartridge
making sure the direction of insertion is correct.
* The arrow on the staple cartridge indicates the correct
direction of insertion.
1 Refilling the Stapling Unit
1 Open the stapler front cover towards you.

5 Make sure the new staple cartridge is completely inserted all
the way into the staple holder and then remove the paper
tape covering the staple cartridge.
2 Pull out the staple holder.
6 Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the

Stapling Unit. Once it has been fully inserted, it will click into
place.
8-10
2 Clearing a staple jam
(8) Job Separator
Remove the staple cartridge referring to the “1 Refilling the
1 Stapling Unit”. When using the optional printer function, the paper eject point can be
Push up on the tab “A” on the protective faceplate in order to changed according to the used function, making it easier to sort
raise the faceplate. paper.
Copied paper can be ejected to the Job Separator (upper section).
See “Copy eject location” in Machine default setting on page 7-49.
* The Job Separator can store up to 100 copies. When making 101 or
more copies, copying will stop when 100 copies are made. Copying
A
will resume automatically when the copied sheets are removed.
2 Remove the jammed staple from the tip of the staple

cartridge (the end where staples are set).
(9) Hard Disk

The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and
functions of your copier.
• Job reservation during copying
• Form overlay of registered forms
• Repeat copying
• Document management functions
• Using the output management functions to change the job printing
order, cancel and delete print jobs, and verify content
It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID-codes under
document management.
3 Lower the protective faceplate back into its original position.
4 Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the

Stapling Unit. Once it has been fully inserted, it will click into
place.
5 Lift up the Stapling Unit slightly and than lower it into its
original position.
Close the stapler front cover securely.

6
8-11
(10) Key Counter (12) Printer Kit

The Key Counter determines the number of copies that have been If the Printer Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer.
made. It is useful for copier centralized management on a department For more detailed information, see the printer’s Operation Guide.
or even company level. Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as
* The Key Counter may count up when either data from a computer is a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers. The
printed out or fax pages are printed out. optional printer network kit and hard disk are also available.
• Setting the Key Counter (13) Printer/Scanner Kit

Insert the Key Counter securely into the Key Counter opening.
If the Printer/Scanner Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a
printer or a network scanner. For more detailed information, see the
Operation Guide for the Printer/Scanner Kit. Since the network board
is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer,
allowing access from multiple computers. The optional printer network
kit and hard disk are also available.
NOTE
When the Key Counter function is used, copies cannot be made

unless the Key Counter is inserted into the copier. If the Key Counter
is not inserted securely, “Insert key counter.” appears on the message
display. (14) Fax Kit
If the Fax Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a fax. Also if the
Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer/Scanner Kit, this
copier can be used as a network fax, allowing transmission and
(11) Document Tray reception by a computer. For details, see the Operation Guide for the
fax.
The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next * In some cases, this function may not be used.
to the machine before using them, etc. It also contains space for
storing paper clips, etc.
8-12
1. If one of the following messages is displayed

When any of the following messages appears on the message display, take the indicated action.
Message Procedure Reference

page
“Close xxx cover x.” The cover indicated is open. Close the cover securely. ——
“Add paper in drawer.” There is no paper in the drawer[cassette] indicated. Load paper. 3-1
[“Add paper in cassette.”]
“Set drawer. ” One of the drawers[cassettes] is not closed properly. Pull it out and push it back in all ——
[“Close paper cassette.”] the way.
“Paper drawer is out of order. Select The drawer[cassette] currently in use is out of order and cannot be used. Contact ——
another paper drawer.” your service representative immediately. Continue copying using another
[“Paper cassette is out of order. Select drawer[cassette].
other paper cassette. ”]
“Check paper size.” No paper that can be used in the selected mode is loaded. Check the paper. ——
“Reposition original.” The orientation of the original and the selected paper are different. Change the ——
orientation of the original. If the [Start] key is pressed, same-size copying will be
performed.
“Exceeds pre registered copying The number of copies reached the limit set in the copy management mode and no 7-1
quantity.” more copies can be made. Clear the copy count from the management mode.
[“Copy limit for this ID-code has been
reached. No copying possible.”]
“Ready to copy. Add toner.” There is not enough toner in the copier. Replace the toner container immediately as 10-3
only one copy can be made at a time.
“Add toner to resume copying.” There is not enough toner in the copier to make copies. Replace the toner container 10-3
immediately.
“System error. Main switch off/on.” A system error has occurred. Turn the power switch OFF and then ON. ——
“System error. Disconnect power plug A system error has occurred. Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and connect ——
from the socket.” it again.
* If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, when the power cord is unplugged from the outlet, original data or reserved communication
information stored in the memory may be lost.
9-1

page
“Call service.” Open and close the front cover. If the same message appears again, make a note of ——
the “C” and the number appearing with it, turn the power switch OFF (O), unplug the
power cord from the outlet, and contact your service representative or authorized
service center.
“Time for maintenance.” Periodic maintenance is necessary to keep your copier in good condition. ——
Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as
possible.
“Close Document processor cover.” The Document Processor original cover of the optional document processor is open. ——
Close the cover securely.
“Memory full.” The copier memory is full. Either print out or clear all scanned data. It is not possible ——
to copy or scan another original until one of these two operations is performed.
The copier memory size and the capacity for scanning originals are shown below.
Number of originals that can be scanned*

Standard memory (64MB): approximately 322 pages
When the optional Hard Disk is installed (20GB): approximately 70,000 pages**
* When using our standard original (A4 original, 6% text)
** The maximum number of originals that can be scanned at one time is 999
(11" x 8 1/2" [A4]).
“Paper misfeed.” If paper is misfed, the copier will stop and the location of the misfeed will appear on 9-4
“Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.” the message display. Remove the misfed paper with the power switch turned ON ( | )
by following the appropriate procedure. If “Careful for Drum.” is displayed, be sure not
to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine when removing the
jammed paper.
“Duplex tray inoperable, call service.” The duplex unit is out of order and duplex copying is not possible. ——
[“Duplex unit is out of order. Call Contact your service representative immediately.
service.”]
“Clean the slit glass for original fed from The slit glass is dirty. This may result in black lines or other blemishes appearing on 10-1
DP.” [“Clean the slit glass for original copies when you use the optional Document Processor, so you should perform the
fed.”] cleaning operation on the slit glass.
“Attach Finisher.” Connect the optional Document Finisher securely to the copier. ——
“Finisher is out of order. Detach The optional Document Finisher is out of order and cannot be used for the moment. ——
Finisher.” Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as
possible.
“Paper capacity exceeded. Remove The maximum number of sheets that can be stored on the optional Document ——
paper from Finisher.” Finisher has been exceeded. Remove the copies from the Document Finisher.
“Remove paper form inner tray of Paper has been misfed inside the optional Document Finisher. See the Document
Finisher.” Finisher’s Operation Guide and remove the paper.
9-2

page
“Out of staples. Add staples.” There are no staples in the optional Document Finisher. See the Document ——
[“Stapler empty. Add staples.”] Finisher’s Operation Guide and replace the staple cartridge.
“Cannot staple this size.” Stapling is not possible with small size paper. For details, see the optional Document ——
[“Cannot staple this paper size.”] Finisher’s Operation Guide.
“Empty waste punch box.” The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is full. Refer to the ——
Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and dispose of the waste hole punch
chads.
“Check the waste punch box.” The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is not set properly. ——
[“Check Punch Hole box.”] Refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and set the hole punch
chad container properly.
“Replace the waste toner box.” The waste toner box is filled with waste toner. Replace the waste toner box with a 10-3
new one.
2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes

If one of the indicators to the left of the [Copier] key, the [Printer] key, or the [Scanner] key either lights orange or flashes orange, carry out the
appropriate procedure indicated below.
Indication Procedure Reference

page
Lights orange or flashes Check the appropriate response to the –

orange message, and perform the
corresponding procedure.
9-3
3. When paper misfeeds

If a paper misfeed occurs, a message will be displayed in the touch panel about the misfeed and copying will stop. Leave the power switch ON ( | )
and refer to “(2) Removal procedures” to remove the jammed paper.
Inch specification Metric specification
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum. Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1. 1. Open left cover1.

2. Remove paper. 2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover. 3. Close cover.
JAM 30 JAM 30
(1) Cautions (2) Removal procedures
1 Misfeed in paper feed section
WARNING • Misfeed in drawer[cassette] (JAM 10 to 13, 15 to 17)

If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the
High voltage is present in the charger section. Take drawer[cassette] (or optional Paper Feeder). Remove the misfed
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is paper using the procedure given below.
a danger of electrical shock.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
CAUTION 1. Open cassette1.

2. Remove paper.
3. Set cassette.
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take

sufficient care when working in this area, as there is JAM 10
a danger of getting burned.

Paper misfeed.
• Do not reuse misfed paper.
1. Open cassette1.
• If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose scraps 2. Remove paper.
3. Set cassette.
from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed later.
• After misfed paper has been removed, warm-up will begin. The
Misfeed indicator will turn off and the copier will return to the same
JAM 10
settings prior to the misfeed.
Open the drawer[cassette].

1
9-4
2 Remove the misfed paper while taking care not to tear it.
* If the paper should be torn, remove all the scraps from the 2 Remove the misfed paper.
inside the copier.
3 Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.
3 Close the drawer[cassette] slowly.
• Misfeed in left cover 1 (JAM 30, 40 to 44, 46, 47, 50 to 53, 60,
61)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left
cover 1. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.
1. Open left cover1.

2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
4 Remove the misfed paper in the output section.
JAM 30

2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 30
NOTE
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.
CAUTION
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
1 Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.
5 Close the left cover 1.
9-5
• Misfeed in left cover 1 (JAM 05)
Inch specifications

2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 05

4 Remove the misfed paper in the output section.

2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
JAM 05
NOTE

CAUTION
Close the left cover 1.

5
2 Remove the misfed paper.
9-6
6 Press the [Start] key after the “Press Start Key. Re-starting.”
message appears. 9 When the optional Fax Kit is installed, the message below
appears. Perform the appropriate action by following the
If the message below appears, proceed to the next step. message.
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum. System error.

Disconnect power plug from the socket.

11x81/2"
2. Remove paper.
Plain
3. Close cover.
81/2x11"
APS
Color 11x81/2"
11x81/2" Bypass 1-Sided
Plain Plain Sort
11x81/2"
Recycled
JAM 05
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum. System error.

Disconnect power plug from the socket.

2. Remove paper.
Plain
3. Close cover.
Colour APS
Bypass 1-Sided
Plain Plain Sort
Recycled
JAM 05
7 Repeat the steps 1 to 5. • Misfeed in left cover 2 (JAM 18, 22)

8 The message below appears. Perform the appropriate action
by following the message. Inch specifications
Inch specifications Paper misfeed.
System error.
Main switch off / on. 1. Open left cover2.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
11x81/2"
Plain
81/2x11"
APS
Color 11x81/2"
11x81/2" Bypass 1-Sided
Plain Plain Sort JAM 18
11x81/2"
Recycled
Metric specifications Paper misfeed.
System error.
Main switch off / on. 1. Open left cover 2.
2. Remove paper.
3. Close cover.
Plain
Colour APS
Bypass 1-Sided
Plain Plain Sort JAM 18
Recycled
1 Open the left cover 2.
9-7

2 Pull up the lever to remove the misfed paper.
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.
• Misfeed in multi-bypass tray (JAM14, 20, 21, 23)

If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the multi-
bypass tray.
Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove paper in bypass.

3. Remove paper.
4. Open front cover if you can not remove paper.
5. Turn right the green knob.
6. Remove paper.
7. Close the cover.
Remove the misfed paper.

4
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove paper in bypass.

2. Open left cover 1.
3. Remove paper.
4. Open front cover if you can not remove paper.
5. Turn green knob clockwise.
6. Remove paper.
7. Close cover.
1 Remove all the paper remaining in the multi-bypass tray.

If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.
9-8
6 Open the front cover.

10 Open the internal tray cover to remove the misfed paper.
7 Turn the knob clockwise to release the misfed paper from the
internal tray section. 11 If the paper has been torn, remove the internal tray.
Remove the misfed paper. 12 Remove the misfed paper.
8 If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.
13 Replace the internal tray in its original position.

Close the front cover.
9 Pull out the internal tray.
9-9
2 Misfeed in Document Processor (optional) (JAM 70 to 76)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the
3 If the misfed original is found, remove it.
* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose
Document Processor. Remove the misfed original using the procedure scraps from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed
given below. later.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Open the document processor.

2. Raise the reverse unit up.
3. Turn the left dial.
4. Remove original(s).
5. Close Document processor.
JAM 73
Paper misfeed.
1. Open document processor.

2. Raise reverse unit up.
3. Turn dial left.
4. Remove original (s).
5. Close Document processor.
4 Raise the reversing unit.
JAM 73 5 If the misfed original is found, remove it.

* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose
scraps from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed
later.
1 If the original is on the original table, remove it.
6 Turn the left knob to eject and remove the misfed original.
2 Open the Document Processor original cover.
7 Close the Document Processor original cover.
9-10
3 Misfeed in Built-in Finisher (optional) (JAM 80 to 84)
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the Built-in
Finisher. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure below.
Inch specifications
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove any paper in output part of Finisher

2. Pull the tray of finisher down.
3. Remove the paper if there is a paper.
4. Set the tray
JAM 84
1. Lower inner tray of finisher.

2. Remove the paper.
3. Remove the eject tray, open left cover of machine.
4. Remove the paper.
4 Raise the Built-in Finisher tray back into its original position.
5. Close cover and set the tray.
JAM 83
Paper misfeed.
1. Remove any paper in output part of Finisher.

2. Put Finisher tray down.
3. Remove any paper.
4. Set tray back.
JAM 84

5 Remove the tray.
1. Put inner tray of Finisher down.

2. Remove any paper.
3. Remove output tray, open left cover of machine.
4. Remove paper.
5. Close cover and set tray. 3
JAM 83
NOTE
2
Remove the misfed paper in the Built-in Finisher output

1 section.
2 Lower the Built-in Finisher tray.
9-11
8 Install the tray.
4 Misfed in Document Finisher (optional) (JAM 80 to 89)

If a misfeed has occurred in the Document Finisher, remove the
misfed paper referring to the Operation Guide for the Document
Finisher.
9-12
4. If other trouble occurs

If trouble occurs with your copier, carry out the applicable checkpoints and procedures indicated on the following pages.
If the trouble persists, contact your service representative or authorized service center.
Trouble Checkpoint Procedure Reference

page
Nothing lights on the Is the power plug connected to an AC Connect the plug to an AC outlet. ——
operation panel when the outlet?
power switch is turned ON.
No copies come out when Is there any message appearing on the Perform the corrective action corresponding 9-1
the [Start] key is pressed. message display? to the message.
-
Copies come out blank. Are the originals set correctly? When setting originals on the platen, place 4-1
them face-down.
When setting originals in the optional 8-2

Document Processor, place them face-up.
Copies come out too light. Is the copier in the auto exposure To change the overall exposure, perform the 7-73
mode? auto exposure adjustment.
Is the copier in the manual exposure mode? Adjust the exposure to the correct degree 4-2
using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
To change the overall exposure, perform the 7-75

exposure adjustment for the each copy 7-76
quality mode. 7-77
Is the add toner message displayed? Replace the toner container. 10-3
Is paper wet? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-1
9-13
Trouble Checkpoint Procedure Reference

page
Copies come out too dark. Is the copier in the auto exposure mode? To change the overall exposure, perform the 7-73
auto exposure adjustment.
Is the copier in the manual exposure mode? Adjust the exposure to the correct degree 4-2
using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
To change the overall exposure, perform the 7-75

exposure adjustment for the each copy 7-76
quality mode. 7-77
Copies are dirty. Is the platen or the original cover dirty? Clean the platen and/or the original cover. 10-1
Open the front cover and pull and push back 10-5
in the cleaning shaft.
Is the transfer roller contaminated? Clean the transfer roller with the cleaning 10-2
brush.
Copy image is askew. Are the originals set correctly? When setting originals on the platen, align 4-1
their edges with the correct original size
scale for their size.
When setting originals in the optional 8-2

Document Processor, adjust the original
insertion guides to the size of the originals
correctly.
Misfeed occurs frequently. Is the paper set correctly in the Set paper properly. 3-1
drawer[cassette]?
Is paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-1
Is there any misfed paper or loose scraps of Carry out the appropriate procedure to 9-4
paper remaining inside the copier? remove the paper.
Copies are wrinkled. Is the separation in the paper feed section Clean the separator. 10-1
dirty?
Black or white lines appear Is the electrostatic section dirty? Open the front cover and pull and push back 10-5
on the copy. in the cleaning shaft.
9-14
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
INFORMATION
1. Cleaning the copier

NOTE
CAUTION When the slit glass becomes dirty, “Clean the slit glass for original fed
from DP.” [“Clean the slit glass for original fed.”] may appear. In this
case, perform the cleaning operation on the slit glass and then touch
For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power the “End” key.
plug from the outlet when performing cleaning
Inch specifications
operations.
Clean the slit glass for original fed from DP.
● Cleaning the original cover Open the document processor.

Clean the surface of narrower glass
Lift open the original cover. Wipe the back side of the original cover located at left with a dry cloth.
Please close the document processor.
with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent. Press END key
If the slit glass is dirty, black line

* Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose. will appear on the copy.
End
Clean the slit glass for original fed.
Open the document processor.

Clean the surface of narrower glass
located at left with a dry cloth.
Please close the document processor.
Press END key
If the slit glass is dirty, black line

will appear on the copy.
End
● Cleaning the platen

Lift open the original cover. Wipe the platen with a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent.
* Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose. ● Cleaning the separator
NOTE
To keep the best copying quality, perform cleaning periodically

(approximately once a month) using the following procedure.
* If soiling, such as black lines appear on the copy while using the
optional Document Processor, the slit glass a is soiled.
Wipe the slit glass with a soft dry cloth.
* Never use water, thinner, organic solvents or alcohol.
10-1
● Cleaning the transfer roller
2 Remove the blue cleaning brush.
4 Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left

and right several times along the separator as shown in the
illustration.
4 While rotating the gear as shown, clean the transfer roller by

moving the cleaning brush from left to right along with the
transfer roller.
5 Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the

cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1
and the front cover.

10-2
2. Replacing the toner container and waste toner box

If “Add toner to resume copying.” appears on the message display,
replenish the toner. Although several copies can be made after the 2 Push up the toner container release lever and slowly pull the
old toner container out until the handle can be seen.
message appears, it is recommended that you replace the toner
container immediately. After replacing the toner container, be sure to
also replace the waste toner box.
Also be sure to clean the related parts when you replace a toner
container. Dirty parts can cause lower performance by your copier.
IMPORTANT!
• Replenish toner only when the message is displayed.

• When replacing a toner container, do not leave any items such as
floppy disks, etc., nearby.
Inch specifications
Ready to copy.
Add toner to resume copying.
Paper Size Set
11x81/2" WARNING
Combine
11x81/2"
Plain Orig.image High voltage is present in the charger section. Take
quality
1
8 /2x11"
Color APS AMS Sort:Off
Reduce
11x81/2"
Plain
Bypass
Plain
Auto
Exposure Sort:On /Enlarge
a danger of electrical shock.
11x81/2"
Adding
Basic User choice Function Program toner
Ready to copy.
Add toner to resume copying.
Paper Size Set
CAUTION
Merge copy Do not pull the toner container all the way as it can
Plain Image
quality
fall off.
APS AMS Sort:Off
Colour Reduce/
Bypass Auto Enlarge
Exposure Sort:On
Plain Plain

Recycled
Adding
Basic User choice Function Program toner
3 Grasp the handle on the toner container, push the left cover
1 handle up again and gently lift the toner container.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or
the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner
container or the waste toner box.
10-3
4 Take out the new toner container from the bag, and then tap
it on the top 5 to 6 times. 8 Remove the waste toner box.
9 Close the opening of the waste toner box with its seal.
5 Thoroughly shake the toner container (in the direction of the

arrow) ten times or more to loosen and mix the toner inside.
6 Grasp the handle on the toner container and insert the toner
container along the rail of the copier.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or
the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner
container or the waste toner box.
7 Hold the toner container by hands and fully insert it into the
copier.
10-4
<Cleaning the related parts>
13 Pull the electrostatic section out as far as it will go and then
push it back into the copier to a point just BEFORE the roller
10 Push the electrostatic section (with the blue handle) to the
right and then pull it out about 2 inches (5 cm).
A touches the white pad of the grid cleaner.
Repeat this step a few times.
11 Remove the cap from the grid cleaner.

IMPORTANT!
DO NOT push the electrostatic section all the way back into the copier
in this step as that may result in problems appearing in the printed
images.
14 With the electrostatic section pulled out about 2 inches

(5 cm), remove the grid cleaner and then push the
electrostatic section all the way back into the copier.
12 Attach the grid cleaner to the machine body aligning with the
notches.
15 Fit the new waste toner box into the copier.
10-5
16 Gently pull out the cleaning shaft (with the green handle) as
far as it will go and then push it back into the copier. 19 Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left
and right several times along the separator as shown in the
Repeat this step a few times. illustration.
IMPORTANT!
Do not pull the cleaning shaft with force or pull it out completely.

IMPORTANT!
Wait about 5 minutes after the cleaning operation is completed for the
electrostatic section to dry before attempting to start copying again.
NOTE
To keep the best copying quality, perform cleaning of steps 15 and 18

described above periodically (approximately once a month) in addition
to the time of toner container replacement.
● After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container

and the waste toner box in accordance with
Federal, State and Local rules and regulations.
10-6
3. Specifications
Type ............................................................................... Desk-top
Original table .................................................................. Fixed type
Copying system .............................................................. Indirect electrostatic
Originals ......................................................................... Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: 11" x 17"/A3)
Copy sizes ...................................................................... Drawers[Cassettes]: 11" x 17" / A3, 8 1/2" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8 1/2" / A4,
8 1/2" x 11" / A4R, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R, 8 1/2" x 13", Folio, 8K and 16K,
B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)
Multi-bypass tray: 11" x 17" / A3, 8 1/2" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8 1/2" / A4,
8 1/2" x 11" / A4R, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R, A6R, 8 1/2" x 13", Folio, 8K and 16K,
B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)
For 2-sided copying: 11" x 17" / A3 – 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R
Print margin loss: 0.5 mm – 5.5 mm
Copying speed ............................................................... 30 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;
11" x 17"/A3: 20 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 20 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 30 copies/min.,
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 22 copies/min., B5: 30 copies/min., B5R: 18 copies/min.
40 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;
11” x 17”/A3: 23 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 23 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 40 copies/min.,
50 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;
11” x 17”/A3: 26 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 26 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 50 copies/min.,
Warm-up time ................................................................. Within 25 seconds (at room temperature of 73.4°F (23°C), humidity 50%RH)
From Low power mode: Within 12 seconds
First copy time ................................................................ 30 cpm copiers: From 3.9 seconds (11" x 8 1/2"/A4)
40 cpm copiers, 50 cpm copiers: From 3.5 seconds (11" x 8 1/2"/A4)
Zoom ratio ...................................................................... Any ratio between 25 and 400% (in increments of 1%). Alternatively, standard ratios.
Standard amount of memory ......................................... 64 MB
Resolution ...................................................................... Reading: 600 x 600 dpi
Writing: 600 x 600 dpi
Paper feed system ......................................................... Automatic feeding from drawers[cassettes] (2 drawers[cassettes], capacity 500 sheets each
[80 g/m2/standard paper specified by our company]), automatic feeding from multi-bypass
(capacity 200 sheets [80g/m2])
Copy paper ..................................................................... <Paper weights>
Drawers[Cassettes]: 60 g/m2 – 105 g/m2
Duplex Unit: 64 g/m2 – 80 g/m2
Multi-bypass tray: 45 g/m2 – 200 g/m2; 110 lbs.
<Paper types>
Drawers[Cassettes]: Standard copy paper and color paper
Duplex Unit: Standard copy paper and color paper
Multi-bypass tray: Standard copy paper, letterhead, color paper, tracing paper,
OHP transparencies, envelopes, etc.
Continuous copying ........................................................ 1 – 999 sheets
Light source ................................................................... Rare gas lamp
Developing system ......................................................... Dry process
Fixing system ................................................................. Heat roller
Cleaning system ............................................................ Blade and cleaning roller
Photoconductor .............................................................. a-Si
Standard functions and modes ...................................... Auto paper selection mode, Image quality selection, Auto magnification selection mode,
Zoom mode, Preset zoom mode, XY zoom mode, 2-sided copy modes, Page separation/
Split copy modes, Margin mode, Centering/Image shift mode, Memo mode, Border erase
modes, Combine/Merge Copy modes, Print page numbers mode, Form overlay mode,
Booklet/Stitching mode, Book to Booklet mode, Sort/Finished mode, Auto rotation function,
Cover mode, Transparency + backing sheet mode, Invert mode, Mirror image mode, Proof
mode, Repeat copy mode*, Batch scanning mode, Eco print mode, Program function, Job
build mode, Form registration*, Shared data box*, Synergy print boxes*, Copy management
mode, Language selection function
* Requires the optional Hard Disk
10-7
Power source ................................................................. Inch specifications: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A Max.
Metric specifications: 220-240 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz, 6.5 A Max.
Dimensions .................................................................... 23"(W) x 25 2/5"(D) x 29 1/3"(H)
585 mm (W) x 646 mm (D) x 745 mm (H)
Weight ............................................................................ Approx. 165 lbs.
Approx. 82 kg
Noise emission ............................................................... < = 70dB (A)
Required space .............................................................. 23"(W) x 25 2/5"(D)
585 mm (W) x 646 mm (D)
Optional equipment ........................................................ Document Processor, Paper Feeder, Document Finisher, Bult-in Finisher, Job Separator,
Hard Disk, Key Counter, Document Tray, Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit, Fax Kit
(Specifications are subject to change without notice.)
10-8
4. Environmental Specifications
● Power consumption
30 cpm copiers 40 cpm copiers 50 cpm copiers
Inch Metric Inch Metric Inch Metric

specifications specifications specifications specifications specifications specifications
• During copying 670 wh or less 670 wh or less 685 wh or less 685 wh or less 720 wh or less 760 wh or less
• During standby 175 wh or less 200 wh or less 175 wh or less 200 wh or less 175 wh or less 200 wh or less
• During the Low Power mode 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less
• Recovery time from the Low Power 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or
mode less less less less less less
• During the Off and Sleep mode 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less
• Transition time to the Low Power 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes
mode (at time of purchase)
• Transition time to the Off and Sleep 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes
modes (at time of purchase)
• During the Plugged-In mode 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less 0.1 wh or less
* Power consumption in the Plugged-In mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet.
● Duplex (2-sided) copying

• Comes as standard equipment
● Paper feed
• Recycled paper made from 100% recycled pulp may be used with this product.
* Contact your sales or service representative for information on recommended paper types, etc.
10-9
5. Installing the optional equipment

This section shows where to install the optional units for this copier. For more details, refer to the Operation Guide for the corresponding optional
unit.
● Available optional units

The following optional units can be installed on your copier.
Document Original Cover Key Counter Document Tray Printer/Scanner Kit

Processor
Printer Kit
Hard Disk
Fax Kit
Document Paper Feeder

Finisher
Document Document Paper Feeder

Built-in Finisher Job Separator
Finisher Finisher
10-10
Document Processor
The Duplex Document Processor automatically feeds one-sided originals one by one for scanning. It also reverses two-sided originals automatically
for duplex copying and page separation copying.
Paper Feeder
Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer[cassette] in the main body can be added.
Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the standard drawer[cassette] in the main unit.
Paper Feeder
The Paper Feeder holds up to 3,000 sheets of 11" x 8 1/2" [A4 or B5 (B5 is for Asia-Pacific specification copiers only)] size standard paper.
Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go, and then load up to 1,500 sheets of paper in each rows.
Document Finisher
This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the position of each copy set for ease of sorting. It can staple finished copy sets and bind
them. It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes (optional).
Document Finisher
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected. It is also possible to
use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or punch holes in them for filling purposes.
Document Finisher
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts multiple sets (Sort: ON) or groups copies made from multiple originals, with all the
copies produced from an individual original grouped together in one set (Sort: OFF). It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple sorted
copy sets.
Built-in Finisher
The finisher stores a large quantity of copies. It can also sorts multiple copies into sets by shifting the eject position. Paginated copies can be
stapled, too.
Job Separator
When using the optional printer function, the paper eject point can be changed according to the used function, making it easier to sort paper. Copied
-paper can be ejected to the Job Separator (upper section). See “Copy eject location” in Machine default setting on page 7-49.
Hard Disk
The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and functions of your copier.
• Job reservation
• Form overlay of registered forms
• Repeat copying
• Document management functions
• Using the output management functions to change the job printing order, cancel and delete print jobs, and verify content
It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID-codes under document management.
Key Counter
The Key Counter determines the number of copies that have been made. It is useful for copier centralized management on a department or even
company level.
Document Tray
The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next to the machine before using them, etc. It also contains space for storing
paper clips, etc.
Printer Kit
If the Printer Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer.
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers.
Printer/Scanner Kit
If the Printer/Scanner Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer or a network scanner.
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers.
Fax Kit
If the Fax Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a fax. Also if the Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer/Scanner Kit, this copier can be
used as a network fax, allowing transmission and reception by a computer.
10-11
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart
This copier contains many different functions and settings, and many of them can be used in combination for more efficient copying.
Refer to the following chart for details on combining specific functions and settings.
: Combination is possible 06: The border erase modes cannot be used in 11: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the 2-
---: Combination is NOT possible combination with original size selection (input size). sided copy modes cannot be used in combination with
01: Auto exposure adjustment is not available for the photo 07: The border erase modes and the auto selection/filing each other.
mode. The text&photo mode, the text mode, or manual mode cannot be used in combination with each other. 12: Cannot be used in combination with the auto selection/
exposure adjustment will be selected. 08: The book erase mode and the booklet/stitching mode filing mode.
02: Only the auto magnification selection mode is available. cannot be used in combination with each other. 13: The 2-sided copy modes and the invert mode cannot
That mode will be selected. 09: Not available because open-faced originals must be set be used in combination with each other.
03: Only same size (100% [1:1]) copying in the auto paper with the top edge towards the rear of the platen. 14: Open-faced originals cannot be used in combination
selection mode is available. That mode will be selected. 10: The booklet/stitching mode and book to booklet mode with original size selection.
04: The margin mode cannot be used in combination with will be given second priority when the 2-sided copy 15: The book g page separation/split copy mode cannot be
the booklet/stitching mode or the book to booklet mode. modes or the page separation/split copy modes are used in combination with the combine/merge copy
05: The margin mode cannot be used in combination with selected. modes or the memo mode.
the combine/merge copy modes or the memo mode.
Function selected second

Function selected first
1 Image quality mode (text&photo)
2 Image quality mode (photo) 01
3 Image quality mode (text)
4 Copy exposure mode (auto exposure) 01
5 Copy exposure mode (manual exposure)
6 Eco print mode
7 Original size selection (standard size) 12 12
8 Original size selection (input size) 12 12
9 Original size selection (auto selection)
0 Original size selection (custom original size) 12 12
! Same size (100% [1:1]) copying 03 02
@ XY zoom mode 03 02
# Auto magnification selection mode 03
$ Zoom mode 03 02
% Paper selection 31
^ Original set direction
& Batch scanning mode 27
* Auto rotation function
( Auto selection/filing mode (auto selection) 12 12 12 03 03 03 03 12
) Auto selection/filing mode (filing) 12 12 12 02 02 02 33
⁄ Proof mode
¤ Repeat copy mode (settings)
‹ Sort mode
› Finished mode
fi Staple mode 12
fl Punch mode
‡ 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR1 sided)
— 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR2 sided) 12
· 2-sided copy modes (2 sidedR2 sided)
‚ 2-sided copy modes (BookR2 sided) 14 14 14 09 12 12
Œ Page separation/Split copy modes (2 sidedR1 sided)
„ Page separation/Split copy modes (BookR1 sided) 14 14 14 09 12 12
´ Booklet/Stitching mode 20 20 02 12 12
‰ Book to Booklet mode 20 20 02 02 02 09 12 12
ˇ Margin mode
Á Centering/Image shift mode
¨ Border erase modes (Sheet erase) 06 06 07 07
ˆ Border erase modes (Individual border erase) 06 06 07 07
Ø Border erase modes (Book erase) 06 06 09 07 07
∏ Combine/Merge Copy modes 32 32 02 12 12
Å Memo mode 32 32 02 12 12
Í Form overlay mode 12 12 35
Î Cover mode 24 24 12 12
Ï Transparency + backing sheet mode 29 29 12 12 30
˝ Print page numbers mode 12 12
Ó Invert mode
Ô Mirror image mode
 Interrupt copying
Ò Document management functions (form registration)
Ú Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])
¸ Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])
˛ Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])
Ç Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])
◊ Output management functions (interrupt print)
ı Repeat copy mode (print out)
˜ Job build mode (Step 1)
Â Job build mode (from step 2)
¯ Scanner functions (Scan to PC)
˘ Scanner functions (Send E-mail)
¿ Scanner functions (TWAIN)
¡ Scanner functions (Database connection)
10-12
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart
16: The book g page separation/split copy mode and the 23: The booklet/stitching and book to booklet modes 30: The transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be
transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be used in cannot be used in combination with the combine/merge used in combination with the sort/finished mode, the
combination with each other. copy modes or the memo mode. staple mode or the punch mode.
17: The print page numbers mode is only available in the 24: The cover mode cannot be used in combination with 31: The selected paper setting will be canceled in order to
auto magnification selection mode. original size selection (input size). switch to the auto paper selection mode.
18: Because a cover can be selected within the booklet/ 25: The cover mode cannot be used in combination with 32: The combine/merge copy modes and the memo mode
stitching and book to booklet modes, they cannot be the combine/merge copy modes or the memo mode. cannot be used in combination with original size
used in combination with the cover mode. 26: The cover mode and the invert mode cannot be used in selection (input size).
19: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the cover combination with each other. 33: Cannot be used in combination with the batch scanning
mode cannot be used in combination with each other. 27: The function selected second will be given priority and mode.
20: The booklet/stitching and book to booklet modes the function selected first will be canceled. 34: Cannot be used in combination with interrupt copying.
cannot be used in combination with original size 28: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the invert 35: Not available in combination with the form overlay
selection (input size). mode cannot be used in combination with each other. mode.
21: The function selected second will be given priority and 29: The transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be
original size selection (auto selection) will engage. used in combination with original size selection (input ™: Image quality (OCR)
22: Cannot be used in combination with the punch mode. size).
Function selected second

Function selected first
1 Image quality mode (text&photo)
2 Image quality mode (photo)
3 Image quality mode (text)
4 Copy exposure mode (auto exposure)
5 Copy exposure mode (manual exposure)
6 Eco print mode
14 14 7 Original size selection (standard size)
14 14 21 21 06 06 06 32 32 24 29 8 Original size selection (input size)
9 Original size selection (auto selection)
14 14 21 21 06 06 06 32 32 24 29 0 Original size selection (custom original size)
02 ! Same size (100% [1:1]) copying
02 02 02 02 @ XY zoom mode
# Auto magnification selection mode
02 $ Zoom mode
% Paper selection
09 09 09 09 ^ Original set direction
& Batch scanning mode
* Auto rotation function
12 12 12 12 12 12 07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12 12 ( Auto selection/filing mode (auto selection)
12 12 12 12 07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12 ) Auto selection/filing mode (filing)
34 ⁄ Proof mode
35 ¤ Repeat copy mode (settings)
‹ Sort mode
27 › Finished mode
27 fi Staple mode
22 22 27 fl Punch mode
‡ 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR1 sided)
10 10 11 13 — 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR2 sided)
10 10 11 13 · 2-sided copy modes (2 sidedR2 sided)
10 10 15 15 35 11 13 ‚ 2-sided copy modes (BookR2 sided)
10 10 Œ Page separation/Split copy modes (2 sidedR1 sided)
10 10 15 15 35 16 „ Page separation/Split copy modes (BookR1 sided)
22 10 10 10 10 10 04 08 23 23 35 18 11 13 ´ Booklet/Stitching mode
22 10 10 10 10 10 04 23 23 35 18 11 13 ‰ Book to Booklet mode
04 04 05 05 ˇ Margin mode
Á Centering/Image shift mode
¨ Border erase modes (Sheet erase)
ˆ Border erase modes (Individual border erase)
08 Ø Border erase modes (Book erase)
15 15 23 23 05 35 25 ∏ Combine/Merge Copy modes
15 15 23 23 05 35 25 Å Memo mode
35 35 35 35 35 35 Í Form overlay mode
18 18 25 25 19 26 Î Cover mode
30 30 11 11 11 16 11 11 19 28 34 Ï Transparency + backing sheet mode
˝ Print page numbers mode
13 13 13 13 13 27 27 Ó Invert mode
Ô Mirror image mode
 Interrupt copying
Ò Document management functions (form registration)
Ú Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])
¸ Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])
˛ Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])
Ç Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])
◊ Output management functions (interrupt print)
ı Repeat copy mode (print out)
˜ Job build mode (Step 1)
Â Job build mode (from step 2)
¯ Scanner functions (Scan to PC)
˘ Scanner functions (Send E-mail)
¿ Scanner functions (TWAIN)
¡ Scanner functions (Database connection)
10-13
10-14
Copy eject location (machine default setting) ............................... 7-49
Index Copy limit (copy default setting) .................................................... 7-82
Copy management mode ................................................................ 7-1
Copying in the Hole Punch mode .................................................... 8-8
Numerics Copying in the Sort:OFF mode ....................................................... 8-6
2 in 1 ............................................................................................. 5-13 Copying in the Sort:ON mode ......................................................... 8-5
2-sided copy modes ........................................................................ 5-1 Copying in the Staple mode ............................................................ 8-7
4 in 1 ............................................................................................. 5-13 Cover drawer[cassette] (copy default setting) ............................... 7-71
Cover mode ................................................................................... 5-31
Custom paper type for 2-sided copying
A (machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-46
Accessing the copy default settings .............................................. 7-62 Customize screen layout (Add functions) (copy default setting) ... 7-86
Accessing the copy management menu screen ............................. 7-3 Customize screen layout (Main functions) (copy default setting) .. 7-85
Accessing the machine default settings ........................................ 7-41
Adjusting the copy exposure ........................................................... 4-2
D
At the end of copying ...................................................................... 4-4
Day & time (machine default setting) ............................................ 7-54
Auto clear function .......................................................................... 2-4
Default drawer[cassette] (copy default setting) ............................. 7-70
Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-42 Default magnification ratio (copy default setting) .......................... 7-72
Auto exposure adjustment (copy default setting) .......................... 7-73 Default operation mode (machine default setting) ........................ 7-51
Auto exposure adjustment (OCR) (copy default setting) .............. 7-74 Default settings ............................................................................. 7-38
Auto low power function ................................................................. 4-11 Delete department ID-codes ......................................................... 7-16
Auto low power time (machine default setting) ............................. 7-48 Deleting a registered program ...................................................... 5-52
Auto magnification selection mode ................................................. 4-5 Deleting a registration key ............................................................ 5-55
Auto rotation function .................................................................... 5-30 Document Finisher .................................................................. 8-5, 8-9
Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ..................... 7-79 Document management functions .................................................. 6-1
Auto selection mode ....................................................................... 8-3 Document Processor ...................................................................... 8-1
Auto selection/Filing mode .............................................................. 8-3 Document Tray .............................................................................. 8-12
Auto sleep function ........................................................................ 4-11 Drawer[Cassette] ............................................................................ 3-2
Auto sleep ON/OFF (machine default setting) .............................. 7-57 Drum refresh ................................................................................. 7-91
Auto sleep time (machine default setting) ..................................... 7-47
Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function ............................... 2-4 E
Eco print mode .............................................................................. 5-48
B Eco print mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ............................. 7-66
Background exposure adjustment (copy default setting) .............. 7-67 Editing copy management information ............................................ 7-4
BASIC OPERATION ....................................................................... 4-1 Enlarging/reducing the copy image ................................................. 4-5
Batch scanning mode ................................................................... 5-47 Entering characters ..................................................................... 7-104
Book erase mode ........................................................................... 5-11 Environmental specifications ........................................................ 10-9
Book to Booklet mode ................................................................... 5-26 Erased border width (copy default setting) ................................... 7-81
Booklet/Stitching mode ................................................................. 5-22 Exposure adjustment step (copy default setting) .......................... 7-64
Border erase modes ...................................................................... 5-11 Exposure mode (copy default setting) .......................................... 7-63
Box management default settings ................................................. 7-94
Built-in Finisher ............................................................................... 8-9 F
Fax eject location (machine default setting) .................................. 7-50
C Fax Kit ........................................................................................... 8-12
CAUTION LABELS ......................................................................... 1-1 Filing mode ..................................................................................... 8-4
Centering/Image shift mode ............................................................ 5-8 Form overlay mode ....................................................................... 5-20
Changing a registered program name .......................................... 5-51 Form registration ............................................................................. 6-1
Changing the copy management default settings ......................... 7-25
Changing the energy-saving mode (machine default setting) ....... 7-58 H
Changing the management code (machine default setting) ......... 7-56 Hard Disk ...................................................................................... 8-11
Checking the copy management counts ....................................... 7-21 Hard disk management ................................................................. 7-99
Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report ..... 7-93 How to set originals in the Document Processor ............................ 8-2
Cleaning the copier ....................................................................... 10-1
Cleaning the original cover ........................................................... 10-1
Cleaning the platen ....................................................................... 10-1
Cleaning the separator .................................................................. 10-1
Cleaning the transfer roller ............................................................ 10-2
Combine/Merge Copy modes ....................................................... 5-13
COPIER MANAGEMENT ................................................................ 7-1
Copy default settings ..................................................................... 7-59

I O
If one of the following messages is displayed ................................. 9-1 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 8-1
If one of these indicators lights or flashes ....................................... 9-3 Original quality (copy default setting) ............................................ 7-65
If other trouble occurs ................................................................... 9-13 Original set direction ..................................................................... 5-49
Individual border erase mode ....................................................... 5-12 Original size registration ............................................................... 7-90
Initial mode ...................................................................................... 2-4 Original size selection ................................................................... 5-34
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS .................................................... 1-2 Originals that can be used with the Document Processor .............. 8-1
Installing the optional equipment ................................................ 10-10 Output management functions ...................................................... 6-20
Interrupt copying ............................................................................. 4-9
Invert mode ................................................................................... 5-38 P
Page separation/Split copy modes .................................................. 5-4
J Paper Feeder .................................................................................. 8-5
Job build mode .............................................................................. 5-57 Paper selection (copy default setting) ........................................... 7-68
Job reservation ............................................................................. 4-10 Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)
Job Separator ............................................................................... 8-11 (machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-43
Paper type (auto paper selection mode) (copy default setting) ..... 7-69
Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)
K (machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-44
Key Counter .................................................................................. 8-12 Photo mode ..................................................................................... 4-3
Precautions for the use of Document Processor ............................. 8-1
L PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ............................................................. 1-3
Language selection function ....................................................... 7-103 Preset zoom mode .......................................................................... 4-7
Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-1 Print page numbers mode ............................................................. 5-16
Low power mode ............................................................................ 4-11 “Print status” screen ...................................................................... 6-22
Printer Kit ...................................................................................... 8-12
Printer/Scanner Kit ........................................................................ 8-12
M
Printing out with the repeat copy mode ......................................... 5-43
Machine default settings ............................................................... 7-38
Program function ........................................................................... 5-50
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION .................... 10-1
Proof mode ................................................................................... 5-40
Making copies when copy management is turned ON .................. 7-37
Making copy default settings ......................................................... 7-63
Making machine default settings ................................................... 7-42 R
Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode) Register new department ID-codes ................................................ 7-4
(copy default setting) ..................................................................... 7-77 Registering a copy job for repeat copying ..................................... 5-42
Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) (copy default setting) .. 7-76 Registering a function or mode under a function key .................... 5-53
Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode) Registering a program .................................................................. 5-50
(copy default setting) ..................................................................... 7-75 Registration keys ........................................................................... 5-53
Margin mode ................................................................................... 5-6 Registration keys ON/OFF (copy default setting) ......................... 7-84
Margin width (copy default setting) ............................................... 7-80 Repeat copy mode ........................................................................ 5-42
Memo mode .................................................................................... 5-9 Repeat copying ON/OFF (copy default setting) ............................ 7-83
Mirror image mode ........................................................................ 5-39 Report print out ........................................................................... 7-101
Misfed in Document Finisher ........................................................ 9-12
Misfeed in Built-in Finisher ............................................................. 9-11
S
Misfeed in Document Processor ................................................... 9-10
Saving on toner use ...................................................................... 5-48
Misfeed in drawer[cassette] ............................................................ 9-4
Selecting functions .......................................................................... 4-1
Misfeed in left cover 1 ............................................................. 9-5, 9-6
Selecting the image quality ............................................................. 4-3
Misfeed in left cover 2 ..................................................................... 9-7
Selecting the paper size .................................................................. 4-2
Misfeed in multi-bypass tray ........................................................... 9-8
Separate front and back margin settings ........................................ 5-6
Misfeed in paper feed section ......................................................... 9-4
Setting an original ........................................................................... 4-1
Multi-bypass tray ............................................................................. 3-3
Setting the Key Counter ................................................................ 8-12
Multi-bypass tray paper settings ................................................... 7-87
Setting the number of copies to be made ....................................... 4-3
Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-45 Shared data box .............................................................................. 6-4
Sheet erase mode ......................................................................... 5-11
Silent mode ON/OFF (machine default setting) ............................ 7-53
N
Sleep mode ................................................................................... 4-11
NAMES OF PARTS ......................................................................... 2-1
Sort/Finished mode ....................................................................... 5-29
Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ...................... 7-78
Special paper action setting (machine default setting) ............... 7-46-1
Specifications ................................................................................ 10-7
Start copying ................................................................................... 4-3
Synergy print boxes ........................................................................ 6-9

T
Text mode ........................................................................................ 4-3
Text+photo mode ............................................................................ 4-3
Time difference (machine default setting) ..................................... 7-55
Toner Container ............................................................................ 10-3
Touch panel sound ON/OFF (machine default setting) ................. 7-52
Transparency + backing sheet mode ............................................ 5-36
Turning the copy management function ON/OFF ......................... 7-25
U
Using programmed settings to make copies ................................. 5-51
W
Warm-up ......................................................................................... 4-1
Waste Toner Box ........................................................................... 10-3
When paper misfeeds ..................................................................... 9-4
X
XY zoom mode ................................................................................ 4-8
Z
Zoom mode ..................................................................................... 4-6

A1

* For best copy results and machine performance, we
recommend that you use only KYOCERA MITA original
supplies for your KYOCERA MITA copier.

©2003
http://www.kyoceramita.com
2003. 12
is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation 2FD80022C

Mita KM 5035

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Mita KM 5035

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

3035

Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier

Legal Restriction On Copying

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

The explanations contained in this Operation Guide have been

Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.

Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS

Section 4 BASIC OPERATION

Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS

Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT

Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT

Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION

PREPARATIONS ................................... 3-1 11. Making booklets from book originals

Section 5 23. Original set direction .............................................................. 5-49

COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7-1

5 1/2"✕8 1/2" (A5) 64% (70%)

................. [General warning]

................. [Warning of danger of electrical shock]

................. [Warning of high temperature]

.................. [Warning of prohibited action]

................... [Disassembly prohibited]

.................. [Alert of required action]

.................. [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

.................. [Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection]

NOTE: DO NOT remove these labels.

• Delicate floor material may be damaged if this product is

• DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with

• ALWAYS contact your service representative for

Other precautions ■ Cautions when handling

• DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the

• Store all consumables in a cool, dark location.

• If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period

2. The CDRH Act

DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

7. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND (CONDITIONS),

– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION – The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.

1 Original cover (Option)

3 Left cover 1 handle

6 Original size scales

# Toner container release lever

$ Waste toner box

& Power switch

* Copy store section

( Length adjustment plate

) Width adjustment lever

⁄ Handles for transport

● Auto clear function

● Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function

• The automatic drawer[cassette] switching function can be turned

Paper Size Set

Basic User choice Function Program

Paper Size Set

Exposure Reduce/ Sort/

Basic User choice Function Program

size and type of paper will be highlighted. Drawer[Cassette] No.3

7 Copy exposure adjustment keys / Copy exposure scale

selected setting. See page 4-2.)

0 “AMS” key Exposure Reduce Auto Batch

Sort/ Border Cover